aboutsummaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/contrib/ncurses/man
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorPeter Wemm <peter@FreeBSD.org>1999-08-24 01:06:48 +0000
committerPeter Wemm <peter@FreeBSD.org>1999-08-24 01:06:48 +0000
commit0e3d540892016a47f6a68ec9ba2879d35ce5f7c2 (patch)
treead214c5b2c8142ad6dc6d2ce3a9c83e6317d7f77 /contrib/ncurses/man
downloadsrc-0e3d540892016a47f6a68ec9ba2879d35ce5f7c2.tar.gz
src-0e3d540892016a47f6a68ec9ba2879d35ce5f7c2.zip
Import unmodified (but trimmed) ncurses 5.0 prerelease 990821.vendor/ncurses/5.0-19990821
This contains the full eti (panel, form, menu) extensions. bmake glue to follow. Obtained from: ftp://ftp.clark.net/pub/dickey/ncurses
Notes
Notes: svn path=/vendor/ncurses/dist/; revision=50276 svn path=/vendor/ncurses/5.0-19990821/; revision=50278; tag=vendor/ncurses/5.0-19990821
Diffstat (limited to 'contrib/ncurses/man')
-rwxr-xr-xcontrib/ncurses/man/MKterminfo.sh99
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/Makefile.in75
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/captoinfo.1m188
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/clear.148
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_addch.3x163
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_addchstr.3x84
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_addstr.3x77
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_attr.3x215
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_beep.3x63
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_bkgd.3x101
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_border.3x108
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_clear.3x94
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_color.3x190
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_delch.3x68
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_deleteln.3x84
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_getch.3x274
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_getstr.3x102
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_getyx.3x72
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_inch.3x73
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_inchstr.3x84
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_initscr.3x116
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_inopts.3x214
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_insch.3x68
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_insstr.3x90
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_instr.3x84
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_kernel.3x152
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_mouse.3x206
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_move.3x63
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_outopts.3x168
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_overlay.3x75
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_pad.3x111
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_print.3x74
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_printw.3x76
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_refresh.3x112
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_scanw.3x77
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_scr_dump.3x93
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_scroll.3x78
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_slk.3x139
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_termattrs.3x107
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_termcap.3x112
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_terminfo.3x255
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_touch.3x93
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_util.3x114
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/curs_window.3x152
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/define_key.3x70
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/dft_fgbg.3x84
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form.3x200
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_cursor.3x74
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_data.3x63
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_driver.3x272
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_field.3x97
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_attributes.3x91
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_buffer.3x99
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_info.3x80
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_just.3x78
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_new.3x96
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_opts.3x120
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_userptr.3x73
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_validation.3x127
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_fieldtype.3x126
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_hook.3x100
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_new.3x79
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_new_page.3x77
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_opts.3x90
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_page.3x95
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_post.3x90
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_requestname.3x69
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_userptr.3x73
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/form_win.3x95
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/infocmp.1m364
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/keybound.3x67
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/keyok.3x69
-rwxr-xr-xcontrib/ncurses/man/make_sed.sh83
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/man_db.renames113
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu.3x190
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_attribs.3x100
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_cursor.3x73
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_driver.3x170
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_format.3x84
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_hook.3x101
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_items.3x91
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_mark.3x84
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_new.3x79
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_opts.3x104
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_pattern.3x82
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_post.3x91
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_requestname.3x69
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_spacing.3x84
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_userptr.3x73
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/menu_win.3x95
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_current.3x101
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_name.3x64
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_new.3x83
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_opts.3x84
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_userptr.3x72
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_value.3x76
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_visible.3x59
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/ncurses.3x912
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/panel.3x182
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/resizeterm.3x87
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/term.5208
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/term.7204
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/terminfo.head95
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/terminfo.tail1497
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/tic.1m285
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/toe.1m81
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/tput.1241
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/tset.1247
-rw-r--r--contrib/ncurses/man/wresize.3x70
109 files changed, 14523 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/MKterminfo.sh b/contrib/ncurses/man/MKterminfo.sh
new file mode 100755
index 000000000000..a6f765a4f00c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/MKterminfo.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#***************************************************************************
+# Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+# *
+# Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+# copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+# "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+# without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+# distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+# copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+# furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+# *
+# The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+# in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+# *
+# THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+# OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+# MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+# IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+# DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+# OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+# THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+# *
+# Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+# holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+# sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+# authorization. *
+#***************************************************************************
+#
+# $Id: MKterminfo.sh,v 1.5 1998/09/06 00:20:01 tom Exp $
+#
+# MKterminfo.sh -- generate terminfo.5 from Caps tabular data
+#
+# This script takes terminfo.head and terminfo.tail and splices in between
+# them a table derived from the Caps data file. Besides avoiding having
+# the docs fall out of sync with the table, this also lets us set up tbl
+# commands for better formatting of the table.
+#
+# NOTE: The s in this script really are control characters. It translates
+#  to \n because I couldn't get used to inserting linefeeds directly. There
+# had better be no s in the table source text.
+#
+head=$1
+caps=$2
+tail=$3
+cat <<'EOF'
+'\" t
+.\" DO NOT EDIT THIS FILE BY HAND!
+.\" It is generated from terminfo.head, Caps, and terminfo.tail.
+.\"
+.\" Note: this must be run through tbl before nroff.
+.\" The magic cookie on the first line triggers this under some man programs.
+EOF
+cat $head
+
+temp=temp$$
+sorted=sorted$$
+unsorted=unsorted$$
+trap "rm -f $sorted $temp $unsorted; exit 99" 1 2 5 15
+
+sed -n <$caps "\
+/%%-STOP-HERE-%%/q
+/^#%/s///p
+/^#/d
+s/$/T}/
+s/ [Y\-][B\-][C\-][G\-][E\-]\** / T{/
+s/ bool / /p
+s/ num / /p
+s/ str / /p
+" |sed -e 's/^$/../' | tr "\134" "\006" >$unsorted
+
+rm -f $sorted
+rm -f $temp
+saved=no
+while true
+do
+ read data
+ test -z "$data" && break
+ case "$data" in #(vi
+ **) #(vi
+ echo "$data" >>$temp
+ saved=yes
+ ;;
+ *)
+ if test $saved = yes ; then
+ saved=no
+ sort $temp >>$sorted
+ rm -f $temp
+ fi
+ echo "$data" >>$sorted
+ ;;
+ esac
+done <$unsorted
+test $saved = yes && sort $temp >>$sorted
+
+sed -e 's/^\.\.$//' $sorted | tr "\005\006" "\012\134"
+cat $tail
+
+rm -f $sorted $temp $unsorted
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/Makefile.in b/contrib/ncurses/man/Makefile.in
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f0607f566293
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/Makefile.in
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+# $Id: Makefile.in,v 1.25 1998/02/11 12:13:49 tom Exp $
+##############################################################################
+# Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #
+# #
+# Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a #
+# copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), #
+# to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation #
+# the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, distribute #
+# with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to #
+# permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the #
+# following conditions: #
+# #
+# The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in #
+# all copies or substantial portions of the Software. #
+# #
+# THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR #
+# IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, #
+# FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL #
+# THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER #
+# LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING #
+# FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER #
+# DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. #
+# #
+# Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright #
+# holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, #
+# use or other dealings in this Software without prior written #
+# authorization. #
+##############################################################################
+#
+# Author: Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@clark.net> 1996,1997
+#
+# Makefile for ncurses manual pages.
+#
+# NOTE: When you add or rename a man page, make sure you update both
+# the top-level MANIFEST and any man/*.renames files!
+
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+INSTALL_PREFIX = @INSTALL_PREFIX@
+srcdir = @srcdir@
+prefix = @prefix@
+exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@
+datadir = @datadir@
+mandir = @mandir@
+
+ticdir = $(datadir)/terminfo
+
+INSTALL = @INSTALL@
+INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@
+
+all \
+sources: terminfo.5
+
+$(INSTALL_PREFIX)$(mandir) :
+ $(srcdir)/../mkinstalldirs $@
+
+install install.man : terminfo.5 $(INSTALL_PREFIX)$(mandir)
+ sh ./edit_man.sh installing $(INSTALL_PREFIX)$(mandir) terminfo.5 $(srcdir)/*.[0-9]*
+
+uninstall uninstall.man :
+ -sh ./edit_man.sh removing $(INSTALL_PREFIX)$(mandir) terminfo.5 $(srcdir)/*.[0-9]*
+
+# We compose terminfo.5 from the real sources...
+CAPLIST=$(srcdir)/../include/Caps
+terminfo.5: $(srcdir)/terminfo.head $(CAPLIST) $(srcdir)/terminfo.tail Makefile $(srcdir)/MKterminfo.sh
+ sh $(srcdir)/MKterminfo.sh $(srcdir)/terminfo.head $(CAPLIST) $(srcdir)/terminfo.tail >terminfo.5
+
+mostlyclean :
+ -rm -f core tags TAGS *~ *.ln *.atac trace
+
+clean: mostlyclean
+ rm -f terminfo.5
+
+distclean realclean: clean
+ rm -f Makefile edit_man.*
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/captoinfo.1m b/contrib/ncurses/man/captoinfo.1m
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..70e278cbf6f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/captoinfo.1m
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: captoinfo.1m,v 1.13 1998/12/26 19:57:11 tom Exp $
+.TH captoinfo 1M ""
+.ds n 5
+.ds d @DATADIR@/terminfo
+.SH NAME
+\fBcaptoinfo\fR - convert a \fItermcap\fR description into a \fIterminfo\fR description
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBcaptoinfo\fR [\fB-v\fR\fIn\fR \fIwidth\fR] [\fB-V\fR] [\fB-1\fR] [\fB-w\fR \fIwidth\fR] \fIfile\fR . . .
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\fBcaptoinfo\fR looks in \fIfile\fR for \fBtermcap\fR descriptions. For each
+one found, an equivalent \fBterminfo\fR description is written to standard
+output. Termcap \fBtc\fR capabilities are translated directly to terminfo
+\fBuse\fR capabilities.
+
+If no \fIfile\fR is given, then the environment variable \fBTERMCAP\fR is used
+for the filename or entry. If \fBTERMCAP\fR is a full pathname to a file, only
+the terminal whose name is specified in the environment variable \fBTERM\fR is
+extracted from that file. If the environment variable \fBTERMCAP\fR is not
+set, then the file \fB\*d\fR is read.
+.TP 5
+\fB-v\fR
+print out tracing information on standard error as the program runs.
+.TP 5
+\fB-V\fR
+print out the version of the program in use on standard error and exit.
+.TP 5
+\fB-1\fR
+cause the fields to print out one to a line. Otherwise, the fields
+will be printed several to a line to a maximum width of 60
+characters.
+.TP 5
+\fB-w\fR
+change the output to \fIwidth\fR characters.
+.SH FILES
+.TP 20
+\*d
+Compiled terminal description database.
+.SH TRANSLATIONS FROM NONSTANDARD CAPABILITIES
+.PP
+Some obsolete nonstandard capabilities will automatically be translated
+into standard (SVr4/XSI Curses) terminfo capabilities by \fBcaptoinfo\fR.
+Whenever one of these automatic translations is done, the program
+will issue an notification to stderr, inviting the user to check that
+it has not mistakenly translated a completely unknown and random
+capability and/or syntax error.
+.PP
+.TS H
+c c c c
+c c c c
+l l l l.
+Nonstd Std From Terminfo
+name name capability
+_
+BO mr AT&T enter_reverse_mode
+CI vi AT&T cursor_invisible
+CV ve AT&T cursor_normal
+DS mh AT&T enter_dim_mode
+EE me AT&T exit_attribute_mode
+FE LF AT&T label_on
+FL LO AT&T label_off
+XS mk AT&T enter_secure_mode
+EN @7 XENIX key_end
+GE ae XENIX exit_alt_charset_mode
+GS as XENIX enter_alt_charset_mode
+HM kh XENIX key_home
+LD kL XENIX key_dl
+PD kN XENIX key_npage
+PN po XENIX prtr_off
+PS pf XENIX prtr_on
+PU kP XENIX key_ppage
+RT @8 XENIX kent
+UP ku XENIX kcuu1
+KA k; Tek key_f10
+KB F1 Tek key_f11
+KC F2 Tek key_f12
+KD F3 Tek key_f13
+KE F4 Tek key_f14
+KF F5 Tek key_f15
+BC Sb Tek set_background
+FC Sf Tek set_foreground
+HS mh Iris enter_dim_mode
+.TE
+.PP
+XENIX termcap also used to have a set of extension capabilities
+for forms drawing, designed to take advantage of the IBM PC
+high-half graphics. They were as follows:
+.PP
+.TS H
+c c
+l l.
+Cap Graphic
+_
+G2 upper left
+G3 lower left
+G1 upper right
+G4 lower right
+GR pointing right
+GL pointing left
+GU pointing up
+GD pointing down
+GH horizontal line
+GV vertical line
+GC intersection
+G6 upper left
+G7 lower left
+G5 upper right
+G8 lower right
+Gr tee pointing right
+Gr tee pointing left
+Gu tee pointing up
+Gd tee pointing down
+Gh horizontal line
+Gv vertical line
+Gc intersection
+GG acs magic cookie count
+.TE
+.PP
+If the single-line capabilities occur in an entry, they will automatically
+be composed into an \fBacsc\fR string. The double-line capabilities and
+\fBGG\fR are discarded with a warning message.
+.PP
+IBM's AIX has a terminfo facility descended from SVr1 terminfo but incompatible
+with the SVr4 format. The following AIX extensions are automatically
+translated:
+.PP
+.TS
+c c
+l l.
+IBM XSI
+_
+ksel kslt
+kbtab kcbt
+font0 s0ds
+font1 s1ds
+font2 s2ds
+font3 s3ds
+.TE
+.PP
+Additionally, the AIX \fBbox1\fR capability will be automatically translated to
+an \fBacsc\fR string.
+.PP
+Hewlett-Packard's terminfo library supports two nonstandard terminfo
+capabilities \fBmeml\fR (memory lock) and \fBmemu\fR (memory unlock).
+These will be discarded with a warning message.
+.SH NOTES
+This utility is actually a link to \fItic\fR(1M), running in \fI-I\fR mode.
+
+The trace option isn't identical to SVr4's. Under SVr4, instead of following
+the -v with a trace level n, you repeat it n times.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBinfocmp\fR(1M), \fBterminfo\fR(\*n)
+.SH AUTHOR
+Eric S. Raymond <esr@snark.thyrsus.com>
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/clear.1 b/contrib/ncurses/man/clear.1
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..71d2883b747e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/clear.1
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: clear.1,v 1.2 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH clear 1 ""
+.ds n 5
+.SH NAME
+\fBclear\fR - clear the terminal screen
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBclear\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\fBclear\fR clears your screen if this is possible. It looks in the
+environment for the terminal type and then in the \fBterminfo\fR database to
+figure out how to clear the screen.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBtput\fR(1), \fBterminfo\fR(\*n)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_addch.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_addch.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7cdfd7835355
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_addch.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_addch.3x,v 1.16 1999/02/07 03:47:42 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_addch 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBaddch\fR, \fBwaddch\fR, \fBmvaddch\fR, \fBmvwaddch\fR,
+\fBechochar\fR, \fBwechochar\fR - add a character (with attributes) to a
+\fBcurses\fR window, then advance the cursor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint addch(chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBint waddch(WINDOW *win, chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvaddch(int y, int x, chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwaddch(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBint echochar(chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wechochar(WINDOW *win, chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBaddch\fR, \fBwaddch\fR, \fBmvaddch\fR and \fBmvwaddch\fR routines put
+the character \fIch\fR into the given window at its current window position,
+which is then advanced. They are analogous to \fBputchar\fR in \fBstdio\fR(3).
+If the advance is at the right margin, the cursor automatically wraps to the
+beginning of the next line. At the bottom of the current scrolling region, if
+\fBscrollok\fR is enabled, the scrolling region is scrolled up one line.
+
+If \fIch\fR is a tab, newline, or backspace, the cursor is moved appropriately
+within the window. Backspace moves the cursor one character left; at the left
+edge of a window it does nothing. Newline does a \fBclrtoeol\fR, then moves
+the cursor to the window left margin on the next line, scrolling the window if
+on the last line). Tabs are considered to be at every eighth column.
+
+If \fIch\fR is any control character other than tab, newline, or backspace, it
+is drawn in \fB^\fR\fIX\fR notation. Calling \fBwinch\fR after adding a
+control character does not return the character itself, but instead returns
+the ^-representation of the control character.
+
+Video attributes can be combined with a character argument passed to
+\fBaddch\fR or related functions by logical-ORing them into the character.
+(Thus, text, including attributes, can be copied from one place to another
+using \fBinch\fR and \fBaddch\fR.). See the \fBcurs_attr\fR(3X) page for
+values of predefined video attribute constants that can be usefully OR'ed
+into characters.
+
+The \fBechochar\fR and \fBwechochar\fR routines are equivalent to a call to
+\fBaddch\fR followed by a call to \fBrefresh\fR, or a call to \fBwaddch\fR
+followed by a call to \fBwrefresh\fR. The knowledge that only a single
+character is being output is used and, for non-control characters, a
+considerable performance gain may be seen by using these routines instead of
+their equivalents.
+.SS Line Graphics
+The following variables may be used to add line drawing characters to the
+screen with routines of the \fBaddch\fR family. The default character listed
+below is used if the \fBacsc\fR capability doesn't define a terminal-specific
+replacement for it (but see the EXTENSIONS section below). The names are
+taken from VT100 nomenclature.
+
+.TS
+l l l
+_ _ _
+l l l.
+\fIName\fR \fIDefault\fR \fIDescription\fR
+ACS_BLOCK # solid square block
+ACS_BOARD # board of squares
+ACS_BTEE + bottom tee
+ACS_BULLET o bullet
+ACS_CKBOARD : checker board (stipple)
+ACS_DARROW v arrow pointing down
+ACS_DEGREE ' degree symbol
+ACS_DIAMOND + diamond
+ACS_GEQUAL > greater-than-or-equal-to
+ACS_HLINE - horizontal line
+ACS_LANTERN # lantern symbol
+ACS_LARROW < arrow pointing left
+ACS_LEQUAL < less-than-or-equal-to
+ACS_LLCORNER + lower left-hand corner
+ACS_LRCORNER + lower right-hand corner
+ACS_LTEE + left tee
+ACS_NEQUAL ! not-equal
+ACS_PI * greek pi
+ACS_PLMINUS # plus/minus
+ACS_PLUS + plus
+ACS_RARROW > arrow pointing right
+ACS_RTEE + right tee
+ACS_S1 - scan line 1
+ACS_S3 - scan line 3
+ACS_S7 - scan line 7
+ACS_S9 \&_ scan line 9
+ACS_STERLING f pound-sterling symbol
+ACS_TTEE + top tee
+ACS_UARROW ^ arrow pointing up
+ACS_ULCORNER + upper left-hand corner
+ACS_URCORNER + upper right-hand corner
+ACS_VLINE | vertical line
+.TE
+
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and \fBOK\fR on success
+(the SVr4 manuals specify only "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon
+successful completion, unless otherwise noted in the preceding routine
+descriptions.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBaddch\fR, \fBmvaddch\fR, \fBmvwaddch\fR, and
+\fBechochar\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+All these functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4.
+The defaults specified for forms-drawing characters apply in the POSIX locale.
+
+Some ACS symbols
+(ACS_S3,
+ACS_S7,
+ACS_LEQUAL,
+ACS_GEQUAL,
+ACS_PI,
+ACS_NEQUAL,
+ACS_STERLING)
+were not documented in
+any publicly released System V. However, many publicly available terminfos
+include \fBacsc\fR strings in which their key characters (pryz{|}) are
+embedded, and a second-hand list of their character descriptions has come
+to light. The ACS-prefixed names for them were invented for \fBncurses\fR(3X).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_attr\fR(3X), \fBcurs_clear\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_inch\fR(3X), \fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X), \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X),
+\fBputc\fR(3S).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_addchstr.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_addchstr.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f552a3b0f5e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_addchstr.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_addchstr.3x,v 1.6 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_addchstr 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBaddchstr\fR, \fBaddchnstr\fR, \fBwaddchstr\fR,
+\fBwaddchnstr\fR, \fBmvaddchstr\fR, \fBmvaddchnstr\fR, \fBmvwaddchstr\fR,
+\fBmvwaddchnstr\fR - add a string of characters (and attributes) to a
+\fBcurses\fR window
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint addchstr(const chtype *chstr);\fR
+.br
+\fBint addchnstr(const chtype *chstr, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint waddchstr(WINDOW *win, const chtype *chstr);\fR
+.br
+\fBint waddchnstr(WINDOW *win, const chtype *chstr, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvaddchstr(int y, int x, const chtype *chstr);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvaddchnstr(int y, int x, const chtype *chstr, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwaddchstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, const chtype *chstr);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwaddchnstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, const chtype *chstr, int n);\fR
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These routines copy \fIchstr\fR into the window image structure at and after
+the current cursor position. The four routines with \fIn\fR as the last
+argument copy at most \fIn\fR elements, but no more than will fit on the line.
+If \fBn\fR=\fB-1\fR then the whole string is copied, to the maximum number of
+characters that will fit on the line.
+
+The window cursor is \fInot\fR advanced, and these routines work faster than
+\fBwaddnstr\fR. On the other hand, they don't perform any kind of checking
+(such as for the newline, backspace, or carriage return characters), they don't
+advance the current cursor position, they don't expand other control characters
+to ^-escapes, and they truncate the string if it crosses the right margin,
+rather then wrapping it around to the new line.
+
+.SH RETURN VALUES
+All routines return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and \fBOK\fR on success
+(the SVr4 manuals specify only "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon
+successful completion, unless otherwise noted in the preceding routine
+descriptions.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that all routines except \fBwaddchnstr\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+All these entry points are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_addstr.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_addstr.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fee3f8145e35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_addstr.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_addstr.3x,v 1.8 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_addstr 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBaddstr\fR, \fBaddnstr\fR, \fBwaddstr\fR, \fBwaddnstr\fR,
+\fBmvaddstr\fR, \fBmvaddnstr\fR, \fBmvwaddstr\fR, \fBmvwaddnstr\fR - add a
+string of characters to a \fBcurses\fR window and advance cursor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint addstr(const char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint addnstr(const char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint waddstr(WINDOW *win, const char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint waddnstr(WINDOW *win, const char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvaddstr(int y, int x, const char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvaddnstr(int y, int x, const char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwaddstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, const char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwaddnstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, const char *str, int n);\fR
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These routines write the characters of the (null-terminated) character string
+\fIstr\fR on the given window. It is similar to calling \fBwaddch\fR once for
+each character in the string. The four routines with \fIn\fR as the last
+argument write at most \fIn\fR characters. If \fIn\fR is -1, then the
+entire string will be added.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and \fBOK\fR on success
+(the SVr4 manuals specify only "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon
+successful completion.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that all of these routines except \fBwaddstr\fR and \fBwaddnstr\fR may be
+macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+All these entry points are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. The
+XSI errors EILSEQ and EOVERFLOW, associated with extended-level conformance,
+are not yet detected.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_addch\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_attr.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_attr.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d6ad62471acf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_attr.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_attr.3x,v 1.19 1998/12/26 19:25:35 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_attr 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBattroff\fR, \fBwattroff\fR, \fBattron\fR, \fBwattron\fR,
+\fBattrset\fR, \fBwattrset\fR, \fBcolor_set\fR, \fBwcolor_set\fR,
+\fBstandend\fR, \fBwstandend\fR, \fBstandout\fR,
+\fBwstandout\fR - \fBcurses\fR character and window attribute control routines
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+.br
+\fBint attroff(int attrs);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wattroff(WINDOW *win, int attrs);\fR
+.br
+\fBint attron(int attrs);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wattron(WINDOW *win, int attrs);\fR
+.br
+\fBint attrset(int attrs);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wattrset(WINDOW *win, int attrs);\fR
+.br
+\fBint color_set(short color_pair_number, void* opts);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wcolor_set(WINDOW *win, short color_pair_number,\fR
+ \fBvoid* opts);\fR
+.br
+\fBint standend(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wstandend(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint standout(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wstandout(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint attr_get(attr_t *attrs, short *pair, void *opts);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wattr_get(WINDOW *win, attr_t *attrs, short *pair,\fR
+ \fBvoid *opts);\fR
+.br
+\fBint attr_off(attr_t attrs, void *opts);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wattr_off(WINDOW *win, attr_t attrs, void *opts);\fR
+.br
+\fBint attr_on(attr_t attrs, void *opts);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wattr_on(WINDOW *win, attr_t attrs, void *opts);\fR
+.br
+\fBint attr_set(attr_t attrs, void *opts);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wattr_set(WINDOW *win, attr_t attrs, void *opts);\fR
+.br
+\fBint chgat(int n, attr_t attr, short color,\fR
+ \fBconst void *opts)\fR
+.br
+\fBint wchgat(WINDOW *win, int n, attr_t attr,\fR
+ \fBshort color, const void *opts)\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvchgat(int y, int x, int n, attr_t attr,\fR
+ \fBshort color, const void *opts)\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwchgat(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, int n,\fR
+ \fBattr_t attr, short color, const void *opts)\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These routines manipulate the current attributes of the named window. The
+current attributes of a window apply to all characters that are written into
+the window with \fBwaddch\fR, \fBwaddstr\fR and \fBwprintw\fR. Attributes are
+a property of the character, and move with the character through any scrolling
+and insert/delete line/character operations. To the extent possible, they are
+displayed as appropriate modifications to the graphic rendition of characters
+put on the screen.
+
+The routine \fBattrset\fR sets the current attributes of the given window to
+\fIattrs\fR. The routine \fBattroff\fR turns off the named attributes without
+turning any other attributes on or off. The routine \fBattron\fR turns on the
+named attributes without affecting any others. The routine \fBstandout\fR is
+the same as \fBattron(A_STANDOUT)\fR. The routine \fBstandend\fR is the same
+as \fBattrset(A_NORMAL)\fR or \fBattrset(0)\fR, that is, it turns off all
+attributes.
+
+The routine \fBcolor_set\fR sets the current color of the given window to the
+foreground/background combination described by the color_pair_number. The
+parameter opts is reserved for future use, applications must supply a null
+pointer.
+
+The routine \fBwattr_get\fR returns the current attribute and color pair for
+the given window; \fBattr_get\fR returns the current attribute and color pair
+for \fBstdscr\fR.
+The remaining \fBattr_\fR* functions operate exactly like the corresponding
+\fBattr\fR* functions, except that they take arguments of type \fBattr_t\fR
+rather than \fBint\fR.
+
+The routine \fBchgat\fR changes the attributes of a given number of characters
+starting at the current cursor location of \fBstdscr\fR. It does not update
+the cursor and does not perform wrapping. A character count of -1 or greater
+than the remaining window width means to change attributes all the way to the
+end of the current line. The \fBwchgat\fR function generalizes this to any
+window; the \fBmvwchgat\fR function does a cursor move before acting. In these
+functions, the color argument is a color-pair index (as in the first argument
+of \fIinit_pair\fR, see \fBcurs_color\fR(3X)). The \fBopts\fR argument is not
+presently used, but is reserved for the future (leave it \fBNULL\fR).
+.SS Attributes
+The following video attributes, defined in \fB<curses.h>\fR, can be passed to
+the routines \fBattron\fR, \fBattroff\fR, and \fBattrset\fR, or OR'ed with the
+characters passed to \fBaddch\fR.
+
+.TS
+center ;
+l l .
+\fBA_NORMAL\fR Normal display (no highlight)
+\fBA_STANDOUT\fR Best highlighting mode of the terminal.
+\fBA_UNDERLINE\fR Underlining
+\fBA_REVERSE\fR Reverse video
+\fBA_BLINK\fR Blinking
+\fBA_DIM\fR Half bright
+\fBA_BOLD\fR Extra bright or bold
+\fBA_PROTECT\fR Protected mode
+\fBA_INVIS\fR Invisible or blank mode
+\fBA_ALTCHARSET\fR Alternate character set
+\fBA_CHARTEXT\fR Bit-mask to extract a character
+\fBCOLOR_PAIR(\fR\fIn\fR\fB)\fR Color-pair number \fIn\fR
+.TE
+
+The following macro is the reverse of \fBCOLOR_PAIR(\fR\fIn\fR\fB)\fR:
+
+.DS C
+\fBPAIR_NUMBER(\fR\fIattrs\fR) Returns the pair number associated
+ with the \fBCOLOR_PAIR(\fR\fIn\fR\fB)\fR attribute.
+.DE
+
+The return values of many of these routines are not meaningful (they are
+implemented as macro-expanded assignments and simply return their argument).
+The SVr4 manual page claims (falsely) that these routines always return \fB1\fR.
+
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBattroff\fR, \fBwattroff\fR, \fBattron\fR, \fBwattron\fR,
+\fBattrset\fR, \fBwattrset\fR, \fBstandend\fR and \fBstandout\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+All these functions are supported in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. The
+standard defined the dedicated type for highlights, \fBattr_t\fR, which is not
+defined in SVr4 curses. The functions taking \fBattr_t\fR arguments are
+not supported under SVr4.
+
+The XSI Curses standard states that whether the traditional functions
+\fBattron\fR/\fBattroff\fR/\fBattrset\fR can manipulate attributes other than
+\fBA_BLINK\fR, \fBA_BOLD\fR, \fBA_DIM\fR, \fBA_REVERSE\fR, \fBA_STANDOUT\fR, or
+\fBA_UNDERLINE\fR is "unspecified". Under this implementation as well as
+SVr4 curses, these functions correctly manipulate all other highlights
+(specifically, \fBA_ALTCHARSET\fR, \fBA_PROTECT\fR, and \fBA_INVIS\fR).
+
+XSI Curses added the new entry points, \fBattr_get\fR, \fBattr_on\fR,
+\fBattr_off\fR, \fBattr_set\fR, \fBwattr_on\fR, \fBwattr_off\fR,
+\fBwattr_get\fR, \fBwattr_set\fR. These are intended to work with
+a new series of highlight macros prefixed with \fBWA_\fR.
+
+.TS
+center ;
+l l .
+\fBWA_NORMAL\fR Normal display (no highlight)
+\fBWA_STANDOUT\fR Best highlighting mode of the terminal.
+\fBWA_UNDERLINE\fR Underlining
+\fBWA_REVERSE\fR Reverse video
+\fBWA_BLINK\fR Blinking
+\fBWA_DIM\fR Half bright
+\fBWA_BOLD\fR Extra bright or bold
+\fBWA_ALTCHARSET\fR Alternate character set
+.TE
+
+The XSI curses standard specifies that each pair of corresponding \fBA_\fR
+and \fBWA_\fR-using functions operates on the same current-highlight
+information.
+
+The XSI standard extended conformance level adds new highlights
+\fBA_HORIZONTAL\fR, \fBA_LEFT\fR, \fBA_LOW\fR, \fBA_RIGHT\fR, \fBA_TOP\fR,
+\fBA_VERTICAL\fR (and corresponding \fBWA_\fR macros for each) which this
+curses does not yet support.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_addch\fR(3X), \fBcurs_addstr\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_printw\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_beep.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_beep.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b9caaa804f76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_beep.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_beep.3x,v 1.7 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_beep 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBbeep\fR, \fBflash\fR - \fBcurses\fR bell and screen flash routines
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint beep(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint flash(void);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBbeep\fR and \fBflash\fR routines are used to alert the terminal user.
+The routine \fBbeep\fR sounds an audible alarm on the terminal, if possible;
+otherwise it flashes the screen (visible bell). The routine \fBflash\fR
+flashes the screen, and if that is not possible, sounds the alert. If neither
+alert is possible, nothing happens. Nearly all terminals have an audible alert
+(bell or beep), but only some can flash the screen.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+These routines return \fBOK\fR if they succeed in beeping or flashing,
+\fBERR\fR otherwise.
+.SH EXTENSIONS
+SVr4's beep and flash routines always returned \fBOK\fR, so it was not
+possible to tell when the beep or flash failed.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are defined in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. Like SVr4, it
+specifies that they always return \fBOK\fR.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_bkgd.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_bkgd.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a25699976561
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_bkgd.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_bkgd.3x,v 1.12 1998/03/14 23:43:31 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_bkgd 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBbkgdset\fR, \fBwbkgdset\fR, \fBbkgd\fR,
+\fBwbkgd\fR - \fBcurses\fR window background manipulation routines
+..
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBvoid bkgdset(const chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid wbkgdset(WINDOW *win, const chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBint bkgd(const chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wbkgd(WINDOW *win, const chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBchtype getbkgd(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+..
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBbkgdset\fR and \fBwbkgdset\fR routines manipulate the
+background of the named window.
+The window background is a \fBchtype\fR consisting of
+any combination of attributes (i.e., rendition) and a character.
+The attribute part of the background is combined (OR'ed) with all non-blank
+characters that are written into the window with \fBwaddch\fR. Both
+the character and attribute parts of the background are combined with
+the blank characters. The background becomes a property of the
+character and moves with the character through any scrolling and
+insert/delete line/character operations.
+
+To the extent possible on a
+particular terminal, the attribute part of the background is displayed
+as the graphic rendition of the character put on the screen.
+
+The \fBbkgd\fR and \fBwbkgd\fR functions
+set the background property of the current or specified window
+and then apply this setting to every character position in that window:
+
+.RS
+The rendition of every character on the screen is changed to
+the new background rendition.
+
+Wherever the former background character
+appears, it is changed to the new background character.
+.RE
+
+The \fBgetbkgd\fR function returns the given window's current background
+character/attribute pair.
+..
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The routines \fBbkgd\fR and \fBwbkgd\fR return the integer \fBOK\fR.
+The SVr4.0 manual says "or a non-negative integer if \fBimmedok\fR is set",
+but this appears to be an error.
+..
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBbkgdset\fR and \fBbkgd\fR may be macros.
+..
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. The draft
+does not include \fBconst\fR qualifiers on the arguments. The standard
+specifies that \fBbkgd\fR and \fBwbkgd\fR return \fBERR\fR, on failure. but
+gives no failure conditions.
+..
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_addch\fR(3X), \fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_border.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_border.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..45200eb15cb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_border.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_border.3x,v 1.11 1999/01/30 23:11:47 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_border 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBborder\fR, \fBwborder\fR, \fBbox\fR,
+\fBhline\fR, \fBwhline\fR, \fBvline\fR, \fBwvline\fR - create
+\fBcurses\fR borders, horizontal and vertical lines
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+.br
+\fBint border(chtype ls, chtype rs, chtype ts, chtype bs,\fR
+ \fBchtype tl, chtype tr, chtype bl, chtype br);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wborder(WINDOW *win, chtype ls, chtype rs,\fR
+ \fBchtype ts, chtype bs, chtype tl, chtype tr,\fR
+ \fBchtype bl, chtype br);\fR
+.br
+\fBint box(WINDOW *win, chtype verch, chtype horch);\fR
+.br
+\fBint hline(chtype ch, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint whline(WINDOW *win, chtype ch, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint vline(chtype ch, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wvline(WINDOW *win, chtype ch, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBmvhline(int y, int x, chtype ch, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBmvwhline(WINDOW *, int y, int x, chtype ch, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvvline(int y, int x, chtype ch, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwvline(WINDOW *, int y, int x, chtype ch, int n);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBborder\fR, \fBwborder\fR and \fBbox\fR routines draw a box around the
+edges of a window. The argument \fIls\fR is a character and attributes used
+for the left side of the border, \fIrs\fR - right side, \fIts\fR - top side,
+\fIbs\fR - bottom side, \fItl\fR - top left-hand corner, \fItr\fR - top
+right-hand corner, \fIbl\fR - bottom left-hand corner, and \fIbr\fR - bottom
+right-hand corner. If any of these arguments is zero, then the following
+default values (defined in \fBcurses.h\fR) are used instead: \fBACS_VLINE\fR,
+\fBACS_VLINE\fR, \fBACS_HLINE\fR, \fBACS_HLINE\fR, \fB\fBACS_ULCORNER\fR,
+\fBACS_URCORNER\fR, \fBACS_LLCORNER\fR, \fBACS_LRCORNER\fR.
+
+\fBbox(\fR\fIwin\fR\fB, \fR\fIverch\fR\fB, \fR\fIhorch\fR\fB)\fR is a shorthand
+for the following call: \fBwborder(\fR\fIwin\fR\fB,\fR \fIverch\fR\fB,\fR
+\fIverch\fR\fB,\fR \fIhorch\fR\fB,\fR \fIhorch\fR\fB, 0, 0, 0, 0)\fR.
+
+The \fBhline\fR and \fBwhline\fR functions draw a horizontal (left to right)
+line using \fIch\fR starting at the current cursor position in the window. The
+current cursor position is not changed. The line is at most \fIn\fR characters
+long, or as many as fit into the window.
+
+The \fBvline\fR and \fBwvline\fR functions draw a vertical (top to bottom) line
+using \fIch\fR starting at the current cursor position in the window. The
+current cursor position is not changed. The line is at most \fIn\fR characters
+long, or as many as fit into the window.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines return the integer \fBOK\fR. The SVr4.0 manual says "or a
+non-negative integer if \fBimmedok\fR is set", but this appears to be an error.
+.SH NOTES
+The borders generated by these functions are \fIinside\fR borders (this
+is also true of SVr4 curses, though the fact is not documented).
+
+Note that \fBborder\fR and \fBbox\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. Additional
+functions \fBmvhline\fR, \fBmvvline\fR, \fBmvwhline\fR, and \fBmvwvline\fR are
+described there which this implementation does not yet support. The standard
+specifies that they return \fBERR\fR on failure, but specifies no error
+conditions.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_clear.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_clear.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d08e852a27b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_clear.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_clear.3x,v 1.7 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_clear 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBerase\fR, \fBwerase\fR, \fBclear\fR,
+\fBwclear\fR, \fBclrtobot\fR, \fBwclrtobot\fR, \fBclrtoeol\fR,
+\fBwclrtoeol\fR - clear all or part of a \fBcurses\fR window
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB# include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint erase(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint werase(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint clear(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wclear(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint clrtobot(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wclrtobot(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint clrtoeol(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wclrtoeol(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBerase\fR and \fBwerase\fR routines copy blanks to every
+position in the window, clearing the screen.
+
+The \fBclear\fR and \fBwclear\fR routines are like \fBerase\fR and
+\fBwerase\fR, but they also call \fBclearok\fR, so that the screen is
+cleared completely on the next call to \fBwrefresh\fR for that window
+and repainted from scratch.
+
+The \fBclrtobot\fR and \fBwclrtobot\fR routines erase from the cursor to the
+end of screen. That is, they erase all lines below the cursor in the window.
+Also, the current line to the right of the cursor, inclusive, is erased.
+
+The \fBclrtoeol\fR and \fBwclrtoeol\fR routines erase the current line
+to the right of the cursor, inclusive, to the end of the current line.
+
+Blanks created by erasure have the current background rendition (as set
+by \fBwbkgdset\fR) merged into them.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines return the integer \fBOK\fR. The SVr4.0 manual says "or a
+non-negative integer if \fBimmedok\fR is set", but this appears to be an error.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBerase\fR, \fBwerase\fR, \fBclear\fR, \fBwclear\fR,
+\fBclrtobot\fR, and \fBclrtoeol\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. The
+standard specifies that they return \fBERR\fR on failure, but specifies no
+error conditions.
+
+Some historic curses implementations had, as an undocumented feature, the
+ability to do the equivalent of \fBclearok(..., 1)\fR by saying
+\fBtouchwin(stdscr)\fR or \fBclear(stdscr)\fR. This will not work under
+ncurses.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X), \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_color.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_color.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..03cbba6349e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_color.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_color.3x,v 1.10 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_color 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBstart_color\fR, \fBinit_pair\fR,
+\fBinit_color\fR, \fBhas_colors\fR, \fBcan_change_color\fR,
+\fBcolor_content\fR, \fBpair_content\fR - \fBcurses\fR color
+manipulation routines
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB# include <curses.h>\fR
+.br
+\fBint start_color(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint init_pair(short pair, short f, short b);\fR
+.br
+\fBint init_color(short color, short r, short g, short b);\fR
+.br
+\fBbool has_colors(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBbool can_change_color(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint color_content(short color, short *r, short *g, short *b);\fR
+.br
+\fBint pair_content(short pair, short *f, short *b);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.SS Overview
+\fBcurses\fR support color attributes on terminals with that capability. To
+use these routines \fBstart_color\fR must be called, usually right after
+\fBinitscr\fR. Colors are always used in pairs (referred to as color-pairs).
+A color-pair consists of a foreground color (for characters) and a background
+color (for the blank field on which the characters are displayed). A
+programmer initializes a color-pair with the routine \fBinit_pair\fR. After it
+has been initialized, \fBCOLOR_PAIR\fR(\fIn\fR), a macro defined in
+\fB<curses.h>\fR, can be used as a new video attribute.
+
+If a terminal is capable of redefining colors, the programmer can use the
+routine \fBinit_color\fR to change the definition of a color. The routines
+\fBhas_colors\fR and \fBcan_change_color\fR return \fBTRUE\fR or \fBFALSE\fR,
+depending on whether the terminal has color capabilities and whether the
+programmer can change the colors. The routine \fBcolor_content\fR allows a
+programmer to extract the amounts of red, green, and blue components in an
+initialized color. The routine \fBpair_content\fR allows a programmer to find
+out how a given color-pair is currently defined.
+.SS Routine Descriptions
+The \fBstart_color\fR routine requires no arguments. It must be
+called if the programmer wants to use colors, and before any other
+color manipulation routine is called. It is good practice to call
+this routine right after \fBinitscr\fR. \fBstart_color\fR initializes
+eight basic colors (black, red, green, yellow, blue, magenta, cyan,
+and white), and two global variables, \fBCOLORS\fR and
+\fBCOLOR_PAIRS\fR (respectively defining the maximum number of colors
+and color-pairs the terminal can support). It also restores the
+colors on the terminal to the values they had when the terminal was
+just turned on.
+
+The \fBinit_pair\fR routine changes the definition of a color-pair. It takes
+three arguments: the number of the color-pair to be changed, the foreground
+color number, and the background color number. The value of the first argument
+must be between \fB1\fR and \fBCOLOR_PAIRS-1\fR. The value of the second and
+third arguments must be between 0 and \fBCOLORS\fR (the 0 color pair is wired
+to white on black and cannot be changed). If the color-pair was previously
+initialized, the screen is refreshed and all occurrences of that color-pair is
+changed to the new definition.
+
+The \fBinit_color\fR routine changes the definition of a color. It takes four
+arguments: the number of the color to be changed followed by three RGB values
+(for the amounts of red, green, and blue components). The value of the first
+argument must be between \fB0\fR and \fBCOLORS\fR. (See the section
+\fBColors\fR for the default color index.) Each of the last three arguments
+must be a value between 0 and 1000. When \fBinit_color\fR is used, all
+occurrences of that color on the screen immediately change to the new
+definition.
+
+The \fBhas_colors\fR routine requires no arguments. It returns \fBTRUE\fR if
+the terminal can manipulate colors; otherwise, it returns \fBFALSE\fR. This
+routine facilitates writing terminal-independent programs. For example, a
+programmer can use it to decide whether to use color or some other video
+attribute.
+
+The \fBcan_change_color\fR routine requires no arguments. It returns
+\fBTRUE\fR if the terminal supports colors and can change their definitions;
+other, it returns \fBFALSE\fR. This routine facilitates writing
+terminal-independent programs.
+
+The \fBcolor_content\fR routine gives programmers a way to find the intensity
+of the red, green, and blue (RGB) components in a color. It requires four
+arguments: the color number, and three addresses of \fBshort\fRs for storing
+the information about the amounts of red, green, and blue components in the
+given color. The value of the first argument must be between 0 and
+\fBCOLORS\fR. The values that are stored at the addresses pointed to by the
+last three arguments are between 0 (no component) and 1000 (maximum amount of
+component).
+
+The \fBpair_content\fR routine allows programmers to find out what colors a
+given color-pair consists of. It requires three arguments: the color-pair
+number, and two addresses of \fBshort\fRs for storing the foreground and the
+background color numbers. The value of the first argument must be between 1
+and \fBCOLOR_PAIRS-1\fR. The values that are stored at the addresses pointed
+to by the second and third arguments are between 0 and \fBCOLORS\fR.
+.SS Colors
+In \fB<curses.h>\fR the following macros are defined. These are the default
+colors. \fBcurses\fR also assumes that \fBCOLOR_BLACK\fR is the default
+background color for all terminals.
+
+.nf
+ \fBCOLOR_BLACK\fR
+ \fBCOLOR_RED\fR
+ \fBCOLOR_GREEN\fR
+ \fBCOLOR_YELLOW\fR
+ \fBCOLOR_BLUE\fR
+ \fBCOLOR_MAGENTA\fR
+ \fBCOLOR_CYAN\fR
+ \fBCOLOR_WHITE\fR
+.fi
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The routines \fBcan_change_color()\fR and \fBhas_colors()\fR return \fBTRUE\fR
+or \fBFALSE\fR.
+
+All other routines return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and an \fBOK\fR
+(SVr4 specifies only "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion.
+.SH NOTES
+In the \fIncurses\fR implementation, there is a separate color activation flag,
+color palette, color pairs table, and associated COLORS and COLOR_PAIRS counts
+for each screen; the \fBstart_color\fR function only affects the current
+screen. The SVr4/XSI interface is not really designed with this in mind, and
+historical implementations may use a single shared color palette.
+
+Note that setting an implicit background color via a color pair affects only
+character cells that a character write operation explicitly touches. To change
+the background color used when parts of a window are blanked by erasing or
+scrolling operations, see \fBcurs_bkgd\fR(3X).
+
+Several caveats apply on 386 and 486 machines with VGA-compatible graphics:
+
+COLOR_YELLOW is actually brown. To get yellow, use COLOR_YELLOW combined with
+the \fBA_BOLD\fR attribute.
+
+The A_BLINK attribute should in theory cause the background to go bright. This
+often fails to work, and even some cards for which it mostly works (such as the
+Paradise and compatibles) do the wrong thing when you try to set a bright
+"yellow" background (you get a blinking yellow foreground instead).
+
+Color RGB values are not settable.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+This implementation satisfies XSI Curses's minimum maximums
+for \fBCOLORS\fR and \fBCOLOR_PAIRS\fR.
+.PP
+The \fBinit_pair\fP routine accepts negative values of foreground
+and background color to support the \fBuse_default_colors\fP extension,
+but only if that routine has been first invoked.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X),
+\fBdft_fgbg\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_delch.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_delch.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d63d6020e3a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_delch.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_delch.3x,v 1.6 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_delch 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBdelch\fR, \fBwdelch\fR, \fBmvdelch\fR, \fBmvwdelch\fR -
+delete character under the cursor in a \fBcurses\fR window
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint delch(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wdelch(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvdelch(int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwdelch(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These routines delete the character under the cursor; all characters to the
+right of the cursor on the same line are moved to the left one position and the
+last character on the line is filled with a blank. The cursor position does
+not change (after moving to \fIy\fR, \fIx\fR, if specified). (This does not
+imply use of the hardware delete character feature.)
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and an \fBOK\fR (SVr4
+specifies only "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBdelch\fR, \fBmvdelch\fR, and \fBmvwdelch\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. The
+standard specifies that they return \fBERR\fR on failure, but specifies no
+error conditions.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_deleteln.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_deleteln.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..54bf331ba59e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_deleteln.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_deleteln.3x,v 1.5 1999/02/07 03:58:20 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_deleteln 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBdeleteln\fR, \fBwdeleteln\fR, \fBinsdelln\fR,
+\fBwinsdelln\fR, \fBinsertln\fR, \fBwinsertln\fR - delete and insert
+lines in a \fBcurses\fR window
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint deleteln(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wdeleteln(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint insdelln(int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint winsdelln(WINDOW *win, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint insertln(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint winsertln(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBdeleteln\fR and \fBwdeleteln\fR routines delete the line under the
+cursor in the window; all lines below the current line are moved up one line.
+The bottom line of the window is cleared. The cursor position does not change.
+
+The \fBinsdelln\fR and \fBwinsdelln\fR routines, for positive \fIn\fR, insert
+\fIn\fR lines into the specified window above the current line. The \fIn\fR
+bottom lines are lost. For negative \fIn\fR, delete \fIn\fR lines (starting
+with the one under the cursor), and move the remaining lines up. The bottom
+\fIn\fR lines are cleared. The current cursor position remains the same.
+
+The \fBinsertln\fR and \fBinsertln\fR routines, insert a blank line above the
+current line and the bottom line is lost.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and an \fBOK\fR (SVr4
+specifies only "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. The
+standard specifies that they return \fBERR\fR on failure, but specifies no
+error conditions.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that all but \fBwinsdelln\fR may be macros.
+
+These routines do not require a hardware line delete or insert feature in the
+terminal. In fact, they won't use hardware line delete/insert unless
+\fBidlok(..., TRUE)\fR has been set on the current window.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_getch.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_getch.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0e4424618bcd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_getch.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,274 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_getch.3x,v 1.15 1998/11/29 01:04:26 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH curs_getch 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBgetch\fR, \fBwgetch\fR, \fBmvgetch\fR,
+\fBmvwgetch\fR, \fBungetch\fR - get (or push back) characters from
+\fBcurses\fR terminal keyboard
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint getch(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wgetch(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvgetch(int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwgetch(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+\fBint ungetch(int ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBint has_key(int ch);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBgetch\fR, \fBwgetch\fR, \fBmvgetch\fR and \fBmvwgetch\fR, routines read
+a character from the window. In no-delay mode, if no input is waiting, the
+value \fBERR\fR is returned. In delay mode, the program waits until the system
+passes text through to the program. Depending on the setting of \fBcbreak\fR,
+this is after one character (cbreak mode), or after the first newline (nocbreak
+mode). In half-delay mode, the program waits until a character is typed or the
+specified timeout has been reached.
+
+If \fBnoecho\fR has been set, then the character will also be echoed into the
+designated window according to the following rules:
+If the character is the current erase character, left arrow, or backspace,
+the cursor is moved one space to the left and that screen position is erased
+as if \fBdelch\fR had been called.
+If the character value is any other \fBKEY_\fR define, the user is alerted
+with a \fBbeep\fR call.
+Otherwise the character is simply output to the screen.
+
+If the window is not a pad, and it has been moved or modified since the last
+call to \fBwrefresh\fR, \fBwrefresh\fR will be called before another character
+is read.
+
+If \fBkeypad\fR is \fBTRUE\fR, and a function key is pressed, the token for
+that function key is returned instead of the raw characters. Possible function
+keys are defined in \fB<curses.h>\fR as macros with values outside the range
+of 8-bit characters whose names begin with \fBKEY_.\fR Thus, a variable
+intended to hold the return value of a function key must be of short size or
+larger.
+
+When a character that could be the beginning of a function key is received
+(which, on modern terminals, means an escape character), \fBcurses\fR sets a
+timer. If the remainder of the sequence does not come in within the designated
+time, the character is passed through; otherwise, the function key value is
+returned. For this reason, many terminals experience a delay between the time
+a user presses the escape key and the escape is returned to the program.
+
+The \fBungetch\fR routine places \fIch\fR back onto the input queue to be
+returned by the next call to \fBwgetch\fR. Note that there is, in effect,
+just one input queue for all windows.
+
+.SS Function Keys
+The following function keys, defined in \fB<curses.h>\fR, might be returned by
+\fBgetch\fR if \fBkeypad\fR has been enabled. Note that not all of these are
+necessarily supported on any particular terminal.
+.sp
+.TS
+center tab(/) ;
+l l
+l l .
+\fIName\fR/\fIKey\fR \fIname\fR
+
+KEY_BREAK/Break key
+KEY_DOWN/The four arrow keys ...
+KEY_UP
+KEY_LEFT
+KEY_RIGHT
+KEY_HOME/Home key (upward+left arrow)
+KEY_BACKSPACE/Backspace
+KEY_F0/T{
+Function keys; space for 64 keys is reserved.
+T}
+KEY_F(\fIn\fR)/T{
+For 0 \(<= \fIn\fR \(<= 63
+T}
+KEY_DL/Delete line
+KEY_IL/Insert line
+KEY_DC/Delete character
+KEY_IC/Insert char or enter insert mode
+KEY_EIC/Exit insert char mode
+KEY_CLEAR/Clear screen
+KEY_EOS/Clear to end of screen
+KEY_EOL/Clear to end of line
+KEY_SF/Scroll 1 line forward
+KEY_SR/Scroll 1 line backward (reverse)
+KEY_NPAGE/Next page
+KEY_PPAGE/Previous page
+KEY_STAB/Set tab
+KEY_CTAB/Clear tab
+KEY_CATAB/Clear all tabs
+KEY_ENTER/Enter or send
+KEY_SRESET/Soft (partial) reset
+KEY_RESET/Reset or hard reset
+KEY_PRINT/Print or copy
+KEY_LL/Home down or bottom (lower left).
+KEY_A1/Upper left of keypad
+KEY_A3/Upper right of keypad
+KEY_B2/Center of keypad
+KEY_C1/Lower left of keypad
+KEY_C3/Lower right of keypad
+KEY_BTAB/Back tab key
+KEY_BEG/Beg(inning) key
+KEY_CANCEL/Cancel key
+KEY_CLOSE/Close key
+KEY_COMMAND/Cmd (command) key
+KEY_COPY/Copy key
+KEY_CREATE/Create key
+KEY_END/End key
+KEY_EXIT/Exit key
+KEY_FIND/Find key
+KEY_HELP/Help key
+KEY_MARK/Mark key
+KEY_MESSAGE/Message key
+KEY_MOUSE/Mouse event read
+KEY_MOVE/Move key
+KEY_NEXT/Next object key
+KEY_OPEN/Open key
+KEY_OPTIONS/Options key
+KEY_PREVIOUS/Previous object key
+KEY_REDO/Redo key
+KEY_REFERENCE/Ref(erence) key
+KEY_REFRESH/Refresh key
+KEY_REPLACE/Replace key
+KEY_RESIZE/Screen resized
+KEY_RESTART/Restart key
+KEY_RESUME/Resume key
+KEY_SAVE/Save key
+KEY_SBEG/Shifted beginning key
+KEY_SCANCEL/Shifted cancel key
+KEY_SCOMMAND/Shifted command key
+KEY_SCOPY/Shifted copy key
+KEY_SCREATE/Shifted create key
+KEY_SDC/Shifted delete char key
+KEY_SDL/Shifted delete line key
+KEY_SELECT/Select key
+KEY_SEND/Shifted end key
+KEY_SEOL/Shifted clear line key
+KEY_SEXIT/Shifted exit key
+KEY_SFIND/Shifted find key
+KEY_SHELP/Shifted help key
+KEY_SHOME/Shifted home key
+KEY_SIC/Shifted input key
+KEY_SLEFT/Shifted left arrow key
+KEY_SMESSAGE/Shifted message key
+KEY_SMOVE/Shifted move key
+KEY_SNEXT/Shifted next key
+KEY_SOPTIONS/Shifted options key
+KEY_SPREVIOUS/Shifted prev key
+KEY_SPRINT/Shifted print key
+KEY_SREDO/Shifted redo key
+KEY_SREPLACE/Shifted replace key
+KEY_SRIGHT/Shifted right arrow
+KEY_SRSUME/Shifted resume key
+KEY_SSAVE/Shifted save key
+KEY_SSUSPEND/Shifted suspend key
+KEY_SUNDO/Shifted undo key
+KEY_SUSPEND/Suspend key
+KEY_UNDO/Undo key
+.TE
+
+Keypad is arranged like this:
+.sp
+.TS
+center allbox tab(/) ;
+c c c .
+\fBA1\fR/\fBup\fR/\fBA3\fR
+\fBleft\fR/\fBB2\fR/\fBright\fR
+\fBC1\fR/\fBdown\fR/\fBC3\fR
+.TE
+.sp
+The \fBhas_key\fR routine takes a key value from the above list, and
+returns TRUE or FALSE according as the current terminal type recognizes
+a key with that value.
+
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and an integer value
+other than \fBERR\fR (\fBOK\fR in the case of ungetch()) upon successful
+completion.
+.SH NOTES
+Use of the escape key by a programmer for a single character function is
+discouraged, as it will cause a delay of up to one second while the
+keypad code looks for a following function-key sequence.
+
+When using \fBgetch\fR, \fBwgetch\fR, \fBmvgetch\fR, or
+\fBmvwgetch\fR, nocbreak mode (\fBnocbreak\fR) and echo mode
+(\fBecho\fR) should not be used at the same time. Depending on the
+state of the tty driver when each character is typed, the program may
+produce undesirable results.
+
+Note that \fBgetch\fR, \fBmvgetch\fR, and \fBmvwgetch\fR may be macros.
+
+Historically, the set of keypad macros was largely defined by the extremely
+function-key-rich keyboard of the AT&T 7300, aka 3B1, aka Safari 4. Modern
+personal computers usually have only a small subset of these. IBM PC-style
+consoles typically support little more than \fBKEY_UP\fR, \fBKEY_DOWN\fR,
+\fBKEY_LEFT\fR, \fBKEY_RIGHT\fR, \fBKEY_HOME\fR, \fBKEY_END\fR,
+\fBKEY_NPAGE\fR, \fBKEY_PPAGE\fR, and function keys 1 through 12. The Ins key
+is usually mapped to \fBKEY_IC\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The *get* functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. They
+read single-byte characters only. The standard specifies that they return
+\fBERR\fR on failure, but specifies no error conditions.
+
+The echo behavior of these functions on input of \fBKEY_\fR or backspace
+characters was not specified in the SVr4 documentation. This description is
+adopted from the XSI Curses standard.
+
+The behavior of \fBgetch\fR and friends in the presence of handled signals is
+unspecified in the SVr4 and XSI Curses documentation. Under historical curses
+implementations, it varied depending on whether the operating system's
+implementation of handled signal receipt interrupts a \fBread\fR(2) call in
+progress or not, and also (in some implementations) depending on whether an
+input timeout or non-blocking mode hsd been set.
+
+Programmers concerned about portability should be prepared for either of two
+cases: (a) signal receipt does not interrupt \fBgetch\fR; (b) signal receipt
+interrupts \fBgetch\fR and causes it to return ERR with \fBerrno\fR set to
+\fBEINTR\fR. Under the \fBncurses\fR implementation, handled signals never
+interrupt \fBgetch\fR.
+
+The \fBhas_key\fR function is unique to \fBncurses\fR. We recommend that
+any code using it be conditionalized on the \fBNCURSES_VERSION\fR feature macro.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_mouse\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_move\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X).
+\fBresizeterm\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_getstr.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_getstr.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b3678e0a2b5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_getstr.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_getstr.3x,v 1.7 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_getstr 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBgetstr\fR, \fBwgetstr\fR, \fBmvgetstr\fR,
+\fBmvwgetstr\fR, \fBwgetnstr\fR - accept character strings from
+\fBcurses\fR terminal keyboard
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint getstr(char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint getnstr(char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wgetstr(WINDOW *win, char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvgetstr(int y, int x, char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwgetstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvgetnstr(int y, int x, char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwgetnstr(WINDOW *, int y, int x, char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wgetnstr(WINDOW *win, char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBgetstr\fR is equivalent to a series of calls to \fBgetch\fR,
+until a newline or carriage return is received (the terminating character is
+not included in the returned string). The resulting value is placed in the
+area pointed to by the character pointer \fIstr\fR.
+
+\fBwgetnstr\fR reads at most \fIn\fR characters, thus preventing a possible
+overflow of the input buffer. Any attempt to enter more characters (other
+than the terminating newline or carriage return) causes a beep. Function
+keys also cause a beep and are ignored. The \fBgetnstr\fR function reads
+from the \fIstdscr\fR default window.
+
+The user's erase and kill characters are interpreted. If keypad
+mode is on for the window, \fBKEY_LEFT\fR and \fBKEY_BACKSPACE\fR
+are both considered equivalent to the user's kill character.
+
+Characters input are echoed only if \fBecho\fR is currently on. In that case,
+backspace is echoed as deletion of the previous character (typically a left
+motion).
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and an \fBOK\fR (SVr4
+specifies only "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBgetstr\fR, \fBmvgetstr\fR, and \fBmvwgetstr\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. They read
+single-byte characters only. The standard specifies that they return \fBERR\fR
+on failure, but the single error condition \fBEOVERFLOW\fR associated with
+extended-level conformance is not yet returned (the XSI curses support for
+multi-byte characters is not yet present).
+
+SVr3 and early SVr4 curses implementations did not reject function keys;
+the SVr4.0 documentation claimed that "special keys" (such as function
+keys, "home" key, "clear" key, \fIetc\fR.) are interpreted" without
+giving details. It lied. In fact, the `character' value appended to the
+string by those implementations was predictable but not useful
+(being, in fact, the low-order eight bits of the key's KEY_ value).
+
+The functions \fBgetnstr\fR, \fBmvgetnstr\fR, and \fBmvwgetnstr\fR were
+present but not documented in SVr4.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_getch\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_getyx.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_getyx.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..820bf99c5327
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_getyx.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_getyx.3x,v 1.6 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_getyx 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBgetyx\fR, \fBgetparyx\fR, \fBgetbegyx\fR,
+\fBgetmaxyx\fR - get \fBcurses\fR cursor and window coordinates
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBvoid getyx(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid getparyx(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid getbegyx(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid getmaxyx(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBgetyx\fR macro places the current cursor position of the given window in
+the two integer variables \fIy\fR and \fIx\fR.
+
+If \fIwin\fR is a subwindow, the \fBgetparyx\fR macro places the beginning
+coordinates of the subwindow relative to the parent window into two integer
+variables \fIy\fR and \fIx\fR. Otherwise, \fB-1\fR is placed into \fIy\fR and
+\fIx\fR.
+
+Like \fBgetyx\fR, the \fBgetbegyx\fR and \fBgetmaxyx\fR macros store
+the current beginning coordinates and size of the specified window.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The return values of these macros are undefined (\fIi\fR.\fIe\fR.,
+they should not be used as the right-hand side of assignment
+statements).
+.SH NOTES
+All of these interfaces are macros and that "\fB&\fR" is not
+necessary before the variables \fIy\fR and \fIx\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_inch.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_inch.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bcc8d6f85c60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_inch.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_inch.3x,v 1.11 1998/11/29 01:04:34 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH curs_inch 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBinch\fR, \fBwinch\fR, \fBmvinch\fR, \fBmvwinch\fR
+- get a character and attributes from a \fBcurses\fR window
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBchtype inch(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBchtype winch(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBchtype mvinch(int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+\fBchtype mvwinch(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These routines return the character, of type \fBchtype\fR, at the current
+position in the named window. If any attributes are set for that position,
+their values are OR'ed into the value returned. Constants defined in
+\fB<curses.h>\fR can be used with the \fB&\fR (logical AND) operator to
+extract the character or attributes alone.
+
+.SS Attributes
+The following bit-masks may be AND-ed with characters returned by \fBwinch\fR.
+
+.TS
+l l .
+\fBA_CHARTEXT\fR Bit-mask to extract character
+\fBA_ATTRIBUTES\fR Bit-mask to extract attributes
+\fBA_COLOR\fR Bit-mask to extract color-pair field information
+.TE
+.SH NOTES
+Note that all of these routines may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_inchstr.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_inchstr.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dfe7bf48191a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_inchstr.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_inchstr.3x,v 1.7 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_inchstr 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBinchstr\fR, \fBinchnstr\fR, \fBwinchstr\fR,
+\fBwinchnstr\fR, \fBmvinchstr\fR, \fBmvinchnstr\fR, \fBmvwinchstr\fR,
+\fBmvwinchnstr\fR - get a string of characters (and attributes) from a
+\fBcurses\fR window
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint inchstr(chtype *chstr);\fR
+.br
+\fBint inchnstr(chtype *chstr, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint winchstr(WINDOW *win, chtype *chstr);\fR
+.br
+\fBint winchnstr(WINDOW *win, chtype *chstr, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvinchstr(int y, int x, chtype *chstr);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvinchnstr(int y, int x, chtype *chstr, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwinchstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, chtype *chstr);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwinchnstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, chtype *chstr, int n);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These routines return a NULL-terminated array of \fBchtype\fR quantities,
+starting at the current cursor position in the named window and ending at the
+right margin of the window. The four functions with \fIn\fR as
+the last argument, return a leading substring at most \fIn\fR characters long
+(exclusive of the trailing (chtype)0).
+Constants defined in \fB<curses.h>\fR can be used with the \fB&\fR (logical
+AND) operator to extract the character or the attribute alone from any position
+in the \fIchstr\fR [see \fBcurs_inch\fR(3X)].
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and an integer value
+other than \fBERR\fR upon successful completion (the number of characters
+retrieved, exclusive of the trailing 0).
+.SH NOTES
+Note that all routines except \fBwinchnstr\fR may be macros. SVr4 does not
+document whether the result string is 0-terminated; it does not document
+whether a length limit argument includes any trailing 0; and it does not
+document the meaning of the return value.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. It is no
+more specific than the SVr4 documentation on the trailing 0. It does specify
+that the successful return of the functions is \fBOK\fR.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_inch\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_initscr.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_initscr.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a8651fde5d2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_initscr.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_initscr.3x,v 1.7 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_initscr 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBinitscr\fR, \fBnewterm\fR, \fBendwin\fR,
+\fBisendwin\fR, \fBset_term\fR, \fBdelscreen\fR - \fBcurses\fR screen
+initialization and manipulation routines
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBWINDOW *initscr(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint endwin(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint isendwin(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBSCREEN *newterm(const char *type, FILE *outfd, FILE *infd);\fR
+.br
+\fBSCREEN *set_term(SCREEN *new);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid delscreen(SCREEN* sp);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\fBinitscr\fR is normally the first \fBcurses\fR routine to call when
+initializing a program. A few special routines sometimes need to be
+called before it; these are \fBslk_init\fR, \fBfilter\fR, \fBripoffline\fR,
+\fBuse_env\fR. For multiple-terminal applications, \fBnewterm\fR may be
+called before \fBinitscr\fR.
+
+The initscr code determines the terminal type and initializes all \fBcurses\fR
+data structures. \fBinitscr\fR also causes the first call to \fBrefresh\fR to
+clear the screen. If errors occur, \fBinitscr\fR writes an appropriate error
+message to standard error and exits; otherwise, a pointer is returned to
+\fBstdscr\fR.
+
+A program that outputs to more than one terminal should use the \fBnewterm\fR
+routine for each terminal instead of \fBinitscr\fR. A program that needs to
+inspect capabilities, so it can continue to run in a line-oriented mode if the
+terminal cannot support a screen-oriented program, would also use
+\fBnewterm\fR. The routine \fBnewterm\fR should be called once for each
+terminal. It returns a variable of type \fBSCREEN *\fR which should be saved
+as a reference to that terminal. The arguments are the \fItype\fR of the
+terminal to be used in place of \fB$TERM\fR, a file pointer for output to the
+terminal, and another file pointer for input from the terminal (if \fItype\fR
+is \fBNULL\fR, \fB$TERM\fR will be used). The program must also call
+\fBendwin\fR for each terminal being used before exiting from \fBcurses\fR.
+If \fBnewterm\fR is called more than once for the same terminal, the first
+terminal referred to must be the last one for which \fBendwin\fR is called.
+
+A program should always call \fBendwin\fR before exiting or escaping from
+\fBcurses\fR mode temporarily. This routine restores tty modes, moves the
+cursor to the lower left-hand corner of the screen and resets the terminal into
+the proper non-visual mode. Calling \fBrefresh\fR or \fBdoupdate\fR after a
+temporary escape causes the program to resume visual mode.
+
+The \fBisendwin\fR routine returns \fBTRUE\fR if \fBendwin\fR has been
+called without any subsequent calls to \fBwrefresh\fR, and \fBFALSE\fR
+otherwise.
+
+The \fBset_term\fR routine is used to switch between different
+terminals. The screen reference \fBnew\fR becomes the new current
+terminal. The previous terminal is returned by the routine. This is
+the only routine which manipulates \fBSCREEN\fR pointers; all other
+routines affect only the current terminal.
+
+The \fBdelscreen\fR routine frees storage associated with the
+\fBSCREEN\fR data structure. The \fBendwin\fR routine does not do
+this, so \fBdelscreen\fR should be called after \fBendwin\fR if a
+particular \fBSCREEN\fR is no longer needed.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+\fBendwin\fR returns the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and \fBOK\fR
+upon successful completion.
+
+Routines that return pointers always return \fBNULL\fR on error.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBinitscr\fR and \fBnewterm\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. It
+specifies that portable applications must not call \fBinitscr\fR more than
+once.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X), \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X), \fBcurs_util\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_inopts.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_inopts.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1fc6a820a603
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_inopts.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,214 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_inopts.3x,v 1.8 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_inopts 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBcbreak\fR, \fBnocbreak\fR, \fBecho\fR,
+\fBnoecho\fR, \fBhalfdelay\fR, \fBintrflush\fR, \fBkeypad\fR,
+\fBmeta\fR, \fBnodelay\fR, \fBnotimeout\fR, \fBraw\fR, \fBnoraw\fR,
+\fBnoqiflush\fR, \fBqiflush\fR, \fBtimeout\fR, \fBwtimeout\fR,
+\fBtypeahead\fR - \fBcurses\fR input options
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint cbreak(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint nocbreak(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint echo(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint noecho(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint halfdelay(int tenths);\fR
+.br
+\fBint intrflush(WINDOW *win, bool bf);\fR
+.br
+\fBint keypad(WINDOW *win, bool bf);\fR
+.br
+\fBint meta(WINDOW *win, bool bf);\fR
+.br
+\fBint nodelay(WINDOW *win, bool bf);\fR
+.br
+\fBint raw(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint noraw(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid noqiflush(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid qiflush(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint notimeout(WINDOW *win, bool bf);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid timeout(int delay);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid wtimeout(WINDOW *win, int delay);\fR
+.br
+\fBint typeahead(int fd);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Normally, the tty driver buffers typed characters until a newline or carriage
+return is typed. The \fBcbreak\fR routine disables line buffering and
+erase/kill character-processing (interrupt and flow control characters are
+unaffected), making characters typed by the user immediately available to the
+program. The \fBnocbreak\fR routine returns the terminal to normal (cooked)
+mode.
+
+Initially the terminal may or may not be in \fBcbreak\fR mode, as the mode is
+inherited; therefore, a program should call \fBcbreak\fR or \fBnocbreak\fR
+explicitly. Most interactive programs using \fBcurses\fR set the \fBcbreak\fR
+mode. Note that \fBcbreak\fR overrides \fBraw\fR.
+[See \fBcurs_getch\fR(3X) for a
+discussion of how these routines interact with \fBecho\fR and \fBnoecho\fR.]
+
+The \fBecho\fR and \fBnoecho\fR routines control whether characters typed by
+the user are echoed by \fBgetch\fR as they are typed. Echoing by the tty
+driver is always disabled, but initially \fBgetch\fR is in echo mode, so
+characters typed are echoed. Authors of most interactive programs prefer to do
+their own echoing in a controlled area of the screen, or not to echo at all, so
+they disable echoing by calling \fBnoecho\fR.
+[See \fBcurs_getch\fR(3X) for a
+discussion of how these routines interact with \fBcbreak\fR and
+\fBnocbreak\fR.]
+
+The \fBhalfdelay\fR routine is used for half-delay mode, which is similar to
+\fBcbreak\fR mode in that characters typed by the user are immediately
+available to the program. However, after blocking for \fItenths\fR tenths of
+seconds, ERR is returned if nothing has been typed. The value of \fBtenths\fR
+must be a number between 1 and 255. Use \fBnocbreak\fR to leave half-delay
+mode.
+
+If the \fBintrflush\fR option is enabled, (\fIbf\fR is \fBTRUE\fR), when an
+interrupt key is pressed on the keyboard (interrupt, break, quit) all output in
+the tty driver queue will be flushed, giving the effect of faster response to
+the interrupt, but causing \fBcurses\fR to have the wrong idea of what is on
+the screen. Disabling (\fIbf\fR is \fBFALSE\fR), the option prevents the
+flush. The default for the option is inherited from the tty driver settings.
+The window argument is ignored.
+
+The \fBkeypad\fR option enables the keypad of the user's terminal. If
+enabled (\fIbf\fR is \fBTRUE\fR), the user can press a function key
+(such as an arrow key) and \fBwgetch\fR returns a single value
+representing the function key, as in \fBKEY_LEFT\fR. If disabled
+(\fIbf\fR is \fBFALSE\fR), \fBcurses\fR does not treat function keys
+specially and the program has to interpret the escape sequences
+itself. If the keypad in the terminal can be turned on (made to
+transmit) and off (made to work locally), turning on this option
+causes the terminal keypad to be turned on when \fBwgetch\fR is
+called. The default value for keypad is false.
+
+Initially, whether the terminal returns 7 or 8 significant bits on
+input depends on the control mode of the tty driver [see termio(7)].
+To force 8 bits to be returned, invoke \fBmeta\fR(\fIwin\fR,
+\fBTRUE\fR); this is equivalent, under POSIX, to setting the CS8 flag
+on the terminal. To force 7 bits to be returned, invoke
+\fBmeta\fR(\fIwin\fR, \fBFALSE\fR); this is equivalent, under POSIX,
+to setting the CS8 flag on the terminal. The window argument,
+\fIwin\fR, is always ignored. If the terminfo capabilities \fBsmm\fR
+(meta_on) and \fBrmm\fR (meta_off) are defined for the terminal,
+\fBsmm\fR is sent to the terminal when \fBmeta\fR(\fIwin\fR,
+\fBTRUE\fR) is called and \fBrmm\fR is sent when \fBmeta\fR(\fIwin\fR,
+\fBFALSE\fR) is called.
+
+The \fBnodelay\fR option causes \fBgetch\fR to be a non-blocking call.
+If no input is ready, \fBgetch\fR returns \fBERR\fR. If disabled
+(\fIbf\fR is \fBFALSE\fR), \fBgetch\fR waits until a key is pressed.
+
+While interpreting an input escape sequence, \fBwgetch\fR sets a timer
+while waiting for the next character. If \fBnotimeout(\fR\fIwin\fR,
+\fBTRUE\fR) is called, then \fBwgetch\fR does not set a timer. The
+purpose of the timeout is to differentiate between sequences received
+from a function key and those typed by a user.
+
+The \fBraw\fR and \fBnoraw\fR routines place the terminal into or out of raw
+mode. Raw mode is similar to \fBcbreak\fR mode, in that characters typed are
+immediately passed through to the user program. The differences are that in
+raw mode, the interrupt, quit, suspend, and flow control characters are all
+passed through uninterpreted, instead of generating a signal. The behavior of
+the BREAK key depends on other bits in the tty driver that are not set by
+\fBcurses\fR.
+
+When the \fBnoqiflush\fR routine is used, normal flush of input and
+output queues associated with the \fBINTR\fR, \fBQUIT\fR and
+\fBSUSP\fR characters will not be done [see termio(7)]. When
+\fBqiflush\fR is called, the queues will be flushed when these control
+characters are read. You may want to call \fBnoqiflush()\fR in a signal
+handler if you want output to continue as though the interrupt
+had not occurred, after the handler exits.
+
+The \fBtimeout\fR and \fBwtimeout\fR routines set blocking or
+non-blocking read for a given window. If \fIdelay\fR is negative,
+blocking read is used (\fIi\fR.\fIe\fR., waits indefinitely for
+input). If \fIdelay\fR is zero, then non-blocking read is used
+(\fIi\fR.\fIe\fR., read returns \fBERR\fR if no input is waiting). If
+\fIdelay\fR is positive, then read blocks for \fIdelay\fR
+milliseconds, and returns \fBERR\fR if there is still no input.
+Hence, these routines provide the same functionality as \fBnodelay\fR,
+plus the additional capability of being able to block for only
+\fIdelay\fR milliseconds (where \fIdelay\fR is positive).
+
+The \fBcurses\fR library does ``line-breakout optimization'' by looking for
+typeahead periodically while updating the screen. If input is found,
+and it is coming from a tty, the current update is postponed until
+\fBrefresh\fR or \fBdoupdate\fR is called again. This allows faster
+response to commands typed in advance. Normally, the input FILE
+pointer passed to \fBnewterm\fR, or \fBstdin\fR in the case that
+\fBinitscr\fR was used, will be used to do this typeahead checking.
+The \fBtypeahead\fR routine specifies that the file descriptor
+\fIfd\fR is to be used to check for typeahead instead. If \fIfd\fR is
+-1, then no typeahead checking is done.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines that return an integer return \fBERR\fR upon failure and OK (SVr4
+specifies only "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion, unless otherwise noted in the preceding routine descriptions.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4.
+
+The ncurses library obeys the XPG4 standard and the historical practice of the
+AT&T curses implementations, in that the echo bit is cleared when curses
+initializes the terminal state. BSD curses differed from this slightly; it
+left the echo bit on at initialization, but the BSD \fBraw\fR call turned it
+off as a side-effect. For best portability, set echo or noecho explicitly
+just after initialization, even if your program remains in cooked mode.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBecho\fR, \fBnoecho\fR, \fBhalfdelay\fR, \fBintrflush\fR,
+\fBmeta\fR, \fBnodelay\fR, \fBnotimeout\fR, \fBnoqiflush\fR,
+\fBqiflush\fR, \fBtimeout\fR, and \fBwtimeout\fR may be macros.
+
+The \fBnoraw\fR and \fBnocbreak\fR calls follow historical practice in that
+they attempt to restore to normal (`cooked') mode from raw and cbreak modes
+respectively. Mixing raw/noraw and cbreak/nocbreak calls leads to tty driver
+control states that are hard to predict or understand; it is not recommended.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_getch\fR(3X), \fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X), \fBtermio\fR(7)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_insch.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_insch.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5c3c3410465e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_insch.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_insch.3x,v 1.6 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_insch 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBinsch\fR, \fBwinsch\fR, \fBmvinsch\fR, \fBmvwinsch\fR -
+insert a character before cursor in a \fBcurses\fR window
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint insch(chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBint winsch(WINDOW *win, chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvinsch(int y, int x, chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwinsch(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, chtype ch);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These routines, insert the character \fIch\fR before the character under the
+cursor. All characters to the right of the cursor are moved one space to the
+right, with the possibility of the rightmost character on the line being lost.
+The insertion operation does not change the cursor position.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines that return an integer return \fBERR\fR upon failure and OK (SVr4
+specifies only "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion, unless otherwise noted in the preceding routine descriptions.
+.SH NOTES
+These routines do not necessarily imply use of a hardware insert character
+feature.
+
+Note that \fBinsch\fR, \fBmvinsch\fR, and \fBmvwinsch\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_insstr.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_insstr.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..955ac8df6397
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_insstr.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_insstr.3x,v 1.10 1998/07/25 20:32:57 Todd.Miller Exp $
+.TH curs_insstr 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBinsstr\fR, \fBinsnstr\fR, \fBwinsstr\fR, \fBwinsnstr\fR,
+\fBmvinsstr\fR, \fBmvinsnstr\fR, \fBmvwinsstr\fR, \fBmvwinsnstr\fR - insert
+string before cursor in a \fBcurses\fR window
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+.br
+\fBint insstr(const char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint insnstr(const char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint winsstr(WINDOW *win, const char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint winsnstr(WINDOW *win, const char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvinsstr(int y, int x, const char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvinsnstr(int y, int x, const char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwinsstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, const char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwinsnstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, const char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These routines insert a character string (as many characters as will fit on the
+line) before the character under the cursor. All characters to the right of
+the cursor are shifted right, with the possibility of the rightmost characters
+on the line being lost. The cursor position does not change (after moving to
+\fIy\fR, \fIx\fR, if specified). The four routines with \fIn\fR as the last
+argument insert a leading substring of at most \fIn\fR characters. If
+\fIn\fR<=0, then the entire string is inserted.
+
+If a character in \fIstr\fR is a tab, newline, carriage return or
+backspace, the cursor is moved appropriately within the window. A
+newline also does a \fBclrtoeol\fR before moving. Tabs are considered
+to be at every eighth column. If a character in \fIstr\fR is another
+control character, it is drawn in the \fB^\fR\fIX\fR notation.
+Calling \fBwinch\fR after adding a control character (and moving to
+it, if necessary) does not return the control character, but instead
+returns a character in the ^-representation of the control character.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines that return an integer return \fBERR\fR upon failure and OK (SVr4
+specifies only "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion, unless otherwise noted in the preceding routine descriptions.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that all but \fBwinsnstr\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4, which adds
+const qualifiers to the arguments. The XSI Curses error conditions
+\fBEILSEQ\fR and \fBEILOVERFLOW\fR associated with extended-level conformance
+are not yet detected (this implementation does not yet support XPG4 multi-byte
+characters).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_clear\fR(3X), \fBcurs_inch\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_instr.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_instr.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d3a7e6f7d085
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_instr.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_instr.3x,v 1.8 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_instr 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBinstr\fR, \fBinnstr\fR, \fBwinstr\fR, \fBwinnstr\fR,
+\fBmvinstr\fR, \fBmvinnstr\fR, \fBmvwinstr\fR, \fBmvwinnstr\fR - get a string
+of characters from a \fBcurses\fR window
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint instr(char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint innstr(char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint winstr(WINDOW *win, char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint winnstr(WINDOW *win, char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvinstr(int y, int x, char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvinnstr(int y, int x, char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwinstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwinnstr(WINDOW *win, int y, int x, char *str, int n);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These routines return a string of characters in \fIstr\fR, extracted starting
+at the current cursor position in the named window.
+Attributes are stripped from the characters. The four
+functions with \fIn\fR as the last argument return a leading substring at most
+\fIn\fR characters long (exclusive of the trailing NUL).
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All of the functions return \fBERR\fR upon failure,
+or the number of characters actually read into the string.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that all routines except \fBwinnstr\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses
+error conditions \fBEILSEQ\fR and \fBEILOVERFLOW\fR associated with
+extended-level conformance are not yet detected (this implementation does not
+yet support XPG4 multi-byte characters).
+SVr4 does not
+document whether a length limit includes or excludes the trailing NUL.
+.PP
+The ncurses library extends the XSI description by allowing a negative
+value for \fIn\fR.
+In this case, the functions return the string ending at the right margin.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
+
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_kernel.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_kernel.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..62a775e7cbed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_kernel.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_kernel.3x,v 1.11 1998/06/27 21:56:38 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_kernel 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBdef_prog_mode\fR, \fBdef_shell_mode\fR,
+\fBreset_prog_mode\fR, \fBreset_shell_mode\fR, \fBresetty\fR,
+\fBsavetty\fR, \fBgetsyx\fR, \fBsetsyx\fR, \fBripoffline\fR,
+\fBcurs_set\fR, \fBnapms\fR - low-level \fBcurses\fR routines
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint def_prog_mode(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint def_shell_mode(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint reset_prog_mode(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint reset_shell_mode(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint resetty(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint savetty(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid getsyx(int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid setsyx(int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+\fBint ripoffline(int line, int (*init)(WINDOW *, int));\fR
+.br
+\fBint curs_set(int visibility);\fR
+.br
+\fBint napms(int ms);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The following routines give low-level access to various \fBcurses\fR
+capabilities. Theses routines typically are used inside library
+routines.
+
+The \fBdef_prog_mode\fR and \fBdef_shell_mode\fR routines save the
+current terminal modes as the "program" (in \fBcurses\fR) or "shell"
+(not in \fBcurses\fR) state for use by the \fBreset_prog_mode\fR and
+\fBreset_shell_mode\fR routines. This is done automatically by
+\fBinitscr\fR. There is one such save area for each screen context
+allocated by \fBnewterm()\fR.
+
+The \fBreset_prog_mode\fR and \fBreset_shell_mode\fR routines restore
+the terminal to "program" (in \fBcurses\fR) or "shell" (out of
+\fBcurses\fR) state. These are done automatically by \fBendwin\fR
+and, after an \fBendwin\fR, by \fBdoupdate\fR, so they normally are
+not called.
+
+The \fBresetty\fR and \fBsavetty\fR routines save and restore the
+state of the terminal modes. \fBsavetty\fR saves the current state in
+a buffer and \fBresetty\fR restores the state to what it was at the
+last call to \fBsavetty\fR.
+
+The \fBgetsyx\fR routine returns the current coordinates of the virtual screen
+cursor in \fIy\fR and \fIx\fR. If \fBleaveok\fR is currently \fBTRUE\fR, then
+\fB-1\fR,\fB-1\fR is returned. If lines have been removed from the top of the
+screen, using \fBripoffline\fR, \fIy\fR and \fIx\fR include these lines;
+therefore, \fIy\fR and \fIx\fR should be used only as arguments for
+\fBsetsyx\fR.
+
+The \fBsetsyx\fR routine sets the virtual screen cursor to
+\fIy\fR, \fIx\fR. If \fIy\fR and \fIx\fR are both \fB-1\fR, then
+\fBleaveok\fR is set. The two routines \fBgetsyx\fR and \fBsetsyx\fR
+are designed to be used by a library routine, which manipulates
+\fBcurses\fR windows but does not want to change the current position
+of the program's cursor. The library routine would call \fBgetsyx\fR
+at the beginning, do its manipulation of its own windows, do a
+\fBwnoutrefresh\fR on its windows, call \fBsetsyx\fR, and then call
+\fBdoupdate\fR.
+
+The \fBripoffline\fR routine provides access to the same facility that
+\fBslk_init\fR [see \fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)] uses to reduce the size of the
+screen. \fBripoffline\fR must be called before \fBinitscr\fR or
+\fBnewterm\fR is called. If \fIline\fR is positive, a line is removed
+from the top of \fBstdscr\fR; if \fIline\fR is negative, a line is
+removed from the bottom. When this is done inside \fBinitscr\fR, the
+routine \fBinit\fR (supplied by the user) is called with two
+arguments: a window pointer to the one-line window that has been
+allocated and an integer with the number of columns in the window.
+Inside this initialization routine, the integer variables \fBLINES\fR
+and \fBCOLS\fR (defined in \fB<curses.h>\fR) are not guaranteed to be
+accurate and \fBwrefresh\fR or \fBdoupdate\fR must not be called. It
+is allowable to call \fBwnoutrefresh\fR during the initialization
+routine.
+
+\fBripoffline\fR can be called up to five times before calling \fBinitscr\fR or
+\fBnewterm\fR.
+
+The \fBcurs_set\fR routine sets the cursor state is set to invisible,
+normal, or very visible for \fBvisibility\fR equal to \fB0\fR,
+\fB1\fR, or \fB2\fR respectively. If the terminal supports the
+\fIvisibility\fR requested, the previous \fIcursor\fR state is
+returned; otherwise, \fBERR\fR is returned.
+
+The \fBnapms\fR routine is used to sleep for \fIms\fR milliseconds.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Except for \fBcurs_set\fR, these routines always return \fBOK\fR.
+\fBcurs_set\fR returns the previous cursor state, or \fBERR\fR if the
+requested \fIvisibility\fR is not supported.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBgetsyx\fR is a macro, so \fB&\fR is not necessary before
+the variables \fIy\fR and \fIx\fR.
+
+Older SVr4 man pages warn that the return value of \fBcurs_set\fR "is currently
+incorrect". This implementation gets it right, but it may be unwise to count
+on the correctness of the return value anywhere else.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The functions \fBsetsyx\fR and \fBgetsyx\fR are not described in the XSI
+Curses standard, Issue 4. All other functions are as described in XSI Curses.
+
+The SVr4 documentation describes \fBsetsyx\fR and \fBgetsyx\fR as having return
+type int. This is misleading, as they are macros with no documented semantics
+for the return value.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X), \fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X), \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_scr_dump\fR(3X), \fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_mouse.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_mouse.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e995260473f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_mouse.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,206 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.'" $Id: curs_mouse.3x,v 1.12 1999/01/09 22:53:22 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_mouse 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBgetmouse\fR, \fBungetmouse\fR,
+\fBmousemask\fR, \fBwenclose\fR,
+\fBwmouse_trafo\fR, \fBmouseinterval\fR - mouse interface through curses
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBtypedef unsigned long mmask_t;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ short id; \fI/* ID to distinguish multiple devices */\fB
+ int x, y, z; \fI/* event coordinates */\fB
+ mmask_t bstate; \fI/* button state bits */\fB
+}
+MEVENT;\fR
+.fi
+.br
+\fBint getmouse(MEVENT *event);\fR
+.br
+\fBint ungetmouse(MEVENT *event);\fR
+.br
+\fBmmask_t mousemask(mmask_t newmask, mmask_t *oldmask);\fR
+.br
+\fBbool wenclose(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+\fBbool wmouse_trafo(const WINDOW* win, int* pY, int* pX, bool to_screen);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mouseinterval(int erval);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions provide an interface to mouse events from
+\fBncurses\fR(3X). Mouse events are represented by \fBKEY_MOUSE\fR
+pseudo-key values in the \fBwgetch\fR input stream.
+
+To make mouse events visible, use the \fBmousemask\fR function. This will set
+the mouse events to be reported. By default, no mouse events are reported.
+The function will return a mask to indicate which of the specified mouse events
+can be reported; on complete failure it returns 0. If oldmask is non-NULL,
+this function fills the indicated location with the previous value of the given
+window's mouse event mask.
+
+As a side effect, setting a zero mousemask may turn off the mouse pointer;
+setting a nonzero mask may turn it on. Whether this happens is
+device-dependent.
+
+Here are the mouse event type masks:
+
+.TS
+l l
+_ _
+l l.
+\fIName\fR \fIDescription\fR
+BUTTON1_PRESSED mouse button 1 down
+BUTTON1_RELEASED mouse button 1 up
+BUTTON1_CLICKED mouse button 1 clicked
+BUTTON1_DOUBLE_CLICKED mouse button 1 double clicked
+BUTTON1_TRIPLE_CLICKED mouse button 1 triple clicked
+BUTTON2_PRESSED mouse button 2 down
+BUTTON2_RELEASED mouse button 2 up
+BUTTON2_CLICKED mouse button 2 clicked
+BUTTON2_DOUBLE_CLICKED mouse button 2 double clicked
+BUTTON2_TRIPLE_CLICKED mouse button 2 triple clicked
+BUTTON3_PRESSED mouse button 3 down
+BUTTON3_RELEASED mouse button 3 up
+BUTTON3_CLICKED mouse button 3 clicked
+BUTTON3_DOUBLE_CLICKED mouse button 3 double clicked
+BUTTON3_TRIPLE_CLICKED mouse button 3 triple clicked
+BUTTON4_PRESSED mouse button 4 down
+BUTTON4_RELEASED mouse button 4 up
+BUTTON4_CLICKED mouse button 4 clicked
+BUTTON4_DOUBLE_CLICKED mouse button 4 double clicked
+BUTTON4_TRIPLE_CLICKED mouse button 4 triple clicked
+BUTTON_SHIFT shift was down during button state change
+BUTTON_CTRL control was down during button state change
+BUTTON_ALT alt was down during button state change
+ALL_MOUSE_EVENTS report all button state changes
+REPORT_MOUSE_POSITION report mouse movement
+.TE
+
+Once a class of mouse events have been made visible in a window,
+calling the \fBwgetch\fR function on that window may return
+\fBKEY_MOUSE\fR as an indicator that a mouse event has been queued.
+To read the event data and pop the event off the queue, call
+\fBgetmouse\fR. This function will return \fBOK\fR if a mouse event
+is actually visible in the given window, \fBERR\fR otherwise.
+When \fBgetmouse\fR returns \fBOK\fR, the data deposited as y and
+x in the event structure coordinates will be screen-relative character-cell
+coordinates. The returned state mask will have exactly one bit set to
+indicate the event type.
+
+The \fBungetmouse\fR function behaves analogously to \fBungetch\fR. It pushes
+a \fBKEY_MOUSE\fR event onto the input queue, and associates with that event
+the given state data and screen-relative character-cell coordinates.
+
+The \fBwenclose\fR function tests whether a given pair of screen-relative
+character-cell coordinates is enclosed by a given window, returning TRUE
+if it is and FALSE otherwise. It is useful for determining what subset of
+the screen windows enclose the location of a mouse event.
+
+The \fBwmouse_trafo\fR function transforms a given pair of coordinates from
+stdscr-relative coordinates to screen-relative coordinates or vice versa.
+Please remember, that stdscr-relative coordinates are not always identical
+to screen-relative coordinates due to the mechanism to reserve lines on top
+or bottom of the screen for other purposes (ripoff() call, see also slk_...
+functions). If the parameter \fBto_screen\fR is \fBTRUE\fR, the pointers
+\fBpY, pX\fR must reference the coordinates of a location inside the window
+\fBwin\fR. They are converted to screen-relative coordinates and returned
+through the pointers. If the conversion was successful, the function
+returns \fBTRUE\fR. If one of the parameters was NULL or the location is
+not inside the window, \fBFALSE\fR is returned. If \fBto_screen\fR is
+\fBFALSE\fR, the pointers \fBpY, pX\fR must reference screen-relative
+coordinates. They are converted to stdscr-relative coordinates if the
+window \fBwin\fR encloses this point. In this case the function returns
+\fBTRUE\fR. If one of the parameters is NULL or the point is not inside the
+window, \fBFALSE\fR is returned. Please notice, that the referenced coordinates
+are only replaced by the converted coordinates if the transformation was
+successful.
+
+The \fBmouseinterval\fR function sets the maximum time (in thousands of a
+second) that can elapse between press and release events in order for them to
+be recognized as a click. This function returns the previous interval value.
+The default is one fifth of a second.
+
+Note that mouse events will be ignored when input is in cooked mode, and will
+cause an error beep when cooked mode is being simulated in a window by a
+function such as \fBgetstr\fR that expects a linefeed for input-loop
+termination.
+
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+\fBgetmouse\fR, \fBungetmouse\fR and \fBmouseinterval\fR
+return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure or \fBOK\fR
+upon successful completion. \fBmousemask\fR returns the
+mask of reportable events. \fBwenclose\fR and \fBwmouse_trafo\fR
+are boolean functions returning \fBTRUE\fR or \fBFALSE\fR depending
+on their test result.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These calls were designed for \fBncurses\fR(3X), and are not found in SVr4
+curses, 4.4BSD curses, or any other previous version of curses.
+
+The feature macro \fBNCURSES_MOUSE_VERSION\fR is provided so the preprocessor
+can be used to test whether these features are present (its value is 1). NOTE:
+THIS INTERFACE IS EXPERIMENTAL AND IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE! If the
+interface is changed, the value of \fBNCURSES_MOUSE_VERSION\fR will be
+incremented.
+
+The order of the \fBMEVENT\fR structure members is not guaranteed.
+Additional fields may be added to the structure in the future.
+
+Under \fBncurses\fR(3X), these calls are implemented using either
+xterm's built-in mouse-tracking API or Alessandro Rubini's gpm server.
+If you are using something other than xterm there is no gpm daemon
+running on your machine, mouse events will not be visible to
+\fBncurses\fR(3X) (and the \fBwmousemask\fR function will always
+return \fB0\fR).
+
+The z member in the event structure is not presently used. It is intended
+for use with touch screens (which may be pressure-sensitive) or with
+3D-mice/trackballs/power gloves.
+.SH BUGS
+Mouse events under xterm will not in fact be ignored during cooked mode,
+if they have been enabled by \fBwmousemask\fR. Instead, the xterm mouse
+report sequence will appear in the string read.
+
+Mouse events under xterm will not be detected correctly in a window with
+its keypad bit off.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_move.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_move.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..25c47feb482b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_move.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_move.3x,v 1.6 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_move 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmove\fR, \fBwmove\fR - move \fBcurses\fR window cursor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint move(int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wmove(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These routines move the cursor associated with the window to line \fIy\fR and
+column \fIx\fR. This routine does not move the physical cursor of the terminal
+until \fBrefresh\fR is called. The position specified is relative to the upper
+left-hand corner of the window, which is (0,0).
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+These routines return \fBERR\fR upon failure and OK (SVr4
+specifies only "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBmove\fR may be a macro.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4. The
+standard specifies that if (y,x) is within a multi-column character, the cursor
+is moved to the first column of that character; however, this implementation
+does not yet support the extended-level XSI multi-byte characters.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_outopts.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_outopts.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2946562d4e06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_outopts.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_outopts.3x,v 1.13 1998/12/26 20:02:04 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_outopts 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBclearok\fR, \fBidlok\fR, \fBidcok immedok\fR,
+\fBleaveok\fR, \fBsetscrreg\fR, \fBwsetscrreg\fR, \fBscrollok\fR,
+\fBnl\fR, \fBnonl\fR - \fBcurses\fR output options
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint clearok(WINDOW *win, bool bf);\fR
+.br
+\fBint idlok(WINDOW *win, bool bf);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid idcok(WINDOW *win, bool bf);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid immedok(WINDOW *win, bool bf);\fR
+.br
+\fBint leaveok(WINDOW *win, bool bf);\fR
+.br
+\fBint setscrreg(int top, int bot);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wsetscrreg(WINDOW *win, int top, int bot);\fR
+.br
+\fBint scrollok(WINDOW *win, bool bf);\fR
+.br
+\fBint nl(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint nonl(void);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These routines set options that change the style of output within
+\fBcurses\fR. All options are initially \fBFALSE\fR, unless otherwise stated.
+It is not necessary to turn these options off before calling \fBendwin\fR.
+
+If \fBclearok\fR is called with \fBTRUE\fR as argument, the next
+call to \fBwrefresh\fR with this window will clear the screen completely and
+redraw the entire screen from scratch. This is useful when the contents of the
+screen are uncertain, or in some cases for a more pleasing visual effect. If
+the \fIwin\fR argument to \fBclearok\fR is the global variable \fBcurscr\fR,
+the next call to \fBwrefresh\fR with any window causes the screen to be cleared
+and repainted from scratch.
+
+If \fBidlok\fR is called with \fBTRUE\fR as second argument, \fBcurses\fR
+considers using the hardware insert/delete line feature of terminals so
+equipped. Calling \fBidlok\fR with \fBFALSE\fR as second argument disables use
+of line insertion and deletion. This option should be enabled only if the
+application needs insert/delete line, for example, for a screen editor. It is
+disabled by default because insert/delete line tends to be visually annoying
+when used in applications where it isn't really needed. If insert/delete line
+cannot be used, \fBcurses\fR redraws the changed portions of all lines.
+
+If \fBidcok\fR is called with \fBFALSE\fR as second argument, \fBcurses\fR
+no longer considers using the hardware insert/delete character feature of
+terminals so equipped. Use of character insert/delete is enabled by default.
+Calling \fBidcok\fR with \fBTRUE\fR as second argument re-enables use
+of character insertion and deletion.
+
+If \fBimmedok\fR is called with \fBTRUE as argument\fR, any change
+in the window image, such as the ones caused by \fBwaddch, wclrtobot, wscrl\fR,
+\fIetc\fR., automatically cause a call to \fBwrefresh\fR. However, it may
+degrade performance considerably, due to repeated calls to \fBwrefresh\fR.
+It is disabled by default.
+
+Normally, the hardware cursor is left at the location of the window cursor
+being refreshed. The \fBleaveok\fR option allows the cursor to be left
+wherever the update happens to leave it. It is useful for applications where
+the cursor is not used, since it reduces the need for cursor motions. If
+possible, the cursor is made invisible when this option is enabled.
+
+The \fBsetscrreg\fR and \fBwsetscrreg\fR routines allow the application
+programmer to set a software scrolling region in a window. \fItop\fR and
+\fIbot\fR are the line numbers of the top and bottom margin of the scrolling
+region. (Line 0 is the top line of the window.) If this option and
+\fBscrollok\fR are enabled, an attempt to move off the bottom margin line
+causes all lines in the scrolling region to scroll one line in the direction
+of the first line. Only the text of the window is scrolled. (Note that this
+has nothing to do with the use of a physical scrolling region capability in the
+terminal, like that in the VT100. If \fBidlok\fR is enabled and the terminal
+has either a scrolling region or insert/delete line capability, they will
+probably be used by the output routines.)
+
+The \fBscrollok\fR option controls what happens when the cursor of a window is
+moved off the edge of the window or scrolling region, either as a result of a
+newline action on the bottom line, or typing the last character of the last
+line. If disabled, (\fIbf\fR is \fBFALSE\fR), the cursor is left on the bottom
+line. If enabled, (\fIbf\fR is \fBTRUE\fR), the window is scrolled up one line
+(Note that in order to get the physical scrolling effect on the terminal, it is
+also necessary to call \fBidlok\fR).
+
+The \fBnl\fR and \fBnonl\fR routines control whether the underlying display
+device translates the return key into newline on input, and whether it
+translates newline into return and line-feed on output (in either case, the
+call \fBaddch('\\n')\fR does the equivalent of return and line feed on the
+virtual screen). Initially, these translations do occur. If you disable them
+using \fBnonl\fR, \fBcurses\fR will be able to make better use of the line-feed
+capability, resulting in faster cursor motion. Also, \fBcurses\fR will then be
+able to detect the return key.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The functions \fBsetscrreg\fR and \fBwsetscrreg\fR return \fBOK\fR upon success
+and \fBERR\fR upon failure. All other routines that return an integer always
+return \fBOK\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These functions are described in the XSI Curses standard, Issue 4.
+
+The XSI Curses standard is ambiguous on the question of whether \fBraw\fR()
+should disable the CRLF translations controlled by \fBnl\fR() and \fBnonl\fR().
+BSD curses did turn off these translations; AT&T curses (at least as late as
+SVr1) did not. We choose to do so, on the theory that a programmer requesting
+raw input wants a clean (ideally 8-bit clean) connection that the operating
+system does not mess with.
+
+Some historic curses implementations had, as an undocumented feature, the
+ability to do the equivalent of \fBclearok(..., 1)\fR by saying
+\fBtouchwin(stdscr)\fR or \fBclear(stdscr)\fR. This will not work under
+ncurses.
+
+Earlier System V curses implementations specified that with \fBscrollok\fR
+enabled, any window modification triggering a scroll also forced a physical
+refresh. XSI Curses does not require this, and \fBncurses\fR avoids doing
+it in order to perform better vertical-motion optimization at \fBwrefresh\fR
+time.
+
+The XSI Curses standard does not mention that the cursor should be
+made invisible as a side-effect of \fBleaveok\fR.
+SVr4 curses documentation does this, but the code does not.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBclearok\fR, \fBleaveok\fR, \fBscrollok\fR, \fBidcok\fR, \fBnl\fR,
+\fBnonl\fR and \fBsetscrreg\fR may be macros.
+
+The \fBimmedok\fR routine is useful for windows that are used as terminal
+emulators.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_addch\fR(3X), \fBcurs_clear\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X), \fBcurs_scroll\fR(3X), \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_overlay.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_overlay.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b6a026059d44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_overlay.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_overlay.3x,v 1.8 1998/12/26 20:08:30 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_overlay 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBoverlay\fR, \fBoverwrite\fR, \fBcopywin\fR - overlay and
+manipulate overlapped \fBcurses\fR windows
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint overlay(const WINDOW *srcwin, WINDOW *dstwin);\fR
+.br
+\fBint overwrite(const WINDOW *srcwin, WINDOW *dstwin);\fR
+.br
+\fBint copywin(WINDOW *srcwin, WINDOW *dstwin, int sminrow,\fR
+ \fBint smincol, int dminrow, int dmincol, int dmaxrow,\fR
+ \fBint dmaxcol, int overlay);\fR
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBoverlay\fR and \fBoverwrite\fR routines overlay \fIsrcwin\fR on
+top of \fIdstwin\fR. \fIscrwin\fR and \fIdstwin\fR are not required
+to be the same size; only text where the two windows overlap is
+copied. The difference is that \fBoverlay\fR is non-destructive
+(blanks are not copied) whereas \fBoverwrite\fR is destructive.
+
+The \fBcopywin\fR routine provides a finer granularity of control over the
+\fBoverlay\fR and \fBoverwrite\fR routines. Like in the \fBprefresh\fR
+routine, a rectangle is specified in the destination window, (\fIdminrow\fR,
+\fIdmincol\fR) and (\fIdmaxrow\fR, \fIdmaxcol\fR), and the upper-left-corner
+coordinates of the source window, (\fIsminrow\fR, \fIsmincol\fR). If the
+argument \fIoverlay\fR is \fBtrue\fR, then copying is non-destructive, as in
+\fBoverlay\fR.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return an integer return \fBERR\fR upon failure, and \fBOK\fR
+(SVr4 only specifies "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBoverlay\fR and \fBoverwrite\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions (adding the const
+qualifiers). It further specifies their behavior in the presence of characters
+with multi-byte renditions (not yet supported in this implementation).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_pad\fR(3X), \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_pad.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_pad.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..35138f120336
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_pad.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_pad.3x,v 1.8 1998/12/26 20:09:03 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_pad 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBnewpad\fR, \fBsubpad\fR, \fBprefresh\fR,
+\fBpnoutrefresh\fR, \fBpechochar\fR - create and display \fBcurses\fR
+pads
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBWINDOW *newpad(int nlines, int ncols);\fR
+.br
+\fBWINDOW *subpad(WINDOW *orig, int nlines, int ncols,\fR
+ \fBint begin_y, int begin_x);\fR
+.br
+\fBint prefresh(WINDOW *pad, int pminrow, int pmincol,\fR
+ \fBint sminrow, int smincol, int smaxrow, int smaxcol);\fR
+.br
+\fBint pnoutrefresh(WINDOW *pad, int pminrow, int pmincol,\fR
+ \fBint sminrow, int smincol, int smaxrow, int smaxcol);\fR
+.br
+\fBint pechochar(WINDOW *pad, chtype ch);\fR
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBnewpad\fR routine creates and returns a pointer to a new pad data
+structure with the given number of lines, \fInlines\fR, and columns,
+\fIncols\fR. A pad is like a window, except that it is not restricted by the
+screen size, and is not necessarily associated with a particular part of the
+screen. Pads can be used when a large window is needed, and only a part of the
+window will be on the screen at one time. Automatic refreshes of pads
+(\fIe\fR.\fIg\fR., from scrolling or echoing of input) do not occur. It is not
+legal to call \fBwrefresh\fR with a \fIpad\fR as an argument; the routines
+\fBprefresh\fR or \fBpnoutrefresh\fR should be called instead. Note that these
+routines require additional parameters to specify the part of the pad to be
+displayed and the location on the screen to be used for the display.
+
+The \fBsubpad\fR routine creates and returns a pointer to a subwindow within a
+pad with the given number of lines, \fInlines\fR, and columns, \fIncols\fR.
+Unlike \fBsubwin\fR, which uses screen coordinates, the window is at position
+(\fIbegin\fR_\fIx\fR\fB,\fR \fIbegin\fR_\fIy\fR) on the pad. The window is
+made in the middle of the window \fIorig\fR, so that changes made to one window
+affect both windows. During the use of this routine, it will often be
+necessary to call \fBtouchwin\fR or \fBtouchline\fR on \fIorig\fR before
+calling \fBprefresh\fR.
+
+The \fBprefresh\fR and \fBpnoutrefresh\fR routines are analogous to
+\fBwrefresh\fR and \fBwnoutrefresh\fR except that they relate to pads instead
+of windows. The additional parameters are needed to indicate what part of the
+pad and screen are involved. \fIpminrow\fR and \fIpmincol\fR specify the upper
+left-hand corner of the rectangle to be displayed in the pad. \fIsminrow\fR,
+\fIsmincol\fR, \fIsmaxrow\fR, and \fIsmaxcol\fR specify the edges of the
+rectangle to be displayed on the screen. The lower right-hand corner of the
+rectangle to be displayed in the pad is calculated from the screen coordinates,
+since the rectangles must be the same size. Both rectangles must be entirely
+contained within their respective structures. Negative values of
+\fIpminrow\fR, \fIpmincol\fR, \fIsminrow\fR, or \fIsmincol\fR are treated as if
+they were zero.
+
+The \fBpechochar\fR routine is functionally equivalent to a call to \fBaddch\fR
+followed by a call to \fBrefresh\fR, a call to \fBwaddch\fR followed by a call
+to \fBwrefresh\fR, or a call to \fBwaddch\fR followed by a call to
+\fBprefresh.\fR The knowledge that only a single character is being output is
+taken into consideration and, for non-control characters, a considerable
+performance gain might be seen by using these routines instead of their
+equivalents. In the case of \fBpechochar\fR, the last location of the pad on
+the screen is reused for the arguments to \fBprefresh\fR.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return an integer return \fBERR\fR upon failure and \fBOK\fR
+(SVr4 only specifies "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion.
+
+Routines that return pointers return \fBNULL\fR on error, and set \fBerrno\fR
+to \fBENOMEM\fR.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBpechochar\fR may be a macro.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X), \fBcurs_touch\fR(3X), \fBcurs_addch\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_print.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_print.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7b781988fddb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_print.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.'" $Id: curs_print.3x,v 1.3 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_print 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmcprint\fR - ship binary data to printer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint mcprint(char *data, int len);\fR
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This function uses the \fBmc5p\fR or \fBmc4\fR and \fBmc5\fR capabilities,
+if they are present, to ship given data to a printer attached to the terminal.
+
+Note that the \fBmcprint\fR code has no way to do flow control with the printer
+or to know how much buffering it has. Your application is responsible for
+keeping the rate of writes to the printer below its continuous throughput rate
+(typically about half of its nominal cps rating). Dot-matrix printers and
+6-page-per-minute lasers can typically handle 80cps, so a good conservative
+rule of thumb is to sleep for a second after shipping each 80-character line.
+
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The \fBmcprint\fR function returns \fBERR\fR if the write operation aborted
+for some reason. In this case, errno will contain either an error associated
+with \fBwrite(2)\fR or one of the following:
+.TP 5
+ENODEV
+Capabilities for printer redirection don't exist.
+.TP 5
+ENOMEM
+Couldn't allocate sufficient memory to buffer the printer write.
+
+When \fBmcprint\fR succeeds, it returns the number of characters actually
+sent to the printer.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The \fBmcprint\fR call was designed for \fBncurses\fR(3X), and is not found
+in SVr4 curses, 4.4BSD curses, or any other previous version of curses.
+.SH BUGS
+Padding in the \fBmc5p\fR, \fBmc4\fR and \fBmc5\fR capabilities will not be
+interpreted.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X)\fR
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_printw.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_printw.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2f0152f3a77b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_printw.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_printw.3x,v 1.8 1998/12/26 20:09:36 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_printw 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBprintw\fR, \fBwprintw\fR, \fBmvprintw\fR,
+\fBmvwprintw\fR, \fBvwprintw\fR - print formatted output in
+\fBcurses\fR windows
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint printw(char *fmt\fR [\fB, arg\fR] \fB...);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wprintw(WINDOW *win, char *fmt\fR [\fB, arg\fR] \fB...);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvprintw(int y, int x, char *fmt\fR [\fB, arg\fR] \fB...);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwprintw(WINDOW *win, int y, int x,\fR
+ \fBchar *fmt\fR [\fB, arg]\fR ...);
+
+\fB#include <varargs.h>\fR
+.br
+\fBint vwprintw(WINDOW *win, char *fmt, varglist);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBprintw\fR, \fBwprintw\fR, \fBmvprintw\fR and \fBmvwprintw\fR
+routines are analogous to \fBprintf\fR [see \fBprintf\fR(3S)]. In
+effect, the string that would be output by \fBprintf\fR is output
+instead as though \fBwaddstr\fR were used on the given window.
+
+The \fBvwprintw\fR routine is analogous to \fBvprintf\fR [see
+\fBprintf\fR(3S)] and performs a \fBwprintw\fR using a variable
+argument list. The third argument is a \fBva_list\fR, a pointer to a
+list of arguments, as defined in \fB<varargs.h>\fR.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return an integer return \fBERR\fR upon failure and \fBOK\fR
+(SVr4 only specifies "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions. The function
+\fBvwprintw\fR is marked TO BE WITHDRAWN, and is to be replaced by a function
+\fBvw_printw\fR using the \fB<stdarg.h>\fR interface.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBprintf\fR(3S), \fBvprintf(3S)\fR
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_refresh.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_refresh.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4572b4c9f0ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_refresh.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_refresh.3x,v 1.7 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_refresh 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBrefresh\fR, \fBwrefresh\fR, \fBwnoutrefresh\fR,
+\fBdoupdate\fR, \fBredrawwin\fR, \fBwredrawln\fR - refresh
+\fBcurses\fR windows and lines
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint refresh(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wrefresh(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wnoutrefresh(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint doupdate(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint redrawwin(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wredrawln(WINDOW *win, int beg_line, int num_lines);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBrefresh\fR and \fBwrefresh\fR routines (or \fBwnoutrefresh\fR and
+\fBdoupdate\fR) must be called to get actual output to the terminal, as other
+routines merely manipulate data structures. The routine \fBwrefresh\fR copies
+the named window to the physical terminal screen, taking into account what is
+already there in order to do optimizations. The \fBrefresh\fR routine is the
+same, using \fBstdscr\fR as the default window. Unless \fBleaveok\fR has been
+enabled, the physical cursor of the terminal is left at the location of the
+cursor for that window.
+
+The \fBwnoutrefresh\fR and \fBdoupdate\fR routines allow multiple updates with
+more efficiency than \fBwrefresh\fR alone. In addition to all the window
+structures, \fBcurses\fR keeps two data structures representing the terminal
+screen: a physical screen, describing what is actually on the screen, and a
+virtual screen, describing what the programmer wants to have on the screen.
+
+The routine \fBwrefresh\fR works by first calling \fBwnoutrefresh\fR, which
+copies the named window to the virtual screen, and then calling \fBdoupdate\fR,
+which compares the virtual screen to the physical screen and does the actual
+update. If the programmer wishes to output several windows at once, a series
+of calls to \fBwrefresh\fR results in alternating calls to \fBwnoutrefresh\fR
+and \fBdoupdate\fR, causing several bursts of output to the screen. By first
+calling \fBwnoutrefresh\fR for each window, it is then possible to call
+\fBdoupdate\fR once, resulting in only one burst of output, with fewer total
+characters transmitted and less CPU time used. If the \fIwin\fR argument to
+\fBwrefresh\fR is the global variable \fBcurscr\fR, the screen is immediately
+cleared and repainted from scratch.
+
+The phrase "copies the named window to the virtual screen" above is ambiguous.
+What actually happens is that all \fItouched\fR (changed) lines in the window
+are copied to the virtual screen. This affects programs that use overlapping
+windows; it means that if two windows overlap, you can refresh them in either
+order and the overlap region will be modified only when it is explicitly
+changed. (But see the section on \fBPORTABILITY\fR below for a warning about
+exploiting this behavior.)
+
+The \fBwredrawln\fR routine indicates to \fBcurses\fR that some screen lines
+are corrupted and should be thrown away before anything is written over them.
+It touches the indicated lines (marking them changed).
+The routine \fBredrawwin\fR() touches the entire window.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return an integer return \fBERR\fR upon failure, and \fBOK\fR
+(SVr4 only specifies "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBrefresh\fR and \fBredrawwin\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions.
+
+Whether \fBwnoutrefresh()\fR copies to the virtual screen the entire contents
+of a window or just its changed portions has never been well-documented in
+historic curses versions (including SVr4). It might be unwise to rely on
+either behavior in programs that might have to be linked with other curses
+implementations. Instead, you can do an explicit \fBtouchwin()\fR before the
+\fBwnoutrefresh()\fR call to guarantee an entire-contents copy anywhere.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_scanw.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_scanw.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f0c64f1fcf2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_scanw.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_scanw.3x,v 1.8 1998/12/26 20:10:12 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_scanw 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBscanw\fR, \fBwscanw\fR, \fBmvscanw\fR,
+\fBmvwscanw\fR, \fBvwscanw\fR - convert formatted input from a
+\fBcurses\fR widow
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint scanw(char *fmt\fR [\fB, arg\fR] \fB...);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wscanw(WINDOW *win, char *fmt\fR [\fB, arg\fR] \fB...);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvscanw(int y, int x, char *fmt\fR [\fB, arg\fR] \fB...);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwscanw(WINDOW *win, int y, int x,\fR
+ \fBchar *fmt\fR [\fB, arg]\fR \fB...);\fR
+.br
+\fBint vwscanw(WINDOW *win, char *fmt, va_list varglist);\fR
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBscanw\fR, \fBwscanw\fR and \fBmvscanw\fR routines are analogous to
+\fBscanf\fR [see \fBscanf\fR(3S)]. The effect of these routines is as though
+\fBwgetstr\fR were called on the window, and the resulting line used as input
+for \fBsscanf\fR(3). Fields which do not map to a variable in the \fIfmt\fR
+field are lost.
+
+The \fBvwscanw\fR routine is similar to \fBvwprintw\fR in that it performs a
+\fBwscanw\fR using a variable argument list. The third argument is a
+\fIva\fR_\fIlist\fR, a pointer to a list of arguments, as defined in
+\fB<varargs.h>\fR.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+\fBvwscanw\fR returns \fBERR\fR on failure and an integer equal to the
+number of fields scanned on success.
+
+Applications may use the return value from the \fBscanw\fR, \fBwscanw\fR,
+\fBmvscanw\fR and \fBmvwscanw\fR routines to determine the number of fields
+which were mapped in the call.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions. The function
+\fBvwscanw\fR is marked TO BE WITHDRAWN, and is to be replaced by a function
+\fBvw_scanw\fR using the \fB<stdarg.h>\fR interface.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_getstr\fR(3X), \fBcurs_printw\fR(3X), \fBscanf\fR(3S)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_scr_dump.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_scr_dump.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..67a224899b2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_scr_dump.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_scr_dump.3x,v 1.1 1998/03/11 21:12:53 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_scr_dump 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBscr_dump\fR, \fBscr_restore\fR,
+\fBscr_init\fR, \fBscr_set\fR - read (write) a \fBcurses\fR screen
+from (to) a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint scr_dump(const char *filename);\fR
+.br
+\fBint scr_restore(const char *filename);\fR
+.br
+\fBint scr_init(const char *filename);\fR
+.br
+\fBint scr_set(const char *filename);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBscr_dump\fR routine dumps the current contents of the virtual screen
+to the file \fIfilename\fR.
+
+The \fBscr_restore\fR routine sets the virtual screen to the contents
+of \fIfilename\fR, which must have been written using \fBscr_dump\fR. The next
+call to \fBdoupdate\fR restores the screen to the way it looked in the dump
+file.
+
+The \fBscr_init\fR routine reads in the contents of \fIfilename\fR and uses
+them to initialize the \fBcurses\fR data structures about what the terminal
+currently has on its screen. If the data is determined to be valid,
+\fBcurses\fR bases its next update of the screen on this information rather
+than clearing the screen and starting from scratch. \fBscr_init\fR is used
+after \fBinitscr\fR or a \fBsystem\fR [see \fBsystem\fR(BA_LIB)] call to share
+the screen with another process which has done a \fBscr_dump\fR after its
+\fBendwin\fR call. The data is declared invalid if the terminfo capabilities
+\fBrmcup\fR and \fBnrrmc\fR exist; also if the terminal has been written to
+since the preceding \fBscr_dump\fR call.
+
+The \fBscr_set\fR routine is a combination of \fBscr_restore\fR and
+\fBscr_init\fR. It tells the program that the information in \fIfilename\fR is
+what is currently on the screen, and also what the program wants on the screen.
+This can be thought of as a screen inheritance function.
+
+To read (write) a window from (to) a file, use the \fBgetwin\fR and
+\fBputwin\fR routines [see \fBcurs_util\fR(3X)].
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and \fBOK\fR
+upon success.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBscr_init\fR, \fBscr_set\fR, and \fBscr_restore\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4, describes these functions (adding the const
+qualifiers).
+
+The SVr4 docs merely say under \fBscr_init\fR that the dump data is also
+considered invalid "if the time-stamp of the tty is old" but don't define
+"old".
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X), \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_util\fR(3X), \fBsystem\fR(3S)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_scroll.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_scroll.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5429685fab2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_scroll.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_scroll.3x,v 1.6 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_scroll 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBscroll\fR, \fBsrcl\fR, \fBwscrl\fR - scroll a \fBcurses\fR window
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint scroll(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint scrl(int n);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wscrl(WINDOW *win, int n);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBscroll\fR routine scrolls the window up one line. This involves moving
+the lines in the window data structure. As an optimization, if the scrolling
+region of the window is the entire screen, the physical screen may be scrolled
+at the same time.
+
+For positive \fIn\fR, the \fBscrl\fR and \fBwscrl\fR routines scroll the
+window up \fIn\fR lines (line \fIi\fR+\fIn\fR becomes \fIi\fR); otherwise
+scroll the window down \fIn\fR lines. This involves moving the lines in the
+window character image structure. The current cursor position is not changed.
+
+For these functions to work, scrolling must be enabled via \fBscrollok\fR.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+These routines return \fBERR\fR upon failure, and \fBOK\fR (SVr4 only specifies
+"an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful completion.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBscrl\fR and \fBscroll\fR may be macros.
+
+The SVr4 documentation says that the optimization of physically scrolling
+immediately if the scroll region is the entire screen "is" performed, not
+"may be" performed. This implementation deliberately does not guarantee
+that this will occur, in order to leave open the possibility of smarter
+optimization of multiple scroll actions on the next update.
+
+Neither the SVr4 documentation specifies whether the current attribute or
+current color-pair of blanks generated by the scroll function is zeroed.
+Under this implementation it is.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_slk.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_slk.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..86209d7964c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_slk.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_slk.3x,v 1.9 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_slk 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBslk_init\fR, \fBslk_set\fR, \fBslk_refresh\fR,
+\fBslk_noutrefresh\fR, \fBslk_label\fR, \fBslk_clear\fR, \fBslk_restore\fR,
+\fBslk_touch\fR, \fBslk_attron\fR, \fBslk_attrset\fR, \fBslk_attroff\fR, \fBslk_color\fR -
+\fBcurses\fR soft label routines
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint slk_init(int fmt);\fR
+.br
+\fBint slk_set(int labnum, const char *label, int fmt);\fR
+.br
+\fBint slk_refresh(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint slk_noutrefresh(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBchar *slk_label(int labnum);\fR
+.br
+\fBint slk_clear(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint slk_restore(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint slk_touch(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint slk_attron(const chtype attrs);\fR
+.br
+\fBint slk_attrset(const chtype attrs);\fR
+.br
+\fBattr_t slk_attr(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint slk_attroff(const chtype attrs);\fR
+.br
+\fBint slk_color(short color_pair_number);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The slk* functions manipulate the set of soft function-key labels that exist on
+many terminals. For those terminals that do not have soft labels,
+\fBcurses\fR takes over the bottom line of \fBstdscr\fR, reducing the size of
+\fBstdscr\fR and the variable \fBLINES\fR. \fBcurses\fR standardizes on eight
+labels of up to eight characters each. In addition to this, the ncurses
+implementation supports a mode where it simulates 12 labels of up to five
+characters each. This is most common for todays PC like enduser devices.
+Please note that ncurses simulates this mode by taking over up to two lines at
+the bottom of the screen, it doesn't try to use any hardware support for this
+mode.
+
+The \fBslk_init\fR routine must be called before \fBinitscr\fR or \fBnewterm\fR
+is called. If \fBinitscr\fR eventually uses a line from \fBstdscr\fR to
+emulate the soft labels, then \fIfmt\fR determines how the labels are arranged
+on the screen. Setting \fIfmt\fR to \fB0\fR indicates a 3-2-3 arrangement of
+the labels, \fB1\fR indicates a 4-4 arrangement and \fB2\fR indicates the
+PC like 4-4-4 mode. If \fBfmt\fR is set to \fB3\fR, it is again the PC like
+4-4-4 mode, but in addition an index line is generated, helping the user to
+identify the key numbers easily.
+
+The \fBslk_set\fR routine requires \fIlabnum\fR to be a label number,
+from \fB1\fR to \fB8\fR (resp. \fB12\fR); \fIlabel\fR must be the string
+to be put on the label, up to eight (resp. five) characters in length.
+A null string or a null pointer sets up a blank label. \fIfmt\fR is either
+\fB0\fR, \fB1\fR, or \fB2\fR, indicating whether the label is to be
+left-justified, centered, or right-justified, respectively, within the
+label.
+
+The \fBslk_refresh\fR and \fBslk_noutrefresh\fR routines correspond to
+the \fBwrefresh\fR and \fBwnoutrefresh\fR routines.
+
+The \fBslk_label\fR routine returns the current label for label number
+\fIlabnum\fR, with leading and trailing blanks stripped.
+
+The \fBslk_clear\fR routine clears the soft labels from the screen.
+
+The \fBslk_restore\fR routine, restores the soft labels to the screen
+after a \fBslk_clear\fR has been performed.
+
+The \fBslk_touch\fR routine forces all the soft labels to be output
+the next time a \fBslk_noutrefresh\fR is performed.
+
+The \fBslk_attron\fR, \fBslk_attrset\fR, \fBslk_attroff\fR and \fBslk_attr\fR
+routines correspond to \fBattron\fR, \fBattrset\fR, \fBattroff\fR and \fBattr_get\fR.
+They have an effect only if soft labels are simulated on the bottom line of
+the screen. The default highlight for soft keys is A_STANDOUT (as in
+System V curses, which does not document this fact).
+
+The \fBslk_color\fR routine corresponds to \fBcolor_set\fR. It has an effect only
+if soft labels are simulated on the bottom line of the screen.
+
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+These routines return \fBERR\fR upon failure and OK (SVr4 specifies only "an
+integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful completion. \fBslk_attr\fR
+returns the attribute used for the soft keys.
+
+\fBslk_label\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error.
+.SH NOTES
+Most applications would use \fBslk_noutrefresh\fR because a
+\fBwrefresh\fR is likely to follow soon.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4, describes these functions. It changes the
+argument type of the attribute-manipulation functions \fBslk_attron\fR,
+\fBslk_attroff\fR, \fBslk_attrset\fR to be \fBattr_t\fR, and adds \fBconst\fR
+qualifiers. The format codes \fB2\fR and \fB3\fR for \fBslk_init()\fR and the
+function \fBslk_attr\fR are specific to ncurses.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_attr\fR(3X), \fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X), \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_termattrs.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_termattrs.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2ece5a3587df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_termattrs.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_termattrs.3x,v 1.4 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_termattrs 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBbaudrate\fR, \fBerasechar\fR, \fBhas_ic\fR,
+\fBhas_il\fR, \fBkillchar\fR, \fBlongname\fR, \fBtermattrs\fR,
+\fBtermname\fR - \fBcurses\fR environment query routines
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint baudrate(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBchar erasechar(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint has_ic(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBint has_il(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBchar killchar(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBchar *longname(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBattr_t termattrs(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBchar *termname(void);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBbaudrate\fR routine returns the output speed of the terminal. The
+number returned is in bits per second, for example \fB9600\fR, and is an
+integer.
+
+The \fBerasechar\fR routine returns the user's current erase character.
+
+The \fBhas_ic\fR routine is true if the terminal has insert- and delete-
+character capabilities.
+
+The \fBhas_il\fR routine is true if the terminal has insert- and delete-line
+capabilities, or can simulate them using scrolling regions. This might
+be used to determine if it would be appropriate to turn on physical
+scrolling using \fBscrollok\fR.
+
+The \fBkillchar\fR routine returns the user's current line kill character.
+
+The \fBlongname\fR routine returns a pointer to a static area
+containing a verbose description of the current terminal. The maximum
+length of a verbose description is 128 characters. It is defined only
+after the call to \fBinitscr\fR or \fBnewterm\fR. The area is
+overwritten by each call to \fBnewterm\fR and is not restored by
+\fBset_term\fR, so the value should be saved between calls to
+\fBnewterm\fR if \fBlongname\fR is going to be used with multiple
+terminals.
+
+If a given terminal doesn't support a video attribute that an
+application program is trying to use, \fBcurses\fR may substitute a
+different video attribute for it. The \fBtermattrs\fR function
+returns a logical \fBOR\fR of all video attributes supported by the
+terminal. This information is useful when a \fBcurses\fR program
+needs complete control over the appearance of the screen.
+
+The \fBtermname\fR routine returns the value of the environmental
+variable \fBTERM\fR (truncated to 14 characters).
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+\fBlongname\fR and \fBtermname\fR return \fBNULL\fR on error.
+
+Routines that return an integer return \fBERR\fR upon failure and \fBOK\fR
+(SVr4 only specifies "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBtermattrs\fR may be a macro.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions. It changes the
+return type of \fBtermattrs\fR to the new type \fBattr_t\fR.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X), \fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_termcap.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_termcap.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b290beae1350
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_termcap.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_termcap.3x,v 1.11 1998/07/18 02:45:56 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_termcap 3X ""
+.ds n 5
+.SH NAME
+\fBtgetent\fR, \fBtgetflag\fR, \fBtgetnum\fR,
+\fBtgetstr\fR, \fBtgoto\fR, \fBtputs\fR - direct \fBcurses\fR
+interface to the terminfo capability database
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+.br
+\fB#include <term.h>\fR
+.br
+\fBint tgetent(const char *bp, char *name);\fR
+.br
+\fBint tgetflag(const char *id);\fR
+.br
+\fBint tgetnum(const char *id);\fR
+.br
+\fBchar *tgetstr(const char *id, char **area);\fR
+.br
+\fBchar *tgoto(const char *cap, int col, int row);\fR
+.br
+\fBint tputs(const char *str, int affcnt, int (*putc)(int));\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These routines are included as a conversion aid for programs that use
+the \fItermcap\fR library. Their parameters are the same and the
+routines are emulated using the \fIterminfo\fR database. Thus, they
+can only be used to query the capabilities of entries for which a
+terminfo entry has been compiled.
+
+The \fBtgetent\fR routine loads the entry for \fIname\fR.
+It returns 1 on success, 0 if there is no such entry, and -1 if the
+terminfo database could not be found.
+The emulation ignores the buffer pointer \fIbp\fR.
+
+The \fBtgetflag\fR routine gets the boolean entry for \fIid\fR,
+or zero if it is not available.
+
+The \fBtgetnum\fR routine gets the numeric entry for \fIid\fR,
+or -1 if it is not available.
+
+The \fBtgetstr\fR routine returns the string entry for \fIid\fR,
+or zero if it is not available.
+Use \fBtputs\fR to output the returned string.
+
+The \fBtgoto\fR routine instantiates the parameters into the given capability.
+The output from this routine is to be passed to \fBtputs\fR.
+
+The \fBtputs\fR routine is described on the \fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X) manual
+page. It can retrieve capabilities by either termcap or terminfo name.
+
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Except where explicitly noted,
+routines that return an integer return \fBERR\fR upon failure and \fBOK\fR
+(SVr4 only specifies "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion.
+
+Routines that return pointers return \fBNULL\fR on error.
+.SH BUGS
+If you call \fBtgetstr\fR to fetch \fBca\fR or any other parameterized string,
+be aware that it will be returned in terminfo notation, not the older and
+not-quite-compatible termcap notation. This won't cause problems if all
+you do with it is call \fBtgoto\fR or \fBtparm\fR, which both expand
+terminfo-style.
+
+Because terminfo conventions for representing padding in string capabilities
+differ from termcap's, \fBtputs("50");\fR will put out a literal "50" rather
+than busy-waiting for 50 milliseconds. Cope with it.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions. However, they
+are marked TO BE WITHDRAWN and may be removed in future versions.
+
+Neither the XSI Curses standard nor the SVr4 man pages documented the return
+values of \fBtgetent\fR correctly, though all three were in fact returned ever
+since SVr1.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBterminfo\fR(\*n), \fBputc\fR(3S).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_terminfo.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_terminfo.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5120fc38726d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_terminfo.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_terminfo.3x,v 1.11 1999/07/31 21:41:29 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_terminfo 3X ""
+.ds n 5
+.SH NAME
+\fBsetupterm\fR, \fBsetterm\fR,
+\fBset_curterm\fR, \fBdel_curterm\fR, \fBrestartterm\fR, \fBtparm\fR,
+\fBtputs\fR, \fBputp\fR, \fBvidputs\fR, \fBvidattr\fR, \fBmvcur\fR,
+\fBtigetflag\fR, \fBtigetnum\fR, \fBtigetstr\fR - \fBcurses\fR
+interfaces to terminfo database
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+.br
+\fB#include <term.h>\fR
+
+\fBint setupterm(const char *term, int fildes, int *errret);\fR
+.br
+\fBint setterm(const char *term);\fR
+.br
+\fBTERMINAL *set_curterm(TERMINAL *nterm);\fR
+.br
+\fBint del_curterm(TERMINAL *oterm);\fR
+.br
+\fBint restartterm(const char *term, int fildes, int *errret);\fR
+.br
+\fBchar *tparm(const char *str, ...);\fR
+.br
+\fBint tputs(const char *str, int affcnt, int (*putc)(int));\fR
+.br
+\fBint putp(const char *str);\fR
+.br
+\fBint vidputs(chtype attrs, int (*putc)(char));\fR
+.br
+\fBint vidattr(chtype attrs);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvcur(int oldrow, int oldcol, int newrow, int newcol);\fR
+.br
+\fBint tigetflag(const char *capname);\fR
+.br
+\fBint tigetnum(const char *capname);\fR
+.br
+\fBchar *tigetstr(const char *capname);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These low-level routines must be called by programs that have to deal
+directly with the \fBterminfo\fR database to handle certain terminal
+capabilities, such as programming function keys. For all other
+functionality, \fBcurses\fR routines are more suitable and their use is
+recommended.
+
+Initially, \fBsetupterm\fR should be called. Note that
+\fBsetupterm\fR is automatically called by \fBinitscr\fR and
+\fBnewterm\fR. This defines the set of terminal-dependent variables
+[listed in \fBterminfo\fR(\*n)]. The \fBterminfo\fR variables
+\fBlines\fR and \fBcolumns\fR are initialized by \fBsetupterm\fR as
+follows: If \fBuse_env(FALSE)\fR has been called, values for
+\fBlines\fR and \fBcolumns\fR specified in \fBterminfo\fR are used.
+Otherwise, if the environment variables \fBLINES\fR and \fBCOLUMNS\fR
+exist, their values are used. If these environment variables do not
+exist and the program is running in a window, the current window size
+is used. Otherwise, if the environment variables do not exist, the
+values for \fBlines\fR and \fBcolumns\fR specified in the
+\fBterminfo\fR database are used.
+
+The header files \fBcurses.h\fR and \fBterm.h\fR should be included (in this
+order) to get the definitions for these strings, numbers, and flags.
+Parameterized strings should be passed through \fBtparm\fR to instantiate them.
+All \fBterminfo\fR strings [including the output of \fBtparm\fR] should be printed
+with \fBtputs\fR or \fBputp\fR. Call the \fBreset_shell_mode\fR to restore the
+tty modes before exiting [see \fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X)]. Programs which use
+cursor addressing should output \fBenter_ca_mode\fR upon startup and should
+output \fBexit_ca_mode\fR before exiting. Programs desiring shell escapes
+should call
+
+\fBreset_shell_mode\fR and output \fBexit_ca_mode\fR before the shell
+is called and should output \fBenter_ca_mode\fR and call
+\fBreset_prog_mode\fR after returning from the shell.
+
+The \fBsetupterm\fR routine reads in the \fBterminfo\fR database,
+initializing the \fBterminfo\fR structures, but does not set up the
+output virtualization structures used by \fBcurses\fR. The terminal
+type is the character string \fIterm\fR; if \fIterm\fR is null, the
+environment variable \fBTERM\fR is used.
+All output is to file descriptor \fBfildes\fR which is initialized for output.
+If \fIerrret\fR is not null,
+then \fBsetupterm\fR returns \fBOK\fR or
+\fBERR\fR and stores a status value in the integer pointed to by
+\fIerrret\fR.
+A return value of \fBOK\fR combined with status of \fB1\fR in \fIerrret\fR
+is normal.
+If \fBERR\fR is returned, examine \fIerrret\fR:
+.RS
+.TP 5
+.B 1
+means that the terminal is hardcopy, cannot be used for curses applications.
+.TP 5
+.B 0
+means that the terminal could not be found,
+or that it is a generic type,
+having too little information for curses applications to run.
+.TP 5
+.B -1
+means that the \fBterminfo\fR database could not be found.
+.RE
+.PP
+If \fIerrret\fR is
+null, \fBsetupterm\fR prints an error message upon finding an error
+and exits. Thus, the simplest call is:
+
+ \fBsetupterm((char *)0, 1, (int *)0);\fR,
+
+which uses all the defaults and sends the output to \fBstdout\fR.
+
+The \fBsetterm\fR routine is being replaced by \fBsetupterm\fR. The call:
+
+ \fBsetupterm(\fR\fIterm\fR\fB, 1, (int *)0)\fR
+
+provides the same functionality as \fBsetterm(\fR\fIterm\fR\fB)\fR.
+The \fBsetterm\fR routine is included here for BSD compatibility, and
+is not recommended for new programs.
+
+The \fBset_curterm\fR routine sets the variable \fBcur_term\fR to
+\fInterm\fR, and makes all of the \fBterminfo\fR boolean, numeric, and
+string variables use the values from \fInterm\fR. It returns the old value
+of \fBcur_term\fR.
+
+The \fBdel_curterm\fR routine frees the space pointed to by
+\fIoterm\fR and makes it available for further use. If \fIoterm\fR is
+the same as \fBcur_term\fR, references to any of the \fBterminfo\fR
+boolean, numeric, and string variables thereafter may refer to invalid
+memory locations until another \fBsetupterm\fR has been called.
+
+The \fBrestartterm\fR routine is similar to \fBsetupterm\fR and \fBinitscr\fR,
+except that it is called after restoring memory to a previous state (for
+example, when reloading a game saved as a core image dump). It assumes that
+the windows and the input and output options are the same as when memory was
+saved, but the terminal type and baud rate may be different. Accordingly,
+it saves various tty state bits, does a setupterm, and then restores the bits.
+
+The \fBtparm\fR routine instantiates the string \fIstr\fR with
+parameters \fIpi\fR. A pointer is returned to the result of \fIstr\fR
+with the parameters applied.
+
+The \fBtputs\fR routine applies padding information to the string
+\fIstr\fR and outputs it. The \fIstr\fR must be a terminfo string
+variable or the return value from \fBtparm\fR, \fBtgetstr\fR, or
+\fBtgoto\fR. \fIaffcnt\fR is the number of lines affected, or 1 if
+not applicable. \fIputc\fR is a \fBputchar\fR-like routine to which
+the characters are passed, one at a time.
+
+The \fBputp\fR routine calls \fBtputs(\fR\fIstr\fR\fB, 1, putchar)\fR.
+Note that the output of \fBputp\fR always goes to \fBstdout\fR, not to
+the \fIfildes\fR specified in \fBsetupterm\fR.
+
+The \fBvidputs\fR routine displays the string on the terminal in the
+video attribute mode \fIattrs\fR, which is any combination of the
+attributes listed in \fBcurses\fR(3X). The characters are passed to
+the \fBputchar\fR-like routine \fIputc\fR.
+
+The \fBvidattr\fR routine is like the \fBvidputs\fR routine, except
+that it outputs through \fBputchar\fR.
+
+The \fBmvcur\fR routine provides low-level cursor motion. It takes
+effect immediately (rather than at the next refresh).
+
+The \fBtigetflag\fR, \fBtigetnum\fR and \fBtigetstr\fR routines return
+the value of the capability corresponding to the \fBterminfo\fR
+\fIcapname\fR passed to them, such as \fBxenl\fR.
+
+The \fBtigetflag\fR routine returns the value \fB-1\fR if
+\fIcapname\fR is not a boolean capability,
+or \fB0\fR if it is canceled or absent from the terminal description.
+
+The \fBtigetnum\fR routine returns the value \fB-2\fR if
+\fIcapname\fR is not a numeric capability,
+or \fB-1\fR if it is canceled or absent from the terminal description.
+
+The \fBtigetstr\fR routine returns the value \fB(char *)-1\fR
+if \fIcapname\fR is not a string capability,
+or \fB0\fR if it is canceled or absent from the terminal description.
+
+The \fIcapname\fR for each capability is given in the table column entitled
+\fIcapname\fR code in the capabilities section of \fBterminfo\fR(\*n).
+
+\fBchar *boolnames\fR, \fB*boolcodes\fR, \fB*boolfnames\fR
+
+\fBchar *numnames\fR, \fB*numcodes\fR, \fB*numfnames\fR
+
+\fBchar *strnames\fR, \fB*strcodes\fR, \fB*strfnames\fR
+
+These null-terminated arrays contain the \fIcapnames\fR, the
+\fBtermcap\fR codes, and the full C names, for each of the
+\fBterminfo\fR variables.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return an integer return \fBERR\fR upon failure and \fBOK\fR
+(SVr4 only specifies "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon successful
+completion, unless otherwise noted in the preceding routine descriptions.
+
+Routines that return pointers always return \fBNULL\fR on error.
+.SH NOTES
+The \fBsetupterm\fR routine should be used in place of \fBsetterm\fR.
+It may be useful when you want to test for terminal capabilities without
+committing to the allocation of storage involved in \fBinitscr\fR.
+
+Note that \fBvidattr\fR and \fBvidputs\fR may be macros.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The function \fBsetterm\fR is not described in the XSI Curses standard and must
+be considered non-portable. All other functions are as described in the XSI
+curses standard.
+
+In System V Release 4, \fBset_curterm\fR has an \fBint\fR return type and
+returns \fBOK\fR or \fBERR\fR. We have chosen to implement the XSI Curses
+semantics.
+
+In System V Release 4, the third argument of \fBtputs\fR has the type
+\fBint (*putc)(char)\fR.
+
+The XSI Curses standard prototypes \fBtparm\fR with a fixed number of parameters,
+rather than a variable argument list.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X), \fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X), \fBcurs_termcap\fR(3X),
+\fBputc\fR(3S), \fBterminfo\fR(\*n)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_touch.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_touch.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e1d130d30368
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_touch.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_touch.3x,v 1.6 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_touch 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBtouchwin\fR, \fBtouchline\fR, \fBuntouchwin\fR,
+\fBwtouchln\fR, \fBis_linetouched\fR, \fBis_wintouched\fR -
+\fBcurses\fR refresh control routines
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+.br
+\fBint touchwin(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint touchline(WINDOW *win, int start, int count);\fR
+.br
+\fBint untouchwin(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint wtouchln(WINDOW *win, int y, int n, int changed);\fR
+.br
+\fBint is_linetouched(WINDOW *win, int line);\fR
+.br
+\fBint is_wintouched(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBtouchwin\fR and \fBtouchline\fR routines throw away all
+optimization information about which parts of the window have been
+touched, by pretending that the entire window has been drawn on. This
+is sometimes necessary when using overlapping windows, since a change
+to one window affects the other window, but the records of which lines
+have been changed in the other window do not reflect the change. The
+routine \fBtouchline\fR only pretends that \fIcount\fR lines have been
+changed, beginning with line \fIstart\fR.
+
+The \fBuntouchwin\fR routine marks all lines in the window as unchanged since
+the last call to \fBwrefresh\fR.
+
+The \fBwtouchln\fR routine makes \fIn\fR lines in the window, starting
+at line \fIy\fR, look as if they have (\fIchanged\fR\fB=1\fR) or have
+not (\fIchanged\fR\fB=0\fR) been changed since the last call to
+\fBwrefresh\fR.
+
+The \fBis_linetouched\fR and \fBis_wintouched\fR routines return
+\fBTRUE\fR if the specified line/window was modified since the last
+call to \fBwrefresh\fR; otherwise they return \fBFALSE\fR. In
+addition, \fBis_linetouched\fR returns \fBERR\fR if \fIline\fR is not
+valid for the given window.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+All routines return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and an integer value
+other than \fBERR\fR upon successful completion, unless otherwise noted in the
+preceding routine descriptions.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions.
+
+Some historic curses implementations had, as an undocumented feature, the
+ability to do the equivalent of \fBclearok(..., 1)\fR by saying
+\fBtouchwin(stdscr)\fR or \fBclear(stdscr)\fR. This will not work under
+ncurses.
+.SH NOTES
+Note that all routines except \fBwtouchln\fR may be macros.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_util.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_util.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8f85cf4ef66c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_util.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_util.3x,v 1.6 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH curs_util 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBunctrl\fR, \fBkeyname\fR, \fBfilter\fR,
+\fBuse_env\fR, \fBputwin\fR, \fBgetwin\fR, \fBdelay_output\fR,
+\fBflushinp\fR - miscellaneous \fBcurses\fR utility routines
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBchar *unctrl(chtype c);\fR
+.br
+\fBchar *keyname(int c);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid filter(void);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid use_env(char bool);\fR
+.br
+\fBint putwin(WINDOW *win, FILE *filep);\fR
+.br
+\fBWINDOW *getwin(FILE *filep);\fR
+.br
+\fBint delay_output(int ms);\fR
+.br
+\fBint flushinp(void);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBunctrl\fR macro expands to a character string which is a printable
+representation of the character \fIc\fR. Control characters are displayed in
+the \fB^\fR\fIX\fR notation. Printing characters are displayed as is.
+
+The \fBkeyname\fR routine returns a character string corresponding to
+the key \fIc\fR.
+
+The \fBfilter\fR routine, if used, must be called before \fBinitscr\fR or
+\fBnewterm\fR are called. The effect is that, during those calls, \fBLINES\fR
+is set to 1; the capabilities \fBclear\fR, \fBcup\fR, \fBcud\fR, \fBcud1\fR,
+\fBcuu1\fR, \fBcuu\fR, \fBvpa\fR are disabled; and the \fBhome\fR string is
+set to the value of \fBcr\fR.
+
+The \fBuse_env\fR routine, if used, is called before \fBinitscr\fR or
+\fBnewterm\fR are called. When called with \fBFALSE\fR as an
+argument, the values of \fBlines\fR and \fBcolumns\fR specified in the
+\fIterminfo\fR database will be used, even if environment variables
+\fBLINES\fR and \fBCOLUMNS\fR (used by default) are set, or if
+\fBcurses\fR is running in a window (in which case default behavior
+would be to use the window size if \fBLINES\fR and \fBCOLUMNS\fR are
+not set).
+
+The \fBputwin\fR routine writes all data associated with window \fIwin\fR into
+the file to which \fIfilep\fR points. This information can be later retrieved
+using the \fBgetwin\fR function.
+
+The \fBgetwin\fR routine reads window related data stored in the file by
+\fBputwin\fR. The routine then creates and initializes a new window using that
+data. It returns a pointer to the new window.
+
+The \fBdelay_output\fR routine inserts an \fIms\fR millisecond pause
+in output. This routine should not be used extensively because
+padding characters are used rather than a CPU pause.
+
+The \fBflushinp\fR routine throws away any typeahead that has been typed by the
+user and has not yet been read by the program.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Except for \fBflushinp\fR, routines that return an integer return \fBERR\fR
+upon failure and \fBOK\fR (SVr4 specifies only "an integer value other than
+\fBERR\fR") upon successful completion.
+
+\fBflushinp\fR always returns \fBOK\fR.
+
+Routines that return pointers return \fBNULL\fR on error.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions.
+
+The SVr4 documentation describes the action of \fBfilter\fR only in the vaguest
+terms. The description here is adapted from the XSI Curses standard (which
+erroneously fails to describe the disabling of \fBcuu\fR).
+.SH NOTES
+Note that \fBunctrl\fR is a macro, which is defined in <\fBunctrl.h\fR>.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X), \fBcurs_scr_dump\fR(3X).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_window.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_window.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..623514e908ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/curs_window.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: curs_window.3x,v 1.8 1999/03/20 22:38:46 tom Exp $
+.TH curs_window 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBnewwin\fR, \fBdelwin\fR, \fBmvwin\fR,
+\fBsubwin\fR, \fBderwin\fR, \fBmvderwin\fR, \fBdupwin\fR,
+\fBwsyncup\fR, \fBsyncok\fR, \fBwcursyncup\fR, \fBwsyncdown\fR -
+create \fBcurses\fR windows
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBWINDOW *newwin(int nlines, int ncols, int begin_y,\fR
+ \fBint begin_x);\fR
+.br
+\fBint delwin(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvwin(WINDOW *win, int y, int x);\fR
+.br
+\fBWINDOW *subwin(WINDOW *orig, int nlines, int ncols,\fR
+ \fBint begin_y, int begin_x);\fR
+.br
+\fBWINDOW *derwin(WINDOW *orig, int nlines, int ncols,\fR
+ \fBint begin_y, int begin_x);\fR
+.br
+\fBint mvderwin(WINDOW *win, int par_y, int par_x);\fR
+.br
+\fBWINDOW *dupwin(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid wsyncup(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBint syncok(WINDOW *win, bool bf);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid wcursyncup(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid wsyncdown(WINDOW *win);\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Calling \fBnewwin\fR creates and returns a pointer to a new window with the
+given number of lines and columns. The upper left-hand corner of the window is
+at line \fIbegin\fR_\fIy\fR, column \fIbegin\fR_\fIx\fR. If either
+\fInlines\fR or \fIncols\fR is zero, they default to \fBLINES -\fR
+\fIbegin\fR_\fIy\fR and \fBCOLS -\fR \fIbegin\fR_\fIx\fR. A new full-screen
+window is created by calling \fBnewwin(0,0,0,0)\fR.
+
+Calling \fBdelwin\fR deletes the named window, freeing all memory
+associated with it (it does not actually erase the window's screen
+image). Subwindows must be deleted before the main window can be
+deleted.
+
+Calling \fBmvwin\fR moves the window so that the upper left-hand
+corner is at position (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR). If the move would cause the
+window to be off the screen, it is an error and the window is not
+moved. Moving subwindows is allowed, but should be avoided.
+
+Calling \fBsubwin\fR creates and returns a pointer to a new window
+with the given number of lines, \fInlines\fR, and columns,
+\fIncols\fR. The window is at position (\fIbegin\fR_\fIy\fR,
+\fIbegin\fR_\fIx\fR) on the screen. (This position is relative to the
+screen, and not to the window \fIorig\fR.) The window is made in the
+middle of the window \fIorig\fR, so that changes made to one window
+will affect both windows. The subwindow shares memory with the window
+\fIorig\fR. When using this routine, it is necessary to call
+\fBtouchwin\fR or \fBtouchline\fR on \fIorig\fR before calling
+\fBwrefresh\fR on the subwindow.
+
+Calling \fBderwin\fR is the same as calling \fBsubwin,\fR except that
+\fIbegin\fR_\fIy\fR and \fIbegin\fR_\fIx\fR are relative to the origin
+of the window \fIorig\fR rather than the screen. There is no
+difference between the subwindows and the derived windows.
+
+Calling \fBmvderwin\fR moves a derived window (or subwindow)
+inside its parent window. The screen-relative parameters of the
+window are not changed. This routine is used to display different
+parts of the parent window at the same physical position on the
+screen.
+
+Calling \fBdupwin\fR creates an exact duplicate of the window \fIwin\fR.
+
+Calling \fBwsyncup\fR touches all locations in ancestors of \fIwin\fR that are
+changed in \fIwin\fR. If \fBsyncok\fR is called with second argument
+\fBTRUE\fR then \fBwsyncup\fR is called automatically whenever there is a
+change in the window.
+
+The \fBwsyncdown\fR routine touches each location in \fIwin\fR that has been
+touched in any of its ancestor windows. This routine is called by
+\fBwrefresh\fR, so it should almost never be necessary to call it manually.
+
+The routine \fBwcursyncup\fR updates the current cursor position of all the
+ancestors of the window to reflect the current cursor position of the
+window.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return an integer return the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and
+\fBOK\fR (SVr4 only specifies "an integer value other than \fBERR\fR") upon
+successful completion.
+
+\fBdelwin\fR returns the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and \fBOK\fR
+upon successful completion.
+
+Routines that return pointers return \fBNULL\fR on error.
+.SH NOTES
+If many small changes are made to the window, the \fBwsyncup\fR option could
+degrade performance.
+
+Note that \fBsyncok\fR may be a macro.
+.SH BUGS
+The subwindow functions (\fIsubwin\fR, \fIderwin\fR, \fImvderwin\fR,
+\fBwsyncup\fR, \fBwsyncdown\fR, \fBwcursyncup\fR, \fBsyncok\fR) are flaky,
+incompletely implemented, and not well tested.
+
+The System V curses documentation is very unclear about what \fBwsyncup\fR
+and \fBwsyncdown\fR actually do. It seems to imply that they are only
+supposed to touch exactly those lines that are affected by ancestor changes.
+The language here, and the behavior of the \fBcurses\fR implementation,
+is patterned on the XPG4 curses standard. The weaker XPG4 spec may result
+in slower updates.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these functions.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X), \fBcurs_touch\fR(3X)
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/define_key.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/define_key.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..047d78f8b82a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/define_key.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" Author: Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@clark.net> 1997
+.\"
+.\" $Id: define_key.3x,v 1.6 1999/02/19 11:43:17 tom Exp $
+.TH define_key 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBdefine_key\fP \- define a keycode
+..
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fP
+
+\fBint define_key(char *definition, int keycode);\fP
+..
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This is an extension to the curses library.
+It permits an application to define keycodes with their corresponding control
+strings, so that the ncurses library will interpret them just as it would
+the predefined codes in the terminfo database.
+.PP
+If the given string is null, any existing definition for the keycode is
+removed.
+Similarly, if the given keycode is negative or zero, any existing string
+for the given definition is removed.
+..
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The keycode must be greater than zero, else ERR is returned.
+..
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines are specific to ncurses. They were not supported on
+Version 7, BSD or System V implementations. It is recommended that
+any code depending on them be conditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
+..
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBkeyok\fR(3X).
+..
+.SH AUTHOR
+Thomas Dickey.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/dft_fgbg.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/dft_fgbg.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2461256857b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/dft_fgbg.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" Author: Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@clark.net> 1997
+.\"
+.\" $Id: dft_fgbg.3x,v 1.6 1998/03/14 23:43:15 tom Exp $
+.TH use_default_colors 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBdft_fgbg\fR \- use terminal's default colors
+..
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fP
+
+\fBint use_default_colors(void);\fP
+..
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This is an extension to the curses library.
+It is used with terminals that support ISO 6429 color, or equivalent.
+These terminals allow the application to reset color to an unspecified
+default value (e.g., with SGR 39 or SGR 49).
+Because they are designed to support this, their design usually includes
+features to change the default foreground or background colors so that
+they do not match the assumption in XSI curses of white on black.
+.PP
+Applications that paint a colored background over the whole screen
+are not adversely impacted by this type of terminal design.
+However, there are applications that are designed to work with
+the default background.
+..
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function returns the integer \fBERR\fP upon failure and \fBOK\fP on success.
+It will fail if either the terminal does not support
+the \fIorig_pair\fP or \fIorig_colors\fP capability.
+If the \fIinitialize_pair\fP capability is found, this causes an
+error as well.
+..
+.SH NOTES
+Associated with this extension, the \fBinit_pair\fR(3X) function accepts
+negative arguments to specify default foreground or background
+colors.
+..
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines are specific to ncurses. They were not supported on
+Version 7, BSD or System V implementations. It is recommended that
+any code depending on them be conditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
+..
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurs_color\fR(3X),
+\fBded\fP(1).
+..
+.SH AUTHOR
+Thomas Dickey (from an analysis of the requirements for color xterm
+for XFree86 3.1.2C, February 1996).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..51c1e8c15d5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,200 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form.3x,v 1.13 1999/07/10 21:53:03 tom Exp $
+.TH form 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform\fR - curses extension for programming forms
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBform\fR library provides terminal-independent facilities for composing
+form screens on character-cell terminals. The library includes: field
+routines, which create and modify form fields; and form routines, which group
+fields into forms, display forms on the screen, and handle interaction with the
+user.
+
+The \fBform\fR library uses the \fBcurses\fR libraries, and a curses
+initialization routine such as \fBinitscr\fR must be called before using any of
+these functions. To use the \fBform\fR library, link with the options
+\fB-lform -lcurses\fR.
+
+.SS Current Default Values for Field Attributes
+
+The \fBform\fR library maintains a default value for field attributes. You
+can get or set this default by calling the appropriate \fBset_\fR
+or retrieval
+routine with a \fBNULL\fR field pointer. Changing this default with a
+\fBset_\fR function affects future field creations, but does not change the
+rendering of fields already created.
+
+.SS Routine Name Index
+
+The following table lists each \fBform\fR routine and the name of
+the manual page on which it is described.
+
+.TS
+l l
+l l .
+\fBcurses\fR Routine Name Manual Page Name
+=
+current_field \fBform_page\fR(3X)
+data_ahead \fBform_data\fR(3X)
+data_behind \fBform_data\fR(3X)
+dup_field \fBform_field_new\fR(3X)
+dynamic_fieldinfo \fBform_field_info\fR(3X)
+field_arg \fBform_field_validation\fR(3X)
+field_back \fBform_field_attributes\fR(3X)
+field_buffer \fBform_field_buffer\fR(3X)
+field_count \fBform_field\fR(3X)
+field_fore \fBform_field_attributes\fR(3X)
+field_index \fBform_page\fR(3X)
+field_info \fBform_field_info\fR(3X)
+field_init \fBform_hook\fR(3X)
+field_just \fBform_field_just\fR(3X)
+field_opts \fBform_field_opts\fR(3X)
+field_opts_off \fBform_field_opts\fR(3X)
+field_opts_on \fBform_field_opts\fR(3X)
+field_pad \fBform_field_attributes\fR(3X)
+field_status \fBform_field_buffer\fR(3X)
+field_term \fBform_hook\fR(3X)
+field_type \fBform_field_validation\fR(3X)
+field_userptr \fBform_field_userptr\fR(3X)
+form_driver \fBform_driver\fR(3X)
+form_fields \fBform_field\fR(3X)
+form_init \fBform_hook\fR(3X)
+form_opts \fBform_opts\fR(3X)
+form_opts_off \fBform_opts\fR(3X)
+form_opts_on \fBform_opts\fR(3X)
+form_page \fBform_page\fR(3X)
+form_request_by_name \fBform_requestname\fR(3X)
+form_request_name \fBform_requestname\fR(3X)
+form_sub \fBform_win\fR(3X)
+form_term \fBform_hook\fR(3X)
+form_userptr \fBform_userptr\fR(3X)
+form_win \fBform_win\fR(3X)
+free_field \fBform_field_new\fR(3X)
+free_form \fBform_new\fR(3X)
+link_field \fBform_field_new\fR(3X)
+link_fieldtype \fBform_fieldtype\fR(3X)
+move_field \fBform_field\fR(3X)
+new_field \fBform_field_new\fR(3X)
+new_form \fBform_new\fR(3X)
+new_page \fBform_new_page\fR(3X)
+pos_form_cursor \fBform_cursor\fR(3X)
+post_form \fBform_post\fR(3X)
+scale_form \fBform_win\fR(3X)
+set_current_field \fBform_page\fR(3X)
+set_field_back \fBform_field_attributes\fR(3X)
+set_field_buffer \fBform_field_buffer\fR(3X)
+set_field_fore \fBform_field_attributes\fR(3X)
+set_field_init \fBform_hook\fR(3X)
+set_field_just \fBform_field_just\fR(3X)
+set_field_opts \fBform_field_opts\fR(3X)
+set_field_pad \fBform_field_attributes\fR(3X)
+set_field_status \fBform_field_buffer\fR(3X)
+set_field_term \fBform_hook\fR(3X)
+set_field_type \fBform_field_validation\fR(3X)
+set_field_userptr \fBform_field_userptr\fR(3X)
+set_fieldtype_arg \fBform_fieldtype\fR(3X)
+set_fieldtype_choice \fBform_fieldtype\fR(3X)
+set_form_fields \fBform_field\fR(3X)
+set_form_init \fBform_hook\fR(3X)
+set_form_opts \fBform_field_opts\fR(3X)
+set_form_page \fBform_page\fR(3X)
+set_form_sub \fBform_win\fR(3X)
+set_form_term \fBform_hook\fR(3X)
+set_form_userptr \fBform_userptr\fR(3X)
+set_form_win \fBform_win\fR(3X)
+set_max_field \fBform_field_buffer\fR(3X)
+set_new_page \fBform_new_page\fR(3X)
+unpost_form \fBform_post\fR(3X)
+.TE
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return pointers return \fBNULL\fR on error. Routines that return
+an integer return one of the following error codes:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_CONNECTED\fR
+The field is already connected to a form.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_POSTED\fR
+The form is already posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_STATE\fR
+Routine was called from an initialization or termination function.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NO_ROOM\fR
+Form is too large for its window.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_POSTED\fR
+The form has not been posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_UNKNOWN_COMMAND\fR
+The form driver code saw an unknown request code.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_INVALID_FIELD\fR
+Contents of a field are not valid.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_CONNECTED\fR
+No fields are connected to the form.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_REQUEST_DENIED\fR
+The form driver could not process the request.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X) and 3X pages whose names begin "form_" for detailed
+descriptions of the entry points.
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header files
+\fB<curses.h>\fR and \fB<eti.h>\fR.
+
+In your library list, libform.a should be before libncurses.a; that is,
+you want to say `-lform -lncurses', not the other way around (which would
+give you a link error using GNU \fBld\fR(1) and many other linkers).
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for ncurses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_cursor.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_cursor.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ab37c99e7fae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_cursor.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_cursor.3x,v 1.4 1998/11/29 01:05:43 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_cursor 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_cursor\fR - position a form window cursor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int pos_form_cursor(FORM *form);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBpos_form_cursor\fR restores the cursor to the position required
+for the forms driver to continue processing requests. This is useful after
+\fBcurses\fR routines have been called to do screen-painting in response to a
+form operation.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+This routine returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_POSTED\fR
+The form has not been posted.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_data.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_data.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3767e954590c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_data.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_data.3x,v 1.7 1998/11/29 01:13:22 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_data 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_data\fR - test for off-screen data in given forms
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+bool data_ahead(const FORM *form);
+.br
+bool data_behind(const FORM *form);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBdata_ahead\fR tests whether there is off-screen data
+ahead in the given form. It returns TRUE (1) or FALSE (0).
+
+The function \fBdata_behind\fR tests whether there is off-screen data
+behind in the given form. It returns TRUE (1) or FALSE (0).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_driver.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_driver.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..408aecd9ea42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_driver.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,272 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.'" $Id: form_driver.3x,v 1.7 1999/07/10 23:13:18 tom Exp $
+.TH form_driver 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_driver\fR - command-processing loop of the form system
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int form_driver(FORM *form, int c);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Once a form has been posted (displayed), you should funnel input events to it
+through \fBform_driver\fR. This routine has two major input cases; either
+the input is a form navigation request or it's a printable ASCII character.
+The form driver requests are as follows:
+.TP 5
+REQ_NEXT_PAGE
+Move to the next page.
+.TP 5
+REQ_PREV_PAGE
+Move to the previous page.
+.TP 5
+REQ_FIRST_PAGE
+Move to the first page.
+.TP 5
+REQ_LAST_PAGE
+Move to the last field.
+
+.TP 5
+REQ_NEXT_FIELD
+Move to the next field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_PREV_FIELD
+Move to the previous field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_FIRST_FIELD
+Move to the first field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_LAST_FIELD
+Move to the last field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SNEXT_FIELD
+Move to the sorted next field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SPREV_FIELD
+Move to the sorted previous field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SFIRST_FIELD
+Move to the sorted first field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SLAST_FIELD
+Move to the sorted last field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_LEFT_FIELD
+Move left to a field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_RIGHT_FIELD
+Move right to a field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_UP_FIELD
+Move up to a field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_DOWN_FIELD
+Move down to a field.
+
+.TP 5
+REQ_NEXT_CHAR
+Move to the next char.
+.TP 5
+REQ_PREV_CHAR
+Move to the previous char.
+.TP 5
+REQ_NEXT_LINE
+Move to the next line.
+.TP 5
+REQ_PREV_LINE
+Move to the previous line.
+.TP 5
+REQ_NEXT_WORD
+Move to the next word.
+.TP 5
+REQ_PREV_WORD
+Move to the previous word.
+.TP 5
+REQ_BEG_FIELD
+Move to the beginning of the field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_END_FIELD
+Move to the end of the field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_BEG_LINE
+Move to the beginning of the line.
+.TP 5
+REQ_END_LINE
+Move to the end of the line.
+.TP 5
+REQ_LEFT_CHAR
+Move left in the field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_RIGHT_CHAR
+Move right in the field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_UP_CHAR
+Move up in the field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_DOWN_CHAR
+Move down in the field.
+
+.TP 5
+REQ_NEW_LINE
+Insert or overlay a new line.
+.TP 5
+REQ_INS_CHAR
+Insert a blank at the cursor.
+.TP 5
+REQ_INS_LINE
+Insert a blank line at the cursor.
+.TP 5
+REQ_DEL_CHAR
+Delete character at the cursor.
+.TP 5
+REQ_DEL_PREV
+Delete character before the cursor.
+.TP 5
+REQ_DEL_LINE
+Delete line at the cursor.
+.TP 5
+REQ_DEL_WORD
+Delete blank-delimited word at the cursor.
+.TP 5
+REQ_CLR_EOL
+Clear to end of line from cursor.
+.TP 5
+REQ_CLR_EOF
+Clear to end of field from cursor.
+.TP 5
+REQ_CLR_FIELD
+Clear the entire field.
+.TP 5
+REQ_OVL_MODE
+Enter overlay mode.
+.TP 5
+REQ_INS_MODE
+Enter insert mode.
+
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_FLINE
+Scroll the field forward a line.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_BLINE
+Scroll the field backward a line.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_FPAGE
+Scroll the field forward a page.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_BPAGE
+Scroll the field backward a page.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_FHPAGE
+Scroll the field forward half a page.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_BHPAGE
+Scroll the field backward half a page.
+
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_FCHAR
+Scroll the field forward a character.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_BCHAR
+Scroll the field backward a character.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_HFLINE
+Horizontal scroll the field forward a line.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_HBLINE
+Horizontal scroll the field backward a line.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_HFHALF
+Horizontal scroll the field forward half a line.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_HBHALF
+Horizontal scroll the field backward half a line.
+
+.TP
+REQ_VALIDATION
+Validate field.
+.TP
+REQ_NEXT_CHOICE
+Display next field choice.
+.TP
+REQ_PREV_CHOICE
+Display previous field choice.
+.PP
+If the second argument is a printable ASCII character, the driver places it
+in the current position in the current field. If it is one of the forms
+requests listed above, that request is executed.
+.PP
+If the second argument is neither printable ASCII nor one of the above
+pre-defined form requests, the driver assumes it is an application-specific
+command and returns \fBE_UNKNOWN_COMMAND\fR. Application-defined commands
+should be defined relative to \fBMAX_COMMAND\fR, the maximum value of these
+pre-defined requests.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+\fBform_driver\fR return one of the following error codes:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_STATE\fR
+Routine was called from an initialization or termination function.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_POSTED\fR
+The form has not been posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_UNKNOWN_COMMAND\fR
+The form driver code saw an unknown request code.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_INVALID_FIELD\fR
+Contents of field is invalid.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_REQUEST_DENIED\fR
+The form driver could not process the request.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header files
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f452036baeab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_field.3x,v 1.5 1998/11/29 01:05:52 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_field 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_field\fR - make and break connections between fields and forms
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_form_fields(FORM *form, FIELD **fields);
+.br
+FIELD **form_fields(const FORM *form);
+.br
+int field_count(const FORM *form);
+.br
+int move_field(FIELD *field, int frow, int fcol);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_form_fields\fR changes the field pointer array of
+the given \fIform\fR. The array must be terminated by a \fBNULL\fR.
+
+The function \fBform_fields\fR returns the field array of the given form.
+
+The function \fBfield_count\fR returns the count of fields in \fIform\fR.
+
+The function \fBmove_field\fR move the given field (which must be disconnected)
+to a specified location on the screen.
+.SH RETURN VALUES
+The function \fBform_fields\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error.
+
+The function \fBfield_count\fR returns \fBERR\fR (the general
+\fBcurses\fR error return value) on error.
+
+The functions \fBset_form_fields\fR and \fBmove_field\fR return one of
+the following codes on error:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_POSTED\fR
+The form is already posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_CONNECTED\fR
+The field is already connected to a form.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+
+The SVr4 forms library documentation specifies the \fBfield_count\fR error value
+as -1 (which is the value of \fBERR\fR).
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_attributes.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_attributes.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7f6293dcef73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_attributes.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_field_attributes.3x,v 1.5 1998/11/29 01:06:02 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_field_attributes 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_field_attributes\fR - color and attribute control for form fields
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_field_fore(FIELD *field, chtype attr);
+.br
+chtype field_fore(const FIELD *field);
+.br
+int set_field_back(FIELD *field, chtype attr);
+.br
+chtype field_back(const FIELD *field);
+.br
+int set_field_pad(FIELD *field, int pad);
+.br
+chtype field_pad(const FIELD *field);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_field_fore\fR sets the foreground attribute of
+\fIfield\fR. This is the highlight used to display the field contents. The
+function \fBfield_fore\fR returns the foreground attribute. The default is
+\fBA_STANDOUT\fR.
+
+The function \fBset_field_back\fR sets the background attribute of
+\fIform\fR. This is the highlight used to display the extent fields in the
+form. The function \fBfield_back\fR returns the background attribute. The
+default is \fBA_NORMAL\fR.
+
+The function \fBset_field_pad\fR sets the character used to fill the field.
+The function \fBfield_pad\fR returns the given form's pad character. The
+default is a blank.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+These routines return one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X) and 3X pages whose names begin "form_" for detailed
+descriptions of the entry points.
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_buffer.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_buffer.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..202d4e7e0da5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_buffer.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_field_buffer.3x,v 1.8 1999/06/16 00:37:09 juergen Exp $
+.TH form_field_buffer 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_field_buffer\fR - field buffer control
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_field_buffer(FIELD *field, int buf, const char *value);
+.br
+char *field_buffer(const FIELD *field, int buffer);
+.br
+int set_field_status(FIELD *field, bool status);
+.br
+bool field_status(const FIELD *field);
+.br
+int set_max_field(FIELD *field, int max);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_field_buffer\fR sets the numbered buffer of the given field
+to contain a given string. Buffer 0 is the displayed value of the field; other
+numbered buffers may be allocated by applications through the \fBnbuf\fR
+argument of (see \fBform_field_new\fR(3X)) but are not manipulated by the forms
+library. The function \fBfield_buffer\fR returns the address of the buffer.
+Please note that this buffer has always the length of the buffer, that means
+that it may typically contain trailing spaces. If you entered leading spaces
+the buffer may also contain them. If you want the raw data, you must write your
+own routine that copies the value out of the buffer and removes the leading
+and trailing spaces. Please note also, that subsequent operations on the form
+will probably change the content of the buffer. So don't use it for long term
+storage of the entered form data.
+
+The function \fBset_field_status\fR sets the associated status flag of
+\fIfield\fR; \fBfield_status\fR gets the current value. The status flag
+is set to a nonzero value whenever the field changes.
+
+The function \fBset_max_field\fR sets the maximum size for a dynamic field.
+An argument of 0 turns off any maximum size threshold for that field.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The \fBfield_buffer\fR function returns NULL on error.
+
+The \fBfield_status\fR function returns \fBTRUE\fR or \fBFALSE\fR.
+
+The remaining routines return one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X) and 3X pages whose names begin "form_" for detailed
+descriptions of the entry points.
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_info.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_info.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f64c662e6059
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_info.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_field_info.3x,v 1.5 1998/11/29 01:06:24 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_field_info 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_field_info\fR - retrieve field characteristics
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int field_info(const FIELD *field, int *rows, int *cols,
+ int *frow, int *fcol, int *nrow, int *nbuf);
+.br
+int dynamic_field_info(const FIELD *field, int *rows, int *cols, *max);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBfield_info\fR returns the sizes and other attributes passed in
+to the field at its creation time. The attributes are: height, width, row of
+upper-left corner, column of upper-left corner, number off-screen rows, and
+number of working buffers.
+
+The function \fBdynamic_field_info\fR returns the actual size of the field, and
+its maximum possible size. If the field has no size limit, the location
+addressed by the third argument will be set to 0. (A field can be made dynamic
+by turning off the \fBO_STATIC\fR).
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+These routines return one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X) and 3X pages whose names begin "form_" for detailed
+descriptions of the entry points.
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_just.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_just.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dcb46768d96c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_just.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_field_just.3x,v 1.5 1998/11/29 01:06:32 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_field_just 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_field_just\fR - retrieve field characteristics
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_field_just(FIELD *field, int justification);
+.br
+int field_just(const FIELD *field);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_field_just\fR sets the justification attribute of
+a field; \fBfield_just\fR returns a field's justification attribute.
+The attribute may be one of NO_JUSTIFICATION, JUSTIFY_RIGHT,
+JUSTIFY_LEFT, or JUSTIFY_CENTER.
+
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function \fBfield_just\fR returns one of: NO_JUSTIFICATION,
+JUSTIFY_RIGHT, JUSTIFY_LEFT, or JUSTIFY_CENTER.
+
+The function \fBset_field_just\fR return one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X) and 3X pages whose names begin "form_" for detailed
+descriptions of the entry points.
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_new.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_new.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b798b5bb3e95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_new.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.'" $Id: form_field_new.3x,v 1.9 1998/11/29 01:06:44 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_field_new 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_field_new\fR - create and destroy form fields
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+FIELD *new_field(int height, int width,
+ int toprow, int leftcol,
+ int offscreen, int nbuffers);
+.br
+FIELD *dup_field(FIELD *field, int toprow, int leftcol);
+.br
+FIELD *link_field(FIELD *field, int toprow, int leftcol);
+.br
+int free_field(FIELD *field);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBnew_field\fR allocates a new field and initializes it from the
+parameters given: height, width, row of upper-left corner, column of upper-left
+corner, number off-screen rows, and number of additional working buffers.
+
+The function \fBdup_field\fR duplicates a field at a new location. Most
+attributes (including current contents, size, validation type, buffer count,
+growth threshold, justification, foreground, background, pad character,
+options, and user pointer) are copied. Field status and the field page bit are
+not copied.
+
+The function \fBlink_field\fR acts like \fBdup_field\fR, but the new field
+shares buffers with its parent. Attribute data is separate.
+
+The function \fBfree_field\fR de-allocates storage associated with a field.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function, \fBnew_field\fR, \fBdup_field\fR, \fBlink_field\fR return
+\fBNULL\fR on error.
+
+The function \fBfree_field\fR returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+
+It may be unwise to count on the set of attributes copied by
+\fBdup_field\fR(3X) being portable; the System V forms library documents are
+not very explicit on what gets copied and was not.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_opts.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_opts.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8f5e2def4315
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_opts.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_field_opts.3x,v 1.7 1998/11/29 01:06:54 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_field_opts 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_field_opts\fR - set and get field options
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_field_opts(FIELD *field, OPTIONS opts);
+.br
+int field_opts_on(FIELD *field, OPTIONS opts);
+.br
+int field_opts_off(FIELD *field, OPTIONS opts);
+.br
+OPTIONS field_opts(const FIELD *field);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_field_opts\fR sets all the given field's option bits (field
+option bits may be logically-OR'ed together).
+
+The function \fBfield_opts_on\fR turns on the given option bits, and leaves
+others alone.
+
+The function \fBfield_opts_off\fR turns off the given option bits, and leaves
+others alone.
+
+The function \fBfield_opts\fR returns the field's current option bits.
+
+The following options are defined (all are on by default):
+.TP 5
+O_VISIBLE
+The field is displayed. If this option is off, display of the field is
+suppressed,
+.TP 5
+O_ACTIVE
+The field is visited during processing. If this option is off, the field will
+not be reachable by navigation keys. Please notice that an invisible field
+appears to be inactive also.
+.TP 5
+O_PUBLIC
+The field contents are displayed as data is entered.
+.TP 5
+O_EDIT
+The field can be edited.
+.TP 5
+O_WRAP
+Words that don't fit on a line are wrapped to the next line. Words are
+blank-separated.
+.TP 5
+O_BLANK
+The field is cleared whenever a character is entered at the first position.
+.TP 5
+O_AUTOSKIP
+Skip to the next field when this one fills
+.TP 5
+O_NULLOK
+Allow a blank field.
+.TP 5
+O_STATIC
+Field buffers are fixed to field's original size.
+.TP 5
+O_PASSOK
+Validate field only if modified by user.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Except for \fBfield_opts\fR, each routine returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_CURRENT\fR
+The field is the current field.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.TP 5
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_userptr.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_userptr.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2aba2083bc01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_userptr.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_field_userptr.3x,v 1.6 1998/11/29 01:07:05 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_field_userptr 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_field_userptr\fR - associate application data with a form field
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_field_userptr(FIELD *field, void*userptr);
+.br
+void *field_userptr(const FIELD *field);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Every form field has a field that can be used to hold application-specific data
+(that is, the form-driver code leaves it alone). These functions get and set
+that field.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function \fBfield_userptr\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error. The function
+\fBset_field_userptr\fR returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+
+The user pointer should be a void pointer. We leave it as a char pointer for
+SVr4 compatibility.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_validation.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_validation.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c3f90ba5cb4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_field_validation.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.'" $Id: form_field_validation.3x,v 1.10 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH form_field_validation 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_field_validation\fR - data type validation for fields
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_field_type(FIELD *field, FIELDTYPE *type, ...);
+.br
+FIELDTYPE *field_type(const FIELD *field);
+.br
+void *field_arg(const FIELD *field);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_field_type\fR declares a data type for a given form field.
+This is the type checked by validation functions. The types are as follows:
+.TP 5
+TYPE_ALNUM
+Alphanumeric data. Requires a third \fBint\fR argument, a minimum field width.
+.TP 5
+TYPE_ALPHA
+Character data. Requires a third \fBint\fR argument, a minimum field width.
+.TP 5
+TYPE_ENUM
+Accept one of a specified set of strings. Requires a third \fB(char **)\fR
+argument pointing to a string list; a fourth \fBint\fR flag argument to enable
+case-sensitivity; and a fifth \fBint\fR flag argument specifying whether a partial
+match must be a unique one (if this flag is off, a prefix matches the first
+of any set of more than one list elements with that prefix). Please notice
+that the string list is not copied, only a reference to it is stored in the
+field. So you should avoid to use a list that lives in automatic variables
+on the stack.
+.TP 5
+TYPE_INTEGER
+Integer data, parsable to an integer by \fBatoi(3)\fR. Requires a third
+\fBint\fR argument controlling the precision, a fourth \fBlong\fR argument
+constraining minimum value, and a fifth \fBlong\fR constraining maximum value.
+If the maximum value is less or equal the minimum value, the range is simply
+ignored. On return the field buffer is formatted according to the \fBprintf\fR
+format specification ".*ld", where the '*' is replaced by the precision argument.
+For details of the precision handling see \fBprintf's\fR man-page.
+.TP 5
+TYPE_NUMERIC
+Numeric data (may have a decimal-point part). Requires a third
+\fBint\fR argument controlling the precision, a fourth \fBdouble\fR
+argument constraining minimum value, and a fifth \fBdouble\fR constraining
+maximum value. If your system supports locale's, the decimal point character
+to be used must be the one specified by your locale.
+If the maximum value is less or equal the minimum value, the range is simply
+ignored. On return the field buffer is formatted according to the \fBprintf\fR
+format specification ".*f", where the '*' is replaced by the precision argument.
+For details of the precision handling see \fBprintf's\fR man-page.
+.TP 5
+TYPE_REGEXP
+Regular expression data. Requires a regular expression \fB(char *)\fR third argument;
+the data is valid if the regular expression matches it. Regular expressions
+are in the format of \fBregcomp\fR(3X) and \fBregexec\fR(3X). Please notice
+that the regular expression must match the whole field. If you have for
+example an eight character wide field, a regular expression "^[0-9]*$" always
+means that you have to fill all eight positions with digits. If you want to
+allow fewer digits, you may use for example "^[0-9]* *$" which is good for
+trailing spaces (up to an empty field), or "^ *[0-9]* *$" which is good for
+leading and trailing spaces around the digits.
+.TP 5
+TYPE_IPV4
+An Internet Protocol Version 4 address. This requires no additional argument. It
+is checked whether or not the buffer has the form a.b.c.d, where a,b,c and d are
+numbers between 0 and 255. Trailing blanks in the buffer are ignored. The address
+itself is not validated. Please note that this is an ncurses extension. This
+field type may not be available in other curses implementations.
+
+It is possible to set up new programmer-defined field types. See the
+\fBform_fieldtype\fR(3X) manual page.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The functions \fBfield_type\fR and \fBfield_arg\fR return \fBNULL\fR on
+error. The function \fBset_field_type\fR returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_fieldtype.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_fieldtype.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4c5dcb6616f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_fieldtype.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_fieldtype.3x,v 1.7 1998/11/29 01:07:16 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_field 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_fieldtype\fR - define validation-field types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+FIELDTYPE *new_fieldtype(
+ bool (* const field_check)(FIELD *, const void *),
+ bool (* const char_check)(int, const void *));
+.br
+int free_fieldtype(FIELDTYPE *fieldtype);
+.br
+int set_fieldtype_arg(
+ FIELDTYPE *fieldtype,
+ void *(* const make_arg)(va_list *),
+ void *(* const copy_arg)(const void *),
+ void (* const free_arg)(void *));
+.br
+int set_fieldtype_choice(
+ FIELDTYPE *fieldtype
+ bool (* const next_choice)(FIELD *, const void *),
+ bool (* const prev_choice)(FIELD *, const void *));
+.br
+FIELDTYPE *link_fieldtype(FIELDTYPE *type1,
+ FIELDTYPE *type2);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBnew_fieldtype\fR creates a new field type usable for data
+validation. You supply it with \fIfield_check\fR, a predicate to check the
+validity of an entered data string whenever the user attempt to leave a field.
+The (FIELD *) argument is passed in so the validation predicate can see the
+field's buffer, sizes and other attributes; the second argument is an
+argument-block structure, about which more below.
+
+You also supply \fBnew_fieldtype\fR with \fIchar_check\fR,
+a function to validate input characters as they are entered; it will be passed
+the character to be checked and a pointer to an argument-block structure.
+
+The function \fBfree_fieldtype\fR frees the space allocated for a given
+validation type.
+
+The function \fBset_fieldtype\fR associates three storage-management functions
+with a field type. The \fImak_arg\fR function is automatically applied to the
+list of arguments you give \fBset_field_type\fR when attaching validation
+to a field; its job is to bundle these into an allocated argument-block
+object which can later be passed to validation predicated. The other two
+hook arguments should copy and free argument-block structures. They will
+be used by the forms-driver code. You must supply the \fImak_arg\fR function,
+the other two are optional, you may supply NULL for them. In this case it
+is assumed, that \fImak_arg\fR doesn't allocate memory but simply loads the
+argument into a single scalar value.
+
+The form driver requests \fBREQ_NEXT_CHOICE\fR and \fBREQ_PREV_CHOICE\fR assume
+that the possible values of a field form an ordered set, and provide the forms
+user with a way to move through the set. The \fBset_fieldtype_choice\fR
+function allows forms programmers to define successor and predecessor functions
+for the field type. These functions take the field pointer and an
+argument-block structure as arguments.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The pointer-valued routines return NULL on error.
+
+The integer-valued routines return one of the following codes on
+error:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_CONNECTED\fR
+The field is already connected to a form.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+
+All of the \fB(char *)\fR arguments of these functions should actually be
+\fB(void *)\fR. The type has been left uncorrected for strict compatibility
+with System V.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_hook.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_hook.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..19c1b9fbd7a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_hook.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_hook.3x,v 1.6 1999/03/20 22:37:15 Todd.Miller Exp $
+.TH form_hook 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_hook\fR - set hooks for automatic invocation by applications
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_field_init(FORM *form, void (*func)(FORM *));
+.br
+void (*)(FORM *) field_init(const FORM *form);
+.br
+int set_field_term(FORM *form, void (*func)(FORM *));
+.br
+void (*)(FORM *) field_term(const FORM *form);
+.br
+int set_form_init(FORM *form, void (*func)(FORM *));
+.br
+void (*)(FORM *) form_init(const FORM *form);
+.br
+int set_form_term(FORM *form, void (*func)(FORM *));
+.br
+void (*)(FORM *) form_term(const FORM *form);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions make it possible to set hook functions to be called at various
+points in the automatic processing of input event codes by \fBform_driver\fR.
+
+The function \fBset_field_init\fR sets a hook to be called at form-post time
+and each time the selected field changes (after the change). \fBfield_init\fR
+returns the current field init hook, if any (\fBNULL\fR if there is no such
+hook).
+
+The function \fBset_field_term\fR sets a hook to be called at form-unpost time
+and each time the selected field changes (before the change). \fBfield_term\fR
+returns the current field term hook, if any (\fBNULL\fR if there is no such
+hook).
+
+The function \fBset_form_init\fR sets a hook to be called at form-post time and
+just after a page change once it is posted. \fBform_init\fR returns the
+current form init hook, if any (\fBNULL\fR if there is no such hook).
+
+The function \fBset_form_term\fR sets a hook to be called at form-unpost time
+and just before a page change once it is posted. \fBform_init\fR
+returns the current form term hook, if any (\fBNULL\fR if there is no such
+hook).
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return pointers return \fBNULL\fR on error. Other routines
+return one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_new.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_new.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0f4c5015d11b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_new.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_new.3x,v 1.5 1998/11/29 01:07:37 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_new 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_new\fR - create and destroy forms
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+FORM *new_form(FIELD **fields);
+.br
+int free_form(FORM *form);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBnew_form\fR creates a new form connected to a specified field
+pointer array (which must be \fBNULL\fR-terminated).
+
+The function \fBfree_form\fR disconnects \fIform\fR from its field array
+and frees the storage allocated for the form.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function \fBnew_form\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error.
+
+The function \fBfree_form\fR returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_POSTED\fR
+The form has already been posted.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_new_page.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_new_page.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b93b48c18c88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_new_page.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_new_page.3x,v 1.5 1998/11/29 01:07:45 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_new_page 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_new_page\fR - form pagination functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_new_page(FIELD *field, bool new_page_flag);
+.br
+bool new_page(const FIELD *field);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_new_page\fR sets or resets a flag marking the given field
+as the beginning of a new page on its form.
+
+The function \fBnew_page\fR is a predicate which tests if a given field marks
+a page beginning on its form.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function \fBnew_page\fR returns \fBTRUE\fR or \fBFALSE\fR.
+
+The function \fBset_new_page\fR return one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_CONNECTED\fR
+The given field is already connected to a form.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X) and 3X pages whose names begin "form_" for detailed
+descriptions of the entry points.
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_opts.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_opts.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7921b3772563
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_opts.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_opts.3x,v 1.6 1998/11/29 01:07:53 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_opts 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_opts\fR - set and get form options
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_form_opts(FORM *form, OPTIONS opts);
+.br
+int form_opts_on(FORM *form, OPTIONS opts);
+.br
+int form_opts_off(FORM *form, OPTIONS opts);
+.br
+OPTIONS form_opts(const FORM *form);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_form_opts\fR sets all the given form's option bits (form
+option bits may be logically-OR'ed together).
+
+The function \fBform_opts_on\fR turns on the given option bits, and leaves
+others alone.
+
+The function \fBform_opts_off\fR turns off the given option bits, and leaves
+others alone.
+
+The function \fBform_opts\fR returns the form's current option bits.
+
+The following options are defined (all are on by default):
+.TP 5
+O_NL_OVERLOAD
+Overload the \fBREQ_NEW_LINE\fR forms driver request so that calling it at the
+end of a field goes to the next field.
+.TP 5
+O_BS_OVERLOAD
+Overload the \fBREQ_DEL_PREV\fR forms driver request so that calling it at the
+beginning of a field goes to the previous field.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Except for \fBform_opts\fR, each routine returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_page.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_page.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4b5d15aec18e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_page.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_page.3x,v 1.8 1998/11/29 01:08:02 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_page 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_page\fR - set and get form page number
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_current_field(FORM *form, FIELD *field);
+.br
+FIELD *current_field(const FORM *);
+.br
+int set_form_page(FORM *form, int n);
+.br
+int form_page(const FORM *form);
+.br
+int field_index(const FIELD *field);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_current field\fR sets the current field of the given
+form; \fBcurrent_field\fR returns the current field of the given form.
+.PP
+The function \fBset_form_page\fR sets the form's page number (goes to page
+\fIn\fR of the form).
+.PP
+The function \fBform_page\fR returns the form's current page number.
+.PP
+The function \fBfield_index\fR returns the index of the field in the
+field array of the form it is connected to. It returns \fBERR\fR if
+the argument is the null pointer or the field is not connected.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Except for \fBform_page\fR, each routine returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_STATE\fR
+Routine was called from an initialization or termination function.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_INVALID_FIELD\fR
+Contents of a field are not valid.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_REQUEST_DENIED\fR
+The form driver could not process the request.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_post.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_post.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..56e86ab94692
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_post.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_post.3x,v 1.4 1998/11/29 01:08:10 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_post 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_post\fR - write or erase forms from associated subwindows
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int post_form(FORM *form);
+.br
+int unpost_form(FORM *form);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBpost_form\fR displays a form to its associated subwindow. To
+trigger physical display of the subwindow, use \fBrefresh\fR or some equivalent
+\fBcurses\fR routine (the implicit \fBdoupdate\fR triggered by an \fBcurses\fR
+input request will do).
+
+The function \fBunpost_form\fR erases form from its associated subwindow.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+These routines return one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_POSTED\fR
+The form has already been posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_STATE\fR
+Routine was called from an initialization or termination function.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NO_ROOM\fR
+Form is too large for its window.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_POSTED\fR
+The form has not been posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_CONNECTED\fR
+No items are connected to the form.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_requestname.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_requestname.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..df1f701b382e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_requestname.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_requestname.3x,v 1.6 1998/11/29 01:08:18 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_requestname 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_requestname\fR - handle printable form request names
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+const char *form_request_name(int request);
+.br
+int form_request_by_name(const char *name);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBform_request_name\fR returns the printable name of a form
+request code.
+.br
+The function \fBform_request_by_name\fR searches in the name-table for a request
+with the given name and returns its request code. Otherwise E_NO_MATCH is returned.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+\fBform_request_name\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error and sets errno
+to \fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR.
+.br
+\fBform_request_by_name\fR returns \fBE_NO_MATCH\fR on error.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines are specific to ncurses. They were not supported on
+Version 7, BSD or System V implementations. It is recommended that
+any code depending on them be conditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_userptr.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_userptr.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..00e3d71aa40e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_userptr.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_userptr.3x,v 1.9 1998/11/29 01:08:39 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH form_userptr 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_userptr\fR - associate application data with a form item
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_form_userptr(FORM *form, void *userptr);
+.br
+void* form_userptr(const FORM *form);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Every form and every form item has a field that can be used to hold
+application-specific data (that is, the form-driver code leaves it alone).
+These functions get and set the form user pointer field.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function \fBform_userptr\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error.
+The function \fBset_form_userptr\fR returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+
+The user pointer should be a void pointer. We leave it as a char pointer for
+SVr4 compatibility.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/form_win.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_win.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e56597028868
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/form_win.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: form_win.3x,v 1.8 1999/04/10 23:36:08 tom Exp $
+.TH form_win 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBform_win\fR - make and break form window and subwindow associations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <form.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_form_win(FORM *form, WINDOW *win);
+.br
+WINDOW *form_win(const FORM *form);
+.br
+int set_form_sub(FORM *form, WINDOW *sub);
+.br
+WINDOW *form_sub(const FORM *form);
+.br
+int scale_form(const FORM *form, int *rows, int *columns);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Every form has an associated pair of \fBcurses\fR windows. The form window
+displays any title and border associated with the window; the form subwindow
+displays the items of the form that are currently available for selection.
+
+The first four functions get and set those windows. It is not necessary to set
+either window; by default, the driver code uses \fBstdscr\fR for both.
+
+In the \fBset_\fR functions, window argument of \fBNULL\fR is treated as though
+it were \fBstsdcr\fR. A form argument of \fBNULL\fR is treated as a request
+to change the system default form window or subwindow.
+
+The function \fBscale_form\fR returns the minimum size required for the
+subwindow of \fIform\fR.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return pointers return \fBNULL\fR on error. Routines that return
+an integer return one of the following error codes:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_POSTED\fR
+The form has already been posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_CONNECTED\fR
+No items are connected to the form.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBform\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<form.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V forms library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/infocmp.1m b/contrib/ncurses/man/infocmp.1m
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..11fa217243fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/infocmp.1m
@@ -0,0 +1,364 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: infocmp.1m,v 1.21 1999/06/15 23:12:25 tom Exp $
+.TH infocmp 1M ""
+.ds n 5
+.ds d @DATADIR@/terminfo
+.SH NAME
+\fBinfocmp\fR - compare or print out \fIterminfo\fR descriptions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBinfocmp\fR [\fB-dceEGgnpILCuV1\fR] [\fB-v\fR \fIn\fR] [\fB-s d\fR| \fBi\fR| \fBl\fR| \fBc\fR]
+.br
+ [\fB-w\fR\ \fIwidth\fR] [\fB-A\fR\ \fIdirectory\fR] [\fB-B\fR\ \fIdirectory\fR]
+.br
+ [\fItermname\fR...]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\fBinfocmp\fR can be used to compare a binary \fBterminfo\fR entry with other
+terminfo entries, rewrite a \fBterminfo\fR description to take advantage of the
+\fBuse=\fR terminfo field, or print out a \fBterminfo\fR description from the
+binary file (\fBterm\fR) in a variety of formats. In all cases, the boolean
+fields will be printed first, followed by the numeric fields, followed by the
+string fields.
+..
+.SS Default Options
+If no options are specified and zero or one \fItermnames\fR are specified, the
+\fB-I\fR option will be assumed. If more than one \fItermname\fR is specified,
+the \fB-d\fR option will be assumed.
+..
+.SS Comparison Options [-d] [-c] [-n]
+\fBinfocmp\fR compares the \fBterminfo\fR description of the first terminal
+\fItermname\fR with each of the descriptions given by the entries for the other
+terminal's \fItermnames\fR. If a capability is defined for only one of the
+terminals, the value returned will depend on the type of the capability:
+\fBF\fR for boolean variables, \fB-1\fR for integer variables, and \fBNULL\fR
+for string variables.
+
+The \fB-d\fR option produces a list of each capability that is different
+between two entries. This option is useful to show the difference between two
+entries, created by different people, for the same or similar terminals.
+
+The \fB-c\fR option produces a list of each capability that is common between
+two entries. Capabilities that are not set are ignored. This option can be
+used as a quick check to see if the \fB-u\fR option is worth using.
+
+The \fB-n\fR option produces a list of each capability that is in neither
+entry. If no \fItermnames\fR are given, the environment variable \fBTERM\fR
+will be used for both of the \fItermnames\fR. This can be used as a quick
+check to see if anything was left out of a description.
+..
+.SS Source Listing Options [-I] [-L] [-C] [-r]
+The \fB-I\fR, \fB-L\fR, and \fB-C\fR options will produce a source listing for
+each terminal named.
+
+.TS
+center tab(/) ;
+l l .
+\fB-I\fR/use the \fBterminfo\fR names
+\fB-L\fR/use the long C variable name listed in <\fBterm.h\fR>
+\fB-C\fR/use the \fBtermcap\fR names
+\fB-r\fR/when using \fB-C\fR, put out all capabilities in \fBtermcap\fR form
+.TE
+
+If no \fItermnames\fR are given, the environment variable \fBTERM\fR will be
+used for the terminal name.
+
+The source produced by the \fB-C\fR option may be used directly as a
+\fBtermcap\fR entry, but not all parameterized strings can be changed to
+the \fBtermcap\fR format. \fBinfocmp\fR will attempt to convert most of the
+parameterized information, and anything not converted will be plainly marked in
+the output and commented out. These should be edited by hand.
+
+All padding information for strings will be collected together and placed
+at the beginning of the string where \fBtermcap\fR expects it. Mandatory
+padding (padding information with a trailing '/') will become optional.
+
+All \fBtermcap\fR variables no longer supported by \fBterminfo\fR, but which
+are derivable from other \fBterminfo\fR variables, will be output. Not all
+\fBterminfo\fR capabilities will be translated; only those variables which were
+part of \fBtermcap\fR will normally be output. Specifying the \fB-r\fR option
+will take off this restriction, allowing all capabilities to be output in
+\fItermcap\fR form.
+
+Note that because padding is collected to the beginning of the capability, not
+all capabilities are output. Mandatory padding is not supported. Because
+\fBtermcap\fR strings are not as flexible, it is not always possible to convert
+a \fBterminfo\fR string capability into an equivalent \fBtermcap\fR format. A
+subsequent conversion of the \fBtermcap\fR file back into \fBterminfo\fR format
+will not necessarily reproduce the original \fBterminfo\fR
+source.
+
+Some common \fBterminfo\fR parameter sequences, their \fBtermcap\fR
+equivalents, and some terminal types which commonly have such sequences, are:
+
+.TS
+center tab(/) ;
+l c l
+l l l.
+\fBterminfo/termcap\fR/Representative Terminals
+=
+\fB%p1%c/%.\fR/adm
+\fB%p1%d/%d\fR/hp, ANSI standard, vt100
+\fB%p1%'x'%+%c/%+x\fR/concept
+\fB%i/%i\fRq/ANSI standard, vt100
+\fB%p1%?%'x'%>%t%p1%'y'%+%;/%>xy\fR/concept
+\fB%p2\fR is printed before \fB%p1/%r\fR/hp
+.TE
+.SS Use= Option [-u]
+The \fB-u\fR option produces a \fBterminfo\fR source description of the first
+terminal \fItermname\fR which is relative to the sum of the descriptions given
+by the entries for the other terminals \fItermnames\fR. It does this by
+analyzing the differences between the first \fItermname\fR and the other
+\fItermnames\fR and producing a description with \fBuse=\fR fields for the
+other terminals. In this manner, it is possible to retrofit generic terminfo
+entries into a terminal's description. Or, if two similar terminals exist, but
+were coded at different times or by different people so that each description
+is a full description, using \fBinfocmp\fR will show what can be done to change
+one description to be relative to the other.
+
+A capability will get printed with an at-sign (@) if it no longer exists in the
+first \fItermname\fR, but one of the other \fItermname\fR entries contains a
+value for it. A capability's value gets printed if the value in the first
+\fItermname\fR is not found in any of the other \fItermname\fR entries, or if
+the first of the other \fItermname\fR entries that has this capability gives a
+different value for the capability than that in the first \fItermname\fR.
+
+The order of the other \fItermname\fR entries is significant. Since the
+terminfo compiler \fBtic\fR does a left-to-right scan of the capabilities,
+specifying two \fBuse=\fR entries that contain differing entries for the same
+capabilities will produce different results depending on the order that the
+entries are given in. \fBinfocmp\fR will flag any such inconsistencies between
+the other \fItermname\fR entries as they are found.
+
+Alternatively, specifying a capability \fIafter\fR a \fBuse=\fR entry that
+contains that capability will cause the second specification to be ignored.
+Using \fBinfocmp\fR to recreate a description can be a useful check to make
+sure that everything was specified correctly in the original source
+description.
+
+Another error that does not cause incorrect compiled files, but will slow down
+the compilation time, is specifying extra \fBuse=\fR fields that are
+superfluous. \fBinfocmp\fR will flag any other \fItermname use=\fR fields that
+were not needed.
+..
+.SS Changing Databases [-A \fIdirectory\fR] [-B \fIdirectory\fR]
+The location of the compiled \fBterminfo\fR database is taken from the
+environment variable \fBTERMINFO\fR . If the variable is not defined, or the
+terminal is not found in that location, the system \fBterminfo\fR database,
+in \fB@DATADIR@/terminfo\fR, will be used. The options \fB-A\fR
+and \fB-B\fR may be used to override this location. The \fB-A\fR option will
+set \fBTERMINFO\fR for the first \fItermname\fR and the \fB-B\fR option will
+set \fBTERMINFO\fR for the other \fItermnames\fR. With this, it is possible to
+compare descriptions for a terminal with the same name located in two different
+databases. This is useful for comparing descriptions for the same terminal
+created by different people.
+..
+.SS Other Options [-s d|i|l|c] [-1FTVefip] [-Rsubset] [-v \fIn\fR] [-w \fIwidth\fR]
+The \fB-s\fR option sorts the fields within each type according to the argument
+below:
+..
+.TP 5
+\fBd\fR
+leave fields in the order that they are stored in the \fIterminfo\fR database.
+.TP 5
+\fBi\fR
+sort by \fIterminfo\fR name.
+.TP 5
+\fBl\fR
+sort by the long C variable name.
+.TP 5
+\fBc\fR
+sort by the \fItermcap\fR name.
+
+If the \fB-s\fR option is not given, the fields printed out will be
+sorted alphabetically by the \fBterminfo\fR name within each type,
+except in the case of the \fB-C\fR or the \fB-L\fR options, which cause the
+sorting to be done by the \fBtermcap\fR name or the long C variable
+name, respectively.
+.TP 5
+\fB-1\fR
+causes the fields to be printed out one to a line. Otherwise,
+the fields will be printed several to a line to a maximum width
+of 60 characters.
+.TP 5
+\fB-F\fR
+compare terminfo files. This assumes that two following arguments are
+filenames. The files are searched for pairwise matches between
+entries, with two entries considered to match if any of their names do.
+The report printed to standard output lists entries with no matches in
+the other file, and entries with more than one match. For entries
+with exactly one match it includes a difference report.
+.TP
+\fB-G\fR
+Display constant literals in decimal form
+rather than their character equivalents.
+.TP 5
+\fB-R\fR\fIsubset\fR
+Restrict output to a given subset. This option is for use with archaic
+versions of terminfo like those on SVr1, Ultrix, or HP/UX that don't support
+the full set of SVR4/XSI Curses terminfo; and outright broken ports like AIX
+that have their own extensions incompatible with SVr4/XSI. Available terminfo
+subsets are "SVr1", "Ultrix", "HP", and "AIX"; see \fBterminfo\fR(\*n) for
+details. You can also choose the subset "BSD" which selects only capabilities
+with termcap equivalents recognized by 4.4BSD.
+.TP 5
+\fB-T\fR
+eliminates size-restrictions on the generated text.
+This is mainly useful for testing and analysis, since the compiled
+descriptions are limited (e.g., 1023 for termcap, 4096 for terminfo).
+.TP 5
+\fB-V\fR
+prints out the version of the program in use on standard error and exits.
+.TP 5
+\fB-e\fR
+Dump the capabilities of the given terminal as a C initializer for a
+TERMTYPE structure (the terminal capability structure in the \fB<term.h>\fR).
+This option is useful for preparing versions of the curses library hardwired
+for a given terminal type.
+.TP 5
+\fB-E\fR
+Dump the capabilities of the given terminal as tables, needed in
+the C initializer for a
+TERMTYPE structure (the terminal capability structure in the \fB<term.h>\fR).
+This option is useful for preparing versions of the curses library hardwired
+for a given terminal type.
+The tables are all declared static, and are named according to the type
+and the name of the corresponding terminal entry.
+.sp
+Before ncurses 5.0, the split between the \fB\-e\fP and \fB\-E\fP
+options was not needed; but support for extended names required making
+the arrays of terminal capabilities separate from the TERMTYPE structure.
+.TP
+\fB-f\fR
+Display complex terminfo strings which contain if/then/else/endif expressions
+indented for readability.
+.TP
+\fB-g\fR
+Display constant character literals in quoted form
+rather than their decimal equivalents.
+.TP 5
+\fB-i\fR
+Analyze the initialization (\fBis1\fR, \fBis2\fR, \fBis3\fR), and reset
+(\fBrs1\fR, \fBrs2\fR, \fBrs3\fR), strings in the entry. For each string, the
+code tries to analyze it into actions in terms of the other capabilities in the
+entry, certain X3.64/ISO 6429/ECMA-48 capabilities, and certain DEC VT-series
+private modes (the set of recognized special sequences has been selected for
+completeness over the existing terminfo database). Each report line consists
+of the capability name, followed by a colon and space, followed by a printable
+expansion of the capability string with sections matching recognized actions
+translated into {}-bracketed descriptions. Here is a list of the DEC/ANSI
+special sequences recognized:
+
+.TS
+center tab(/) ;
+l l
+l l.
+Action/Meaning
+=
+RIS/full reset
+SC/save cursor
+RC/restore cursor
+LL/home-down
+RSR/reset scroll region
+
+ISO DEC G0/enable DEC graphics for G0
+ISO UK G0/enable UK chars for G0
+ISO US G0/enable US chars for G0
+ISO DEC G1/enable DEC graphics for G1
+ISO UK G1/enable UK chars for G1
+ISO US G1/enable US chars for G1
+
+DECPAM/application keypad mode
+DECPNM/normal keypad mode
+DECANSI/enter ANSI mode
+
+DEC[+-]CKM/application cursor keys
+DEC[+-]ANM/set VT52 mode
+DEC[+-]COLM/132-column mode
+DEC[+-]SCLM/smooth scroll
+DEC[+-]SCNM/reverse video mode
+DEC[+-]OM/origin mode
+DEC[+-]AWM/wraparound mode
+DEC[+-]ARM/auto-repeat mode
+.TE
+.sp
+It also recognizes a SGR action corresponding to ANSI/ISO 6429/ECMA Set
+Graphics Rendition, with the values NORMAL, BOLD, UNDERLINE, BLINK, and
+REVERSE. All but NORMAL may be prefixed with `+' (turn on) or `-' (turn off).
+
+An SGR0 designates an empty highlight sequence (equivalent to {SGR:NORMAL}).
+.TP 5
+\fB-p\fR
+Ignore padding specifications when comparing strings.
+.TP 5
+\fB-v\fR \fIn\fR
+prints out tracing information on standard error as the program runs.
+Higher values of n induce greater verbosity.
+.TP 5
+\fB-w\fR \fIwidth\fR
+changes the output to \fIwidth\fR characters.
+..
+.SH FILES
+.TP 20
+\*d
+Compiled terminal description database.
+..
+.SH EXTENSIONS
+The
+\fB-E\fR,
+\fB-F\fR,
+\fB-G\fR,
+\fB-R\fR,
+\fB-T\fR,
+\fB-e\fR,
+\fB-f\fR,
+\fB-g\fR,
+\fB-i\fR, and
+\fB-p\fR
+options are not supported in SVr4 curses.
+
+The \fB-r\fR option's notion of `termcap' capabilities is System V Release 4's.
+Actual BSD curses versions will have a more restricted set. To see only the
+4.4BSD set, use -r -RBSD.
+.SH BUGS
+The -F option of \fBinfocmp\fR(1M) should be a \fBtoe\fR(1M) mode.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBinfocmp\fR(1M), \fBcaptoinfo\fR(1M), \fBinfotocap\fR(1M),
+\fBtic\fR(1M), \fBtoe\fR(1M),
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBterminfo\fR(\*n).
+.SH AUTHOR
+Eric S. Raymond <esr@snark.thyrsus.com>
+and
+Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@clark.net>
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/keybound.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/keybound.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e6bf5e4e731a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/keybound.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" Author: Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@clark.net> 1999
+.\"
+.\" $Id: keybound.3x,v 1.1 1999/02/19 11:59:24 tom Exp $
+.TH keyok 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBkeybound\fP \- return definition of keycode
+..
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fP
+
+\fBint keybound(int keycode, int count);\fP
+..
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This is an extension to the curses library.
+It permits an application to determine the string which is defined
+in the terminfo for specific keycodes.
+..
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The keycode must be greater than zero, else NULL is returned.
+If it does not correspond to a defined key, then NULL is returned.
+Otherwise, the function returns a string, which must be freed by the caller.
+..
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines are specific to ncurses. They were not supported on
+Version 7, BSD or System V implementations. It is recommended that
+any code depending on them be conditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
+..
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBdefine_key\fR(3X),
+\fBkeyok\fR(3X).
+..
+.SH AUTHOR
+Thomas Dickey.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/keyok.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/keyok.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..21befe83ca4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/keyok.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" Author: Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@clark.net> 1997
+.\"
+.\" $Id: keyok.3x,v 1.5 1998/03/14 23:43:07 tom Exp $
+.TH keyok 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBkeyok\fP \- enable or disable a keycode
+..
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fP
+
+\fBint keyok(int keycode, bool enable);\fP
+..
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This is an extension to the curses library.
+It permits an application to disable specific keycodes, rather than
+use the \fIkeypad\fP function to disable all keycodes.
+Keys that have been disabled can be reenabled.
+..
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The keycode must be greater than zero, else ERR is returned.
+If it does not correspond to a defined key, then ERR is returned.
+If the \fIenable\fP parameter is true, then the key must have been disabled,
+and vice versa.
+Otherwise, the function returns OK.
+..
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines are specific to ncurses. They were not supported on
+Version 7, BSD or System V implementations. It is recommended that
+any code depending on them be conditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
+..
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBdefine_key\fR(3X).
+..
+.SH AUTHOR
+Thomas Dickey.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/make_sed.sh b/contrib/ncurses/man/make_sed.sh
new file mode 100755
index 000000000000..c6c37c25b0d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/make_sed.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# $Id: make_sed.sh,v 1.5 1998/02/11 12:13:48 tom Exp $
+##############################################################################
+# Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #
+# #
+# Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a #
+# copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), #
+# to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation #
+# the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, distribute #
+# with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to #
+# permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the #
+# following conditions: #
+# #
+# The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in #
+# all copies or substantial portions of the Software. #
+# #
+# THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR #
+# IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, #
+# FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL #
+# THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER #
+# LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING #
+# FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER #
+# DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. #
+# #
+# Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright #
+# holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, #
+# use or other dealings in this Software without prior written #
+# authorization. #
+##############################################################################
+#
+# Author: Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@clark.net> 1997
+#
+# Construct a sed-script to perform renaming within man-pages. Originally
+# written in much simpler form, this one accounts for the common cases of
+# section-names in man-pages.
+
+if test $# != 1 ; then
+ echo '? expected a single filename'
+ exit 1
+fi
+
+COL=col$$
+INPUT=input$$
+UPPER=upper$$
+SCRIPT=script$$
+RESULT=result$$
+rm -f $UPPER $SCRIPT $RESULT
+trap "rm -f $COL.* $INPUT $UPPER $SCRIPT $RESULT" 0 1 2 5 15
+fgrep -v \# $1 | \
+sed -e 's/[ ]\+/ /g' >$INPUT
+
+for F in 1 2 3 4
+do
+sed -e 's/\./ /g' $INPUT | \
+cut -f $F > $COL.$F
+done
+for F in 2 4
+do
+ tr abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ <$COL.$F >$UPPER
+ mv $UPPER $COL.$F
+done
+paste $COL.* | \
+sed -e 's/^/s\/\\</' \
+ -e 's/$/\//' >$UPPER
+
+# Do the TH lines
+sed -e 's/\//\/TH /' \
+ -e 's/ / /' \
+ -e 's/ / ""\/TH /' \
+ -e 's/ / /' \
+ -e 's/\/$/ ""\//' \
+ $UPPER >>$RESULT
+
+# Do the embedded references
+sed -e 's/</<fB/' \
+ -e 's/ /\\\\fR(/' \
+ -e 's/ /)\/fB/' \
+ -e 's/ /\\\\fR(/' \
+ -e 's/\/$/)\//' \
+ $UPPER >>$RESULT
+
+# Finally, send the result to standard output
+cat $RESULT
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/man_db.renames b/contrib/ncurses/man/man_db.renames
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b1ae37c1f22d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/man_db.renames
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+# $Id: man_db.renames,v 0.14 1999/02/20 12:43:56 tom Exp $
+# Manual-page renamings for the man_db program
+#
+captoinfo.1m captoinfo.1
+clear.1 clear.1
+curs_addch.3x addch.3ncurses
+curs_addchstr.3x addchstr.3ncurses
+curs_addstr.3x addstr.3ncurses
+curs_attr.3x attr.3ncurses
+curs_beep.3x beep.3ncurses
+curs_bkgd.3x bkgd.3ncurses
+curs_border.3x border.3ncurses
+curs_clear.3x clear.3ncurses
+curs_color.3x color.3ncurses
+curs_delch.3x delch.3ncurses
+curs_deleteln.3x deleteln.3ncurses
+curs_getch.3x getch.3ncurses
+curs_getstr.3x getstr.3ncurses
+curs_getyx.3x getyx.3ncurses
+curs_inch.3x inch.3ncurses
+curs_inchstr.3x inchstr.3ncurses
+curs_initscr.3x initscr.3ncurses
+curs_inopts.3x inopts.3ncurses
+curs_insch.3x insch.3ncurses
+curs_insstr.3x insstr.3ncurses
+curs_instr.3x instr.3ncurses
+curs_kernel.3x kernel.3ncurses
+curs_mouse.3x mouse.3ncurses
+curs_move.3x move.3ncurses
+curs_outopts.3x outopts.3ncurses
+curs_overlay.3x overlay.3ncurses
+curs_pad.3x pad.3ncurses
+curs_print.3x print.3ncurses
+curs_printw.3x printw.3ncurses
+curs_refresh.3x refresh.3ncurses
+curs_scanw.3x scanw.3ncurses
+curs_scr_dump.3x scr_dump.3ncurses
+curs_scroll.3x scroll.3ncurses
+curs_slk.3x slk.3ncurses
+curs_termattrs.3x termattrs.3ncurses
+curs_termcap.3x termcap.3ncurses
+curs_terminfo.3x terminfo.3ncurses
+curs_touch.3x touch.3ncurses
+curs_util.3x util.3ncurses
+curs_window.3x window.3ncurses
+curses.3x ncurses.3ncurses
+define_key.3x define_key.3ncurses
+dft_fgbg.3x dft_fgbg.3ncurses
+form.3x form.3form
+form_cursor.3x cursor.3form
+form_data.3x data.3form
+form_driver.3x driver.3form
+form_field.3x field.3form
+form_field_attributes.3x field_attributes.3form
+form_field_buffer.3x field_buffer.3form
+form_field_info.3x field_info.3form
+form_field_just.3x field_just.3form
+form_field_new.3x field_new.3form
+form_field_opts.3x field_opts.3form
+form_field_userptr.3x field_userptr.3form
+form_field_validation.3x field_validation.3form
+form_fieldtype.3x fieldtype.3form
+form_hook.3x hook.3form
+form_new.3x new.3form
+form_new_page.3x new_page.3form
+form_opts.3x opts.3form
+form_page.3x page.3form
+form_post.3x post.3form
+form_requestname.3x requestname.3form
+form_userptr.3x userptr.3form
+form_win.3x win.3form
+infocmp.1m infocmp.1
+keybound.3x keybound.3ncurses
+keyok.3x keyok.3ncurses
+menu.3x menu.3menu
+menu_attribs.3x attribs.3menu
+menu_cursor.3x cursor.3menu
+menu_driver.3x driver.3menu
+menu_format.3x format.3menu
+menu_hook.3x hook.3menu
+menu_items.3x items.3menu
+menu_mark.3x mark.3menu
+menu_new.3x new.3menu
+menu_opts.3x opts.3menu
+menu_pattern.3x pattern.3menu
+menu_post.3x post.3menu
+menu_requestname.3x requestname.3menu
+menu_spacing.3x spacing.3menu
+menu_userptr.3x userptr.3menu
+menu_win.3x win.3menu
+mitem_current.3x menu_current.3menu
+mitem_name.3x menu_name.3menu
+mitem_new.3x menu_new.3menu
+mitem_opts.3x menu_opts.3menu
+mitem_userptr.3x menu_userptr.3menu
+mitem_value.3x menu_value.3menu
+mitem_visible.3x menu_visible.3menu
+ncurses.3x ncurses.3ncurses
+panel.3x panel.3curses
+printf.3s printf.3
+putc.3s putc.3
+resizeterm.3x resizeterm.3ncurses
+scanf.3s scanf.3
+system.3s system.3
+term.5 term.5
+term.7 term.7
+terminfo.5 terminfo.5
+tic.1m tic.1
+toe.1m toe.1
+tput.1 tput.1
+tset.1 tset.1
+vprintf.3s vprintf.3
+wresize.3x wresize.3ncurses
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..adbfffd92c74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu.3x,v 1.13 1998/11/29 01:09:07 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu\fR - curses extension for programming menus
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBmenu\fR library provides terminal-independent facilities for composing
+menu systems on character-cell terminals. The library includes: item routines,
+which create and modify menu items; and menu routines, which group items into
+menus, display menus on the screen, and handle interaction with the user.
+
+The \fBmenu\fR library uses the \fBcurses\fR libraries, and a curses
+initialization routine such as \fBinitscr\fR must be called before using any of
+these functions. To use the \fBmenu\fR library, link with the options
+\fB-lmenu -lcurses\fR.
+
+.SS Current Default Values for Item Attributes
+
+The \fBmenu\fR library maintains a default value for item attributes. You can
+get or set this default by calling the appropriate \fBget_\fR or \fBset_\fR
+routine with a \fBNULL\fR item pointer. Changing this default with a
+\fBset_\fR function affects future item creations, but does not change the
+rendering of items already created.
+
+.SS Routine Name Index
+
+The following table lists each \fBmenu\fR routine and the name of
+the manual page on which it is described.
+
+.TS
+l l .
+\fBcurses\fR Routine Name Manual Page Name
+=
+current_item \fBmitem_current\fR(3X)
+free_item \fBmitem_new\fR(3X)
+free_menu \fBmenu_new\fR(3X)
+item_count \fBmenu_items\fR(3X)
+item_description \fBmitem_name\fR(3X)
+item_index \fBmitem_current\fR(3X)
+item_init \fBmenu_hook\fR(3X)
+item_name \fBmitem_name\fR(3X)
+item_opts \fBmitem_opts\fR(3X)
+item_opts_off \fBmitem_opts\fR(3X)
+item_opts_on \fBmitem_opts\fR(3X)
+item_term \fBmenu_hook\fR(3X)
+item_userptr \fBmitem_userptr\fR(3X)
+item_value \fBmitem_value\fR(3X)
+item_visible \fBmitem_visible\fR(3X)
+menu_back \fBmenu_attribs\fR(3X)
+menu_driver \fBmenu_driver\fR(3X)
+menu_fore \fBmenu_attribs\fR(3X)
+menu_format \fBmenu_format\fR(3X)
+menu_grey \fBmenu_attribs\fR(3X)
+menu_init \fBmenu_hook\fR(3X)
+menu_items \fBmenu_items\fR(3X)
+menu_mark \fBmenu_mark\fR(3X)
+menu_opts \fBmenu_opts\fR(3X)
+menu_opts_off \fBmenu_opts\fR(3X)
+menu_opts_on \fBmenu_opts\fR(3X)
+menu_pad \fBmenu_attribs\fR(3X)
+menu_pattern \fBmenu_pattern\fR(3X)
+menu_request_by_name \fBmenu_requestname\fR(3X)
+menu_request_name \fBmenu_requestname\fR(3X)
+menu_spacing \fBmenu_spacing\fR(3X)
+menu_sub \fBmenu_win\fR(3X)
+menu_term \fBmenu_hook\fR(3X)
+menu_userptr \fBmenu_userptr\fR(3X)
+menu_win \fBmenu_win\fR(3X)
+new_item \fBmitem_new\fR(3X)
+new_menu \fBmenu_new\fR(3X)
+pos_menu_cursor \fBmenu_cursor\fR(3X)
+post_menu \fBmenu_post\fR(3X)
+scale_menu \fBmenu_win\fR(3X)
+set_current_item \fBmitem_current\fR(3X)
+set_item_init \fBmenu_hook\fR(3X)
+set_item_opts \fBmitem_opts\fR(3X)
+set_item_term \fBmenu_hook\fR(3X)
+set_item_userptr \fBmitem_userptr\fR(3X)
+set_item_value \fBmitem_value\fR(3X)
+set_menu_back \fBmenu_attribs\fR(3X)
+set_menu_fore \fBmenu_attribs\fR(3X)
+set_menu_format \fBmenu_format\fR(3X)
+set_menu_grey \fBmenu_attribs\fR(3X)
+set_menu_init \fBmenu_hook\fR(3X)
+set_menu_items \fBmenu_items\fR(3X)
+set_menu_mark \fBmenu_mark\fR(3X)
+set_menu_opts \fBmitem_opts\fR(3X)
+set_menu_pad \fBmenu_attribs\fR(3X)
+set_menu_pattern \fBmenu_pattern\fR(3X)
+set_menu_spacing \fBmenu_spacing\fR(3X)
+set_menu_sub \fBmenu_win\fR(3X)
+set_menu_term \fBmenu_hook\fR(3X)
+set_menu_userptr \fBmenu_userptr\fR(3X)
+set_menu_win \fBmenu_win\fR(3X)
+set_top_row \fBmitem_current\fR(3X)
+top_row \fBmitem_current\fR(3X)
+unpost_menu \fBmenu_post\fR(3X)
+.TE
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return pointers return \fBNULL\fR on error. Routines that return
+an integer return one of the following error codes:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_POSTED\fR
+The menu is already posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_STATE\fR
+Routine was called from an initialization or termination function.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NO_ROOM\fR
+Menu is too large for its window.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_POSTED\fR
+The menu has not been posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_UNKNOWN_COMMAND\fR
+The menu driver code saw an unknown request code.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NO_MATCH\fR
+Character failed to match.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_SELECTABLE\fR
+The designated item cannot be selected.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_CONNECTED\fR
+No items are connected to the menu.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_REQUEST_DENIED\fR
+The menu driver could not process the request.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X) and 3X pages whose names begin "menu_" for detailed
+descriptions of the entry points.
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header files
+\fB<curses.h>\fR and \fB<eti.h>\fR.
+
+In your library list, libmenu.a should be before libncurses.a; that is,
+you want to say `-lmenu -lncurses', not the other way around (which would
+give you a link error using GNU \fBld\fR(1) and many other linkers).
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for ncurses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_attribs.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_attribs.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3577db53d6aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_attribs.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_attribs.3x,v 1.6 1998/11/29 01:09:20 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_attributes 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_attributes\fR - color and attribute control for menus
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_menu_fore(MENU *menu, chtype attr);
+.br
+chtype menu_fore(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+int set_menu_back(MENU *menu, chtype attr);
+.br
+chtype menu_back(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+int set_menu_grey(MENU *menu, chtype attr);
+.br
+chtype menu_grey(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+int set_menu_pad(MENU *menu, int pad);
+.br
+int menu_pad(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_menu_fore\fR sets the foreground attribute of
+\fImenu\fR. This is the highlight used for selected menu items.
+\fBmenu_fore\fR returns the foreground attribute. The default
+is \fBA_STANDOUT\fR.
+
+The function \fBset_menu_back\fR sets the background attribute of
+\fImenu\fR. This is the highlight used for selectable (but not currently
+selected) menu items. The function \fBmenu_back\fR returns the background
+attribute. The default is \fBA_NORMAL\fR.
+
+The function \fBset_menu_grey\fR sets the grey attribute of \fImenu\fR. This is
+the highlight used for un-selectable menu items in menus that permit more than
+one selection. The function \fBmenu_grey\fR returns the grey attribute.
+The default is \fBA_UNDERLINE\fR.
+
+The function \fBset_menu_pad\fR sets the character used to fill the space
+between the name and description parts of a menu item. \fBmenu_pad\fR returns
+the given menu's pad character. The default is a blank.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+These routines return one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X) and 3X pages whose names begin "menu_" for detailed
+descriptions of the entry points.
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_cursor.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_cursor.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2cc58507de66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_cursor.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_cursor.3x,v 1.5 1998/11/29 01:09:30 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_cursor 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_cursor\fR - position a menu's cursor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int pos_menu_cursor(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBpos_menu_cursor\fR restores the cursor to the current position
+associated with the menu's selected item. This is useful after \fBcurses\fR
+routines have been called to do screen-painting in response to a menu select.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+This routine returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_POSTED\fR
+The menu has not been posted.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_driver.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_driver.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cffd08d850ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_driver.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.'" $Id: menu_driver.3x,v 1.8 1999/01/09 22:55:18 tom Exp $
+.TH menu_driver 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_driver\fR - command-processing loop of the menu system
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int menu_driver(MENU *menu, int c);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Once a menu has been posted (displayed), you should funnel input events to it
+through \fBmenu_driver\fR. This routine has three major input cases; either
+the input is a menu navigation request, it's a printable ASCII character or it
+is the KEY_MOUSE special key associated with an mouse event.
+The menu driver requests are as follows:
+.TP 5
+REQ_LEFT_ITEM
+Move left to an item.
+.TP 5
+REQ_RIGHT_ITEM
+Move right to an item.
+.TP 5
+REQ_UP_ITEM
+Move up to an item.
+.TP 5
+REQ_DOWN_ITEM
+Move down to an item.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_ULINE
+Scroll up a line.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_DLINE
+Scroll down a line.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_DPAGE
+Scroll down a page.
+.TP 5
+REQ_SCR_UPAGE
+Scroll up a page.
+.TP 5
+REQ_FIRST_ITEM
+Move to the first item.
+.TP 5
+REQ_LAST_ITEM
+Move to the last item.
+.TP 5
+REQ_NEXT_ITEM
+Move to the next item.
+.TP 5
+REQ_PREV_ITEM
+Move to the previous item.
+.TP 5
+REQ_TOGGLE_ITEM
+Select/deselect an item.
+.TP 5
+REQ_CLEAR_PATTERN
+Clear the menu pattern buffer.
+.TP 5
+REQ_BACK_PATTERN
+Delete the previous character from the pattern buffer.
+.TP 5
+REQ_NEXT_MATCH
+Move to the next item matching the pattern match.
+.TP 5
+REQ_PREV_MATCH
+Move to the previous item matching the pattern match.
+.PP
+If the second argument is a printable ASCII character, the code appends
+it to the pattern buffer and attempts to move to the next item matching
+the new pattern. If there is no such match, \fBmenu_driver\fR returns
+\fBE_NO_MATCH\fR and deletes the appended character from the buffer.
+.PP
+If the second argument is one of the above pre-defined requests, the
+corresponding action is performed.
+.PP
+If the second argument is the KEY_MOUSE special key, the associated
+mouse event is translated into one of the above pre-defined requests.
+Currently only clicks in the user window (e.g. inside the menu display
+area or the decoration window) are handled. If you click above the
+display region of the menu, a REQ_SCR_ULINE is generated, if you
+doubleclick a REQ_SCR_UPAGE is generated and if you tripleclick a
+REQ_FIRST_ITEM is generated. If you click below the display region of
+the menu, a REQ_SCR_DLINE is generated, if you doubleclick a REQ_SCR_DPAGE
+is generated and if you tripleclick a REQ_LAST_ITEM is generated. If you
+click at an item inside the display area of the menu, the menu cursor
+is positioned to that item. If you double-click at an item a REQ_TOGGLE_ITEM
+is generated and \fBE_UNKNOWN_COMMAND\fR is returned. This return value makes
+sense, because a double click usually means that an item-specific action should
+be returned. It's exactly the purpose of this return value to signal that an
+application specific command should be executed. If a translation
+into a request was done, \fBmenu_driver\fR returns the result of this request.
+If you clicked outside the user window or the mouse event couldn't be translated
+into a menu request an \fBE_REQUEST_DENIED\fR is returned.
+.PP
+If the second argument is neither printable ASCII nor one of the above
+pre-defined menu requests or KEY_MOUSE, the drive assumes it is an application-specific
+command and returns \fBE_UNKNOWN_COMMAND\fR. Application-defined commands
+should be defined relative to \fBMAX_COMMAND\fR, the maximum value of these
+pre-defined requests.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+\fBmenu_driver\fR return one of the following error codes:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_STATE\fR
+Routine was called from an initialization or termination function.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_POSTED\fR
+The menu has not been posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_UNKNOWN_COMMAND\fR
+The menu driver code saw an unknown request code.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NO_MATCH\fR
+Character failed to match.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_REQUEST_DENIED\fR
+The menu driver could not process the request.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header files
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions. The support for mouse events is ncurses specific.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_format.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_format.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..57c77a390ede
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_format.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_format.3x,v 1.7 1998/11/29 01:09:39 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_format 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_format\fR - set and get menu sizes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_menu_format(MENU *menu, int rows, int cols);
+.br
+int menu_format(const MENU *menu, int *rows, int *cols);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_menu_format\fR sets the maximum display size of the given
+menu. If this size is too small to display all menu items, the menu will be
+made scrollable. If this size is larger than the menus subwindow and the
+subwindow is too small to display all menu items, \fBpost_menu()\fR will fail.
+
+The default format is 16 rows, 1 column. Calling \fBset_menu_format\fR with a
+null menu pointer will change this default. A zero row or column argument to
+\fBset_menu_format\fR is interpreted as a request not to change the current
+value.
+
+The function \fBmenu_format\fR returns the maximum-size constraints for the
+given menu into the storage addressed by \fBrows\fR and \fBcols\fR.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+These routines returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_POSTED\fR
+The menu is already posted.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_hook.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_hook.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..531528a60783
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_hook.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_hook.3x,v 1.6 1998/11/29 01:09:47 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_hook 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_hook\fR - set hooks for automatic invocation by applications
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_item_init(MENU *menu, void (*func)(MENU *));
+.br
+void (*)(MENU *) item_init(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+int set_item_term(MENU *menu, void (*func)(MENU *));
+.br
+void (*)(MENU *) item_term(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+int set_menu_init(MENU *menu, void (*func)(MENU *));
+.br
+void (*)(MENU *) menu_init(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+int set_menu_term(MENU *menu, void (*func)(MENU *));
+.br
+void (*)(MENU *) menu_term(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions make it possible to set hook functions to be called at various
+points in the automatic processing of input event codes by \fBmenu_driver\fR.
+
+The function \fBset_item_init\fR sets a hook to be called at menu-post time and
+each time the selected item changes (after the change). \fBitem_init\fR
+returns the current item init hook, if any (\fBNULL\fR if there is no such
+hook).
+
+The function \fBset_item_term\fR sets a hook to be called at menu-unpost time
+and each time the selected item changes (before the change). \fBitem_term\fR
+returns the current item term hook, if any (\fBNULL\fR if there is no such
+hook).
+
+The function \fBset_menu_init\fR sets a hook to be called at menu-post time and
+just after the top row on the menu changes once it is posted. \fBmenu_init\fR
+returns the current menu init hook, if any (\fBNULL\fR if there is no such
+hook).
+
+The function \fBset_menu_term\fR sets a hook to be called at menu-unpost time
+and just before the top row on the menu changes once it is posted.
+\fBmenu_term\fR returns the current menu term hook, if any (\fBNULL\fR if there
+is no such hook).
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return pointers return \fBNULL\fR on error. Other routines
+return one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_items.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_items.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7ec7db5604ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_items.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_items.3x,v 1.5 1998/11/29 01:09:56 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_items 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_items\fR - make and break connections between items and menus
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_menu_items(MENU *menu, ITEM **items);
+.br
+ITEM **menu_items(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+int item_count(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_menu_items\fR changes the item pointer array of the given
+\fImenu\fR. The array must be terminated by a \fBNULL\fR.
+
+The function \fBmenu_items\fR returns the item array of the given menu.
+
+The function \fBitem_count\fR returns the count of items in \fImenu\fR.
+.SH RETURN VALUES
+The function \fBmenu_items\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error.
+
+The function \fBitem_count\fR returns \fBERR\fR (the general \fBcurses\fR error
+return value) on error.
+
+The function \fBset_menu_items\fR returns one of the following codes on error:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_POSTED\fR
+The menu is already posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_CONNECTED\fR
+No items are connected to the menu.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+
+The SVr4 menu library documentation specifies the \fBitem_count\fR error value
+as -1 (which is the value of \fBERR\fR).
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_mark.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_mark.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..72ea000335e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_mark.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_mark.3x,v 1.6 1998/11/29 01:10:03 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_mark 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_mark\fR - get and set the menu mark string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_menu_mark(MENU *menu, const char *mark);
+.br
+const char *menu_mark(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+In order to make menu selections visible on older terminals without
+highlighting or color capability, the menu library marks selected items
+in a menu with a prefix string.
+
+The function \fBset_menu_mark\fR sets the mark string for the given menu.
+Calling \fBset_menu_mark\fR with a null menu item will abolish the mark string.
+Note that changing the length of the mark string for a menu while the
+menu is posted is likely to produce unhelpful behavior.
+
+The default string is "-" (a dash). Calling \fBset_menu_mark\fR with
+a \fBNULL\fR menu argument will change this default.
+
+The function \fBmenu_mark\fR returns the menu's mark string (or \fBNULL\fR if
+there is none).
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function \fBmenu_mark\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error. The function
+\fBset_menu_mark\fR may return the following error codes:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_new.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_new.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c53bd9b8cb65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_new.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_new.3x,v 1.7 1998/11/29 01:10:13 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_new 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_new\fR - create and destroy menus
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+MENU *new_menu(ITEM **items);
+.br
+int free_menu(MENU *menu);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBnew_menu\fR creates a new menu connected to a specified item
+pointer array (which must be \fBNULL\fR-terminated).
+
+The function \fBfree_menu\fR disconnects \fImenu\fR from its item array
+and frees the storage allocated for the menu.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function \fBnew_menu\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error.
+
+The function \fBfree_menu\fR returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_POSTED\fR
+The menu has already been posted.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_opts.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_opts.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..30cad58d4957
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_opts.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_opts.3x,v 1.7 1998/11/29 01:10:21 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_opts 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_opts\fR - set and get menu options
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_menu_opts(MENU *menu, OPTIONS opts);
+.br
+int menu_opts_on(MENU *menu, OPTIONS opts);
+.br
+int menu_opts_off(MENU *menu, OPTIONS opts);
+.br
+OPTIONS menu_opts(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_menu_opts\fR sets all the given menu's option bits (menu
+option bits may be logically-OR'ed together).
+
+The function \fBmenu_opts_on\fR turns on the given option bits, and leaves
+others alone.
+
+The function \fBmenu_opts_off\fR turns off the given option bits, and leaves
+others alone.
+
+The function \fBmenu_opts\fR returns the menu's current option bits.
+
+The following options are defined (all are on by default):
+.TP 5
+O_ONEVALUE
+Only one item can be selected for this menu.
+.TP 5
+O_SHOWDESC
+Display the item descriptions when the menu is posted.
+.TP 5
+O_ROWMAJOR
+Display the menu in row-major order.
+.TP 5
+O_IGNORECASE
+Ignore the case when pattern-matching.
+.TP 5
+O_SHOWMATCH
+Move the cursor to within the item name while pattern-matching.
+.TP 5
+O_NONCYCLIC
+Don't wrap around next-item and previous-item,
+requests to the other end of the menu.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Except for \fBmenu_opts\fR, each routine returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_POSTED\fR
+The menu is already posted.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_pattern.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_pattern.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..693ebe35729a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_pattern.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.'" $Id: menu_pattern.3x,v 1.5 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH menu_pattern 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_pattern\fR - get and set a menu's pattern buffer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_menu_pattern(MENU *menu, const char *pattern);
+.br
+char *menu_pattern(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Every menu has an associated pattern match buffer. As input events that are
+printable ASCII characters come in, they are appended to this match buffer
+and tested for a match, as described in \fBmenu_driver\fR(3X).
+
+The function \fBset_menu_pattern\fR sets the pattern buffer for the given menu
+and tries to find the first matching item. If it succeeds, that item becomes
+current; if not, the current item does not change.
+
+The function \fBmenu_pattern\fR returns the pattern buffer of the given
+\fImenu\fR.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function \fBmenu_pattern\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error. The function
+\fBset_menu_pattern\fR may return the following error codes:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NO_MATCH\fR
+Character failed to match.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_post.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_post.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a4182d649520
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_post.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_post.3x,v 1.7 1998/11/29 01:10:33 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_post 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_post\fR - write or erase menus from associated subwindows
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int post_menu(MENU *menu);
+.br
+int unpost_menu(MENU *menu);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBpost_menu\fR displays a menu to its associated subwindow. To
+trigger physical display of the subwindow, use \fBrefresh\fR or some equivalent
+\fBcurses\fR routine (the implicit \fBdoupdate\fR triggered by an \fBcurses\fR
+input request will do). \fBpost_menu\fR resets the selection status of all items.
+
+The function \fBunpost_menu\fR erases menu from its associated subwindow.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+These routines return one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_POSTED\fR
+The menu has already been posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_STATE\fR
+Routine was called from an initialization or termination function.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NO_ROOM\fR
+Menu is too large for its window. You should consider to use
+\fBset_menu_format()\fR to solve the problem.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_POSTED\fR
+The menu has not been posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_CONNECTED\fR
+No items are connected to the menu.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_requestname.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_requestname.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f4b646a455fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_requestname.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_requestname.3x,v 1.6 1998/11/29 01:10:40 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_requestname 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_requestname\fR - handle printable menu request names
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+const char *menu_request_name(int request);
+.br
+int menu_request_by_name(const char *name);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBmenu_request_name\fR returns the printable name of a menu
+request code.
+.br
+The function \fBmenu_request_by_name\fR searches in the name-table for a request
+with the given name and returns its request code. Otherwise E_NO_MATCH is returned.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+\fBmenu_request_name\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error and sets errno
+to \fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR.
+.br
+\fBmenu_request_by_name\fR returns \fBE_NO_MATCH\fR on error.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines are specific to ncurses. They were not supported on
+Version 7, BSD or System V implementations. It is recommended that
+any code depending on them be conditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_spacing.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_spacing.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0480b3c02d4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_spacing.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_spacing.3x,v 1.5 1998/11/29 01:10:51 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_spacing 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_spacing\fR - Control spacing between menu items.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_menu_spacing(MENU *menu,
+ int spc_description
+ int spc_rows,
+ int spc_columns);
+.br
+int menu_spacing(const MENU *menu,
+ int* spc_description
+ int* spc_rows,
+ int* spc_columns);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_menu_spacing\fR sets the spacing informations for the menu.
+\fBspc_description\fR controls the number of spaces between an item name and an item
+description. It must not be larger than \fBTABSIZE\fR. The menu system puts in the
+middle of this spacing area the pad character. The remaining parts are filled with
+spaces.
+\fBspc_rows\fR controls the number of rows that are used for an item. It must not be
+larger than 3. The menu system inserts then blank lines between item rows, these lines
+will contain the pad character in the appropriate positions.
+\fBspc_columns\fR controls the number of blanks between columns of items. It must not
+be larger than TABSIZE.
+A value of 0 for all the spacing values resets them to the default, which is 1 for all
+of them.
+.br
+The function \fBmenu_spacing\fR passes back the spacing info for the menu. If a
+pointer is NULL, this specific info is simply not returned.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Both routines return \fBE_OK\fR on success. \fBset_menu_spacing\fR may return
+\fBE_POSTED\fR if the menu is posted, or \fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR if one of the
+spacing values is out of range.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines are specific to ncurses. They were not supported on
+Version 7, BSD or System V implementations. It is recommended that
+any code depending on them be conditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_userptr.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_userptr.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1fe354183d83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_userptr.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_userptr.3x,v 1.6 1998/11/29 01:11:02 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_userptr 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_userptr\fR - associate application data with a menu item
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_menu_userptr(MENU *menu, void *userptr);
+.br
+void *menu_userptr(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Every menu and every menu item has a field that can be used to hold
+application-specific data (that is, the menu-driver code leaves it alone).
+These functions get and set the menu user pointer field.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Except for \fBmenu_userptr\fR (which returns \fBNULL\fR on error), each
+function returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+
+The user pointer should be a void pointer. We leave it as a char pointer for
+SVr4 compatibility.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_win.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_win.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..336da44b0c5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/menu_win.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: menu_win.3x,v 1.6 1998/11/29 01:11:11 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH menu_win 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmenu_win\fR - make and break menu window and subwindow associations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_menu_win(MENU *menu, WINDOW *win);
+.br
+WINDOW *menu_win(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+int set_menu_sub(MENU *menu, WINDOW *sub);
+.br
+WINDOW *menu_sub(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+int scale_menu(const MENU *menu, int *rows, int *columns);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Every menu has an associated pair of \fBcurses\fR windows. The menu window
+displays any title and border associated with the window; the menu subwindow
+displays the items of the menu that are currently available for selection.
+
+The first four functions get and set those windows. It is not necessary to set
+either window; by default, the driver code uses \fBstdscr\fR for both.
+
+In the \fBset_\fR functions, window argument of \fBNULL\fR is treated as though
+it were \fBstsdcr\fR. A menu argument of \fBNULL\fR is treated as a request
+to change the system default menu window or subwindow.
+
+The function \fBscale_menu\fR returns the minimum size required for the
+subwindow of \fImenu\fR.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return pointers return \fBNULL\fR on error. Routines that return
+an integer return one of the following error codes:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_POSTED\fR
+The menu has already been posted.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_CONNECTED\fR
+No items are connected to the menu.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_current.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_current.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..179a23be3b2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_current.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: mitem_current.3x,v 1.9 1998/12/26 19:52:34 tom Exp $
+.TH mitem_current 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmitem_current\fR - set and get current_menu_item
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_current_item(MENU *menu, const ITEM *item);
+.br
+ITEM *current_item(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+int set_top_row(MENU *menu, int row);
+.br
+int top_row(const MENU *menu);
+.br
+int item_index(const ITEM *item);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_current_item\fR sets the current item (the item on which
+the menu cursor is positioned). \fBcurrent_item\fR returns a pointer to the
+current item in the given menu.
+
+The function \fBset_top_row\fR sets the top row of the menu to show the given
+row (the top row is initially 0, and is reset to this value whenever the
+\fBO_ROWMAJOR\fR option is toggled). The item leftmost on the given row
+becomes current. The function \fBtop_row\fR returns the number of the top menu
+row being displayed.
+
+The function \fBitem_index\fR returns the (zero-origin) index of \fIitem\fR in
+the menu's item pointer list.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+\fBcurrent_item\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error.
+
+\fBtop_row\fR and \fBitem_index\fR return \fBERR\fR (the general \fBcurses\fR
+error value) on error.
+
+\fBset_current_item\fR and \fBset_top_row\fR return one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_STATE\fR
+Routine was called from an initialization or termination function.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_NOT_CONNECTED\fR
+No items are connected to the menu.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+
+The SVr4 menu library documentation specifies the \fBtop_row\fR and
+\fBindex_item\fR error value as -1 (which is the value of \fBERR\fR).
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_name.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_name.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..007752e0bbe4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_name.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: mitem_name.3x,v 1.5 1998/11/29 01:11:29 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH mitem_name 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmitem_name\fR - get menu item name and description fields
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+const char *item_name(const ITEM *item);
+.br
+const char *item_description(const ITEM *item);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBitem_name\fR returns the name part of the given item.
+.br
+The function \fBitem_description\fR returns the description part of the given
+item.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+These routines returns \fBNULL\fR on error.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_new.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_new.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0653840167bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_new.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: mitem_new.3x,v 1.7 1998/11/29 01:11:38 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH mitem_new 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmitem_new\fR - create and destroy menu items
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+ITEM *new_item(const char *name, const char *description);
+.br
+int free_item(ITEM *item);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBnew_item\fR allocates a new item and initializes it from the
+\fBname\fR and \fBdescription\fR pointers. Please notice that the item stores
+only the pointers to the name and description. Those pointers must be valid
+during the lifetime of the item. So you should be very carefull with names
+or descriptions allocated on the stack of some routines.
+.br
+The function \fBfree_item\fR de-allocates an item. Please notice that it
+is the responsibility of the application to release the memory for the
+name or the description of the item.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function \fBnew_item\fR returns \fBNULL\fR on error.
+
+The function \fBfree_item\fR returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_BAD_ARGUMENT\fR
+Routine detected an incorrect or out-of-range argument.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_CONNECTED\fR
+Item is connected to a menu.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_opts.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_opts.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..99e4e5ea7e99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_opts.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: mitem_opts.3x,v 1.6 1998/11/29 01:12:37 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH mitem_opts 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmitem_opts\fR - set and get menu item options
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_item_opts(ITEM *item, OPTIONS opts);
+.br
+int item_opts_on(ITEM *item, OPTIONS opts);
+.br
+int item_opts_off(ITEM *item, OPTIONS opts);
+.br
+OPTIONS item_opts(const ITEM *item);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The function \fBset_item_opts\fR sets all the given item's option bits (menu
+option bits may be logically-OR'ed together).
+
+The function \fBitem_opts_on\fR turns on the given option bits, and leaves
+others alone.
+
+The function \fBitem_opts_off\fR turns off the given option bits, and leaves
+others alone.
+
+The function \fBitem_opts\fR returns the item's current option bits.
+
+There is only one defined option bit mask, \fBO_SELECTABLE\fR. When this is
+on, the item may be selected during menu processing. This option defaults
+to on.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Except for \fBitem_opts\fR, each routine returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_userptr.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_userptr.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2dd564fd61e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_userptr.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: mitem_userptr.3x,v 1.6 1998/11/29 01:12:47 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH mitem_userptr 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmitem_userptr\fR - associate application data with a menu item
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_item_userptr(ITEM *item, void *userptr);
+.br
+void *item_userptr(const ITEM *item);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Every menu item has a field that can be used to hold application-specific data
+(that is, the menu-driver code leaves it alone). These functions get and set
+that field.
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Except for \fBitem_userptr\fR (which returns \fBNULL\fR on error), each function returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+
+The user pointer should be a void pointer. We leave it as a char pointer for
+SVr4 compatibility.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_value.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_value.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..680fda8869c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_value.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.'" $Id: mitem_value.3x,v 1.4 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH mitem_value 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmitem_value\fR - set and get menu item values
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+int set_item_value(ITEM *item, bool value);
+.br
+bool item_value(const ITEM *item);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If you turn off the menu option \fBO_ONEVALUE\fR (e.g., with
+\fBset_menu_opts\fR or \fBmenu_opts_off\fR; see \fBmenu_opts\fR(3X)), the menu
+becomes multi-valued; that is, more than one item may simultaneously be
+selected.
+
+In a multi_valued menu, you can used \fBset_item_value\fR to select the
+given menu item (second argument \fBTRUE\fR) or deselect it (second argument
+\fBFALSE\fR).
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function \fBset_item_value\fR returns one of the following:
+.TP 5
+\fBE_OK\fR
+The routine succeeded.
+.TP 5
+\fBE_SYSTEM_ERROR\fR
+System error occurred (see \fBerrno\fR).
+.TP 5
+\fBE_REQUEST_DENIED\fR
+The menu driver could not process the request.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_visible.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_visible.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8f9039c2f6db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/mitem_visible.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: mitem_visible.3x,v 1.5 1998/11/29 01:12:55 Rick.Ohnemus Exp $
+.TH mitem_visible 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBmitem_visible\fR - check visibility of a menu item
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <menu.h>\fR
+.br
+bool item_visible(const ITEM *item);
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+A menu item is visible when it is in the portion of a posted menu that
+is mapped onto the screen (if the menu is scrollable, in particular, this
+portion will be smaller than the whole menu).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBmenu\fR(3X).
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<menu.h>\fR automatically includes the header file
+\fB<curses.h>\fR.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+These routines emulate the System V menu library. They were not supported on
+Version 7 or BSD versions.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Juergen Pfeifer. Manual pages and adaptation for new curses by Eric
+S. Raymond.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/ncurses.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/ncurses.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..afbbe277c786
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/ncurses.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,912 @@
+'\" t
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: ncurses.3x,v 1.34 1999/07/24 21:37:35 tom Exp $
+.hy 0
+.TH ncurses 3X ""
+.ds n 5
+.ds d @DATADIR@/terminfo
+.SH NAME
+\fBncurses\fR - CRT screen handling and optimization package
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBncurses\fR library routines give the user a terminal-independent method
+of updating character screens with reasonable optimization. This
+implementation is ``new curses'' (ncurses) and is the approved replacement for
+4.4BSD classic curses, which has been discontinued.
+
+The \fBncurses\fR routines emulate the \fBcurses\fR(3X) library of System V
+Release 4 UNIX, and the XPG4 curses standard (XSI curses) but the \fBncurses\fR
+library is freely redistributable in source form. Differences from the SVr4
+curses are summarized under the EXTENSIONS and BUGS sections below and
+described in detail in the EXTENSIONS and BUGS sections of individual man
+pages.
+
+A program using these routines must be linked with the \fB-lncurses\fR option,
+or (if it has been generated) with the debugging library \fB-lncurses_g\fR.
+(Your system integrator may also have installed these libraries under
+the names \fB-lcurses\fR and \fB-lcurses_g\fR.)
+The ncurses_g library generates trace logs (in a file called 'trace' in the
+current directory) that describe curses actions.
+
+The \fBncurses\fR package supports: overall screen, window and pad
+manipulation; output to windows and pads; reading terminal input; control over
+terminal and \fBcurses\fR input and output options; environment query
+routines; color manipulation; use of soft label keys; terminfo capabilities;
+and access to low-level terminal-manipulation routines.
+
+To initialize the routines, the routine \fBinitscr\fR or \fBnewterm\fR
+must be called before any of the other routines that deal with windows
+and screens are used. The routine \fBendwin\fR must be called before
+exiting. To get character-at-a-time input without echoing (most
+interactive, screen oriented programs want this), the following
+sequence should be used:
+
+ \fBinitscr(); cbreak(); noecho();\fR
+
+Most programs would additionally use the sequence:
+
+ \fBnonl();\fR
+ \fBintrflush(stdscr, FALSE);\fR
+ \fBkeypad(stdscr, TRUE);\fR
+
+Before a \fBcurses\fR program is run, the tab stops of the terminal
+should be set and its initialization strings, if defined, must be
+output. This can be done by executing the \fBtput init\fR command
+after the shell environment variable \fBTERM\fR has been exported.
+\fBtset(1)\fR is usually responsible for doing this.
+[See \fBterminfo\fR(\*n) for further details.]
+
+The \fBncurses\fR library permits manipulation of data structures,
+called \fIwindows\fR, which can be thought of as two-dimensional
+arrays of characters representing all or part of a CRT screen. A
+default window called \fBstdscr\fR, which is the size of the terminal
+screen, is supplied. Others may be created with \fBnewwin\fR.
+
+Note that \fBcurses\fR does not handle overlapping windows, that's done by
+the \fBpanel\fR(3X) library. This means that you can either use
+\fBstdscr\fR or divide the screen into tiled windows and not using
+\fBstdscr\fR at all. Mixing the two will result in unpredictable, and
+undesired, effects.
+
+Windows are referred to by variables declared as \fBWINDOW *\fR.
+These data structures are manipulated with routines described here and
+elsewhere in the \fBncurses\fR manual pages. Among which the most basic
+routines are \fBmove\fR and \fBaddch\fR. More general versions of
+these routines are included with names beginning with \fBw\fR,
+allowing the user to specify a window. The routines not beginning
+with \fBw\fR affect \fBstdscr\fR.)
+
+After using routines to manipulate a window, \fBrefresh\fR is called,
+telling \fBcurses\fR to make the user's CRT screen look like
+\fBstdscr\fR. The characters in a window are actually of type
+\fBchtype\fR, (character and attribute data) so that other information
+about the character may also be stored with each character.
+
+Special windows called \fIpads\fR may also be manipulated. These are windows
+which are not constrained to the size of the screen and whose contents need not
+be completely displayed. See \fBcurs_pad\fR(3X) for more information.
+
+In addition to drawing characters on the screen, video attributes and colors
+may be supported, causing the characters to show up in such modes as
+underlined, in reverse video, or in color on terminals that support such
+display enhancements. Line drawing characters may be specified to be output.
+On input, \fBcurses\fR is also able to translate arrow and function keys that
+transmit escape sequences into single values. The video attributes, line
+drawing characters, and input values use names, defined in \fB<curses.h>\fR,
+such as \fBA_REVERSE\fR, \fBACS_HLINE\fR, and \fBKEY_LEFT\fR.
+
+If the environment variables \fBLINES\fR and \fBCOLUMNS\fR are set, or if the
+program is executing in a window environment, line and column information in
+the environment will override information read by \fIterminfo\fR. This would
+effect a program running in an AT&T 630 layer, for example, where the size of a
+screen is changeable (see \fBENVIRONMENT\fR).
+
+If the environment variable \fBTERMINFO\fR is defined, any program using
+\fBcurses\fR checks for a local terminal definition before checking in the
+standard place. For example, if \fBTERM\fR is set to \fBatt4424\fR, then the
+compiled terminal definition is found in
+
+ \fB\*d/a/att4424\fR.
+
+(The \fBa\fR is copied from the first letter of \fBatt4424\fR to avoid
+creation of huge directories.) However, if \fBTERMINFO\fR is set to
+\fB$HOME/myterms\fR, \fBcurses\fR first checks
+
+ \fB$HOME/myterms/a/att4424\fR,
+
+and if that fails, it then checks
+
+ \fB\*d/a/att4424\fR.
+
+This is useful for developing experimental definitions or when write
+permission in \fB\*d\fR is not available.
+
+The integer variables \fBLINES\fR and \fBCOLS\fR are defined in
+\fB<curses.h>\fR and will be filled in by \fBinitscr\fR with the size of the
+screen. The constants \fBTRUE\fR and \fBFALSE\fR have the values \fB1\fR and
+\fB0\fR, respectively.
+
+The \fBcurses\fR routines also define the \fBWINDOW *\fR variable \fBcurscr\fR
+which is used for certain low-level operations like clearing and redrawing a
+screen containing garbage. The \fBcurscr\fR can be used in only a few
+routines.
+
+.SS Routine and Argument Names
+Many \fBcurses\fR routines have two or more versions. The routines prefixed
+with \fBw\fR require a window argument. The routines prefixed with \fBp\fR
+require a pad argument. Those without a prefix generally use \fBstdscr\fR.
+
+The routines prefixed with \fBmv\fR require a \fIy\fR and \fIx\fR
+coordinate to move to before performing the appropriate action. The
+\fBmv\fR routines imply a call to \fBmove\fR before the call to the
+other routine. The coordinate \fIy\fR always refers to the row (of
+the window), and \fIx\fR always refers to the column. The upper
+left-hand corner is always (0,0), not (1,1).
+
+The routines prefixed with \fBmvw\fR take both a window argument and
+\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates. The window argument is always
+specified before the coordinates.
+
+In each case, \fIwin\fR is the window affected, and \fIpad\fR is the
+pad affected; \fIwin\fR and \fIpad\fR are always pointers to type
+\fBWINDOW\fR.
+
+Option setting routines require a Boolean flag \fIbf\fR with the value
+\fBTRUE\fR or \fBFALSE\fR; \fIbf\fR is always of type \fBbool\fR. The
+variables \fIch\fR and \fIattrs\fR below are always of type
+\fBchtype\fR. The types \fBWINDOW\fR, \fBSCREEN\fR, \fBbool\fR, and
+\fBchtype\fR are defined in \fB<curses.h>\fR. The type \fBTERMINAL\fR
+is defined in \fB<term.h>\fR. All other arguments are integers.
+
+.SS Routine Name Index
+The following table lists each \fBcurses\fR routine and the name of
+the manual page on which it is described. Routines flagged with `*'
+are ncurses-specific, not described by XPG4 or present in SVr4.
+
+.TS
+center tab(/);
+l l
+l l .
+\fBcurses\fR Routine Name/Manual Page Name
+=
+addch/\fBcurs_addch\fR(3X)
+addchnstr/\fBcurs_addchstr\fR(3X)
+addchstr/\fBcurs_addchstr\fR(3X)
+addnstr/\fBcurs_addstr\fR(3X)
+addstr/\fBcurs_addstr\fR(3X)
+attr_get/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+attr_off/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+attr_on/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+attr_set/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+attroff/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+attron/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+attrset/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+baudrate/\fBcurs_termattrs\fR(3X)
+beep/\fBcurs_beep\fR(3X)
+bkgd/\fBcurs_bkgd\fR(3X)
+bkgdset/\fBcurs_bkgd\fR(3X)
+border/\fBcurs_border\fR(3X)
+box/\fBcurs_border\fR(3X)
+can_change_color/\fBcurs_color\fR(3X)
+cbreak/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+chgat/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+clear/\fBcurs_clear\fR(3X)
+clearok/\fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+clrtobot/\fBcurs_clear\fR(3X)
+clrtoeol/\fBcurs_clear\fR(3X)
+color_content/\fBcurs_color\fR(3X)
+color_set/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+copywin/\fBcurs_overlay\fR(3X)
+curs_set/\fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X)
+def_prog_mode/\fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X)
+def_shell_mode/\fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X)
+define_key/\fBdefine_key\fR(3X)*
+del_curterm/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+delay_output/\fBcurs_util\fR(3X)
+delch/\fBcurs_delch\fR(3X)
+deleteln/\fBcurs_deleteln\fR(3X)
+delscreen/\fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X)
+delwin/\fBcurs_window\fR(3X)
+derwin/\fBcurs_window\fR(3X)
+doupdate/\fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X)
+dupwin/\fBcurs_window\fR(3X)
+echo/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+echochar/\fBcurs_addch\fR(3X)
+endwin/\fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X)
+erase/\fBcurs_clear\fR(3X)
+erasechar/\fBcurs_termattrs\fR(3X)
+filter/\fBcurs_util\fR(3X)
+flash/\fBcurs_beep\fR(3X)
+flushinp/\fBcurs_util\fR(3X)
+getbegyx/\fBcurs_getyx\fR(3X)
+getbkgd/\fBcurs_bkgd\fR(3X)
+getch/\fBcurs_getch\fR(3X)
+getmaxyx/\fBcurs_getyx\fR(3X)
+getmouse/\fBcurs_mouse\fR(3X)*
+getnstr/\fBcurs_getstr\fR(3X)
+getparyx/\fBcurs_getyx\fR(3X)
+getstr/\fBcurs_getstr\fR(3X)
+getsyx/\fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X)
+getwin/\fBcurs_util\fR(3X)
+getyx/\fBcurs_getyx\fR(3X)
+halfdelay/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+has_colors/\fBcurs_color\fR(3X)
+has_ic/\fBcurs_termattrs\fR(3X)
+has_il/\fBcurs_termattrs\fR(3X)
+has_key/\fBcurs_getch\fR(3X)*
+hline/\fBcurs_border\fR(3X)
+idcok/\fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+idlok/\fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+immedok/\fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+inch/\fBcurs_inch\fR(3X)
+inchnstr/\fBcurs_inchstr\fR(3X)
+inchstr/\fBcurs_inchstr\fR(3X)
+init_color/\fBcurs_color\fR(3X)
+init_pair/\fBcurs_color\fR(3X)
+initscr/\fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X)
+innstr/\fBcurs_instr\fR(3X)
+insch/\fBcurs_insch\fR(3X)
+insdelln/\fBcurs_deleteln\fR(3X)
+insertln/\fBcurs_deleteln\fR(3X)
+insnstr/\fBcurs_insstr\fR(3X)
+insstr/\fBcurs_insstr\fR(3X)
+instr/\fBcurs_instr\fR(3X)
+intrflush/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+is_linetouched/\fBcurs_touch\fR(3X)
+is_wintouched/\fBcurs_touch\fR(3X)
+isendwin/\fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X)
+keyname/\fBcurs_util\fR(3X)
+keyok/\fBkeyok\fR(3X)*
+keypad/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+killchar/\fBcurs_termattrs\fR(3X)
+leaveok/\fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+longname/\fBcurs_termattrs\fR(3X)
+mcprint/\fBcurs_print\fR(3X)*
+meta/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+mouseinterval/\fBcurs_mouse\fR(3X)*
+mousemask/\fBcurs_mouse\fR(3X)*
+move/\fBcurs_move\fR(3X)
+mvaddch/\fBcurs_addch\fR(3X)
+mvaddchnstr/\fBcurs_addchstr\fR(3X)
+mvaddchstr/\fBcurs_addchstr\fR(3X)
+mvaddnstr/\fBcurs_addstr\fR(3X)
+mvaddstr/\fBcurs_addstr\fR(3X)
+mvchgat/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+mvcur/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+mvdelch/\fBcurs_delch\fR(3X)
+mvderwin/\fBcurs_window\fR(3X)
+mvgetch/\fBcurs_getch\fR(3X)
+mvgetnstr/\fBcurs_getstr\fR(3X)
+mvgetstr/\fBcurs_getstr\fR(3X)
+mvhline/\fBcurs_border\fR(3X)
+mvinch/\fBcurs_inch\fR(3X)
+mvinchnstr/\fBcurs_inchstr\fR(3X)
+mvinchstr/\fBcurs_inchstr\fR(3X)
+mvinnstr/\fBcurs_instr\fR(3X)
+mvinsch/\fBcurs_insch\fR(3X)
+mvinsnstr/\fBcurs_insstr\fR(3X)
+mvinsstr/\fBcurs_insstr\fR(3X)
+mvinstr/\fBcurs_instr\fR(3X)
+mvprintw/\fBcurs_printw\fR(3X)
+mvscanw/\fBcurs_scanw\fR(3X)
+mvwaddch/\fBcurs_addch\fR(3X)
+mvwaddchnstr/\fBcurs_addchstr\fR(3X)
+mvwaddchstr/\fBcurs_addchstr\fR(3X)
+mvwaddnstr/\fBcurs_addstr\fR(3X)
+mvwaddstr/\fBcurs_addstr\fR(3X)
+mvwchgat/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+mvwdelch/\fBcurs_delch\fR(3X)
+mvwgetch/\fBcurs_getch\fR(3X)
+mvwgetnstr/\fBcurs_getstr\fR(3X)
+mvwgetstr/\fBcurs_getstr\fR(3X)
+mvwhline/\fBcurs_border\fR(3X)
+mvwin/\fBcurs_window\fR(3X)
+mvwinch/\fBcurs_inch\fR(3X)
+mvwinchnstr/\fBcurs_inchstr\fR(3X)
+mvwinchstr/\fBcurs_inchstr\fR(3X)
+mvwinnstr/\fBcurs_instr\fR(3X)
+mvwinsch/\fBcurs_insch\fR(3X)
+mvwinsnstr/\fBcurs_insstr\fR(3X)
+mvwinsstr/\fBcurs_insstr\fR(3X)
+mvwinstr/\fBcurs_instr\fR(3X)
+mvwprintw/\fBcurs_printw\fR(3X)
+mvwscanw/\fBcurs_scanw\fR(3X)
+mvwvline/\fBcurs_border\fR(3X)
+napms/\fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X)
+newpad/\fBcurs_pad\fR(3X)
+newterm/\fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X)
+newwin/\fBcurs_window\fR(3X)
+nl/\fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+nocbreak/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+nodelay/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+noecho/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+nonl/\fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+noqiflush/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+noraw/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+notimeout/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+overlay/\fBcurs_overlay\fR(3X)
+overwrite/\fBcurs_overlay\fR(3X)
+pair_content/\fBcurs_color\fR(3X)
+pechochar/\fBcurs_pad\fR(3X)
+pnoutrefresh/\fBcurs_pad\fR(3X)
+prefresh/\fBcurs_pad\fR(3X)
+printw/\fBcurs_printw\fR(3X)
+putp/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+putwin/\fBcurs_util\fR(3X)
+qiflush/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+raw/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+redrawwin/\fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X)
+refresh/\fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X)
+reset_prog_mode/\fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X)
+reset_shell_mode/\fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X)
+resetty/\fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X)
+resizeterm/\fBresizeterm\fR(3X)*
+restartterm/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+ripoffline/\fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X)
+savetty/\fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X)
+scanw/\fBcurs_scanw\fR(3X)
+scr_dump/\fBcurs_scr_dump\fR(3X)
+scr_init/\fBcurs_scr_dump\fR(3X)
+scr_restore/\fBcurs_scr_dump\fR(3X)
+scr_set/\fBcurs_scr_dump\fR(3X)
+scrl/\fBcurs_scroll\fR(3X)
+scroll/\fBcurs_scroll\fR(3X)
+scrollok/\fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+set_curterm/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+set_term/\fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X)
+setscrreg/\fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+setsyx/\fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X)
+setterm/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+setupterm/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+slk_attr/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)*
+slk_attr_off/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_attr_on/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_attr_set/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_attroff/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_attron/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_attrset/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_clear/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_color/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_init/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_label/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_noutrefresh/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_refresh/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_restore/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_set/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+slk_touch/\fBcurs_slk\fR(3X)
+standend/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+standout/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+start_color/\fBcurs_color\fR(3X)
+subpad/\fBcurs_pad\fR(3X)
+subwin/\fBcurs_window\fR(3X)
+syncok/\fBcurs_window\fR(3X)
+termattrs/\fBcurs_termattrs\fR(3X)
+termname/\fBcurs_termattrs\fR(3X)
+tgetent/\fBcurs_termcap\fR(3X)
+tgetflag/\fBcurs_termcap\fR(3X)
+tgetnum/\fBcurs_termcap\fR(3X)
+tgetstr/\fBcurs_termcap\fR(3X)
+tgoto/\fBcurs_termcap\fR(3X)
+tigetflag/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+tigetnum/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+tigetstr/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+timeout/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+touchline/\fBcurs_touch\fR(3X)
+touchwin/\fBcurs_touch\fR(3X)
+tparm/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+tputs/\fBcurs_termcap\fR(3X)
+tputs/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+typeahead/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+unctrl/\fBcurs_util\fR(3X)
+ungetch/\fBcurs_getch\fR(3X)
+ungetmouse/\fBcurs_mouse\fR(3X)*
+untouchwin/\fBcurs_touch\fR(3X)
+use_default_colors/\fBdft_fgbg\fR(3X)*
+use_env/\fBcurs_util\fR(3X)
+vidattr/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+vidputs/\fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X)
+vline/\fBcurs_border\fR(3X)
+vw_printw/\fBcurs_printw\fR(3X)
+vw_scanw/\fBcurs_scanw\fR(3X)
+vwprintw/\fBcurs_printw\fR(3X)
+vwscanw/\fBcurs_scanw\fR(3X)
+waddch/\fBcurs_addch\fR(3X)
+waddchnstr/\fBcurs_addchstr\fR(3X)
+waddchstr/\fBcurs_addchstr\fR(3X)
+waddnstr/\fBcurs_addstr\fR(3X)
+waddstr/\fBcurs_addstr\fR(3X)
+wattr_get/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+wattr_off/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+wattr_on/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+wattr_set/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+wattroff/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+wattron/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+wattrset/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+wbkgd/\fBcurs_bkgd\fR(3X)
+wbkgdset/\fBcurs_bkgd\fR(3X)
+wborder/\fBcurs_border\fR(3X)
+wchgat/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+wclear/\fBcurs_clear\fR(3X)
+wclrtobot/\fBcurs_clear\fR(3X)
+wclrtoeol/\fBcurs_clear\fR(3X)
+wcolor_set/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+wcursyncup/\fBcurs_window\fR(3X)
+wdelch/\fBcurs_delch\fR(3X)
+wdeleteln/\fBcurs_deleteln\fR(3X)
+wechochar/\fBcurs_addch\fR(3X)
+wenclose/\fBcurs_mouse\fR(3X)*
+werase/\fBcurs_clear\fR(3X)
+wgetch/\fBcurs_getch\fR(3X)
+wgetnstr/\fBcurs_getstr\fR(3X)
+wgetstr/\fBcurs_getstr\fR(3X)
+whline/\fBcurs_border\fR(3X)
+winch/\fBcurs_inch\fR(3X)
+winchnstr/\fBcurs_inchstr\fR(3X)
+winchstr/\fBcurs_inchstr\fR(3X)
+winnstr/\fBcurs_instr\fR(3X)
+winsch/\fBcurs_insch\fR(3X)
+winsdelln/\fBcurs_deleteln\fR(3X)
+winsertln/\fBcurs_deleteln\fR(3X)
+winsnstr/\fBcurs_insstr\fR(3X)
+winsstr/\fBcurs_insstr\fR(3X)
+winstr/\fBcurs_instr\fR(3X)
+wmouse_trafo/\fBcurs_mouse\fR(3X)
+wmove/\fBcurs_move\fR(3X)
+wnoutrefresh/\fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X)
+wprintw/\fBcurs_printw\fR(3X)
+wredrawln/\fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X)
+wrefresh/\fBcurs_refresh\fR(3X)
+wresize/\fBwresize\fR(3X)*
+wscanw/\fBcurs_scanw\fR(3X)
+wscrl/\fBcurs_scroll\fR(3X)
+wsetscrreg/\fBcurs_outopts\fR(3X)
+wstandend/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+wstandout/\fBcurs_attr\fR(3X)
+wsyncdown/\fBcurs_window\fR(3X)
+wsyncup/\fBcurs_window\fR(3X)
+wtimeout/\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X)
+wtouchln/\fBcurs_touch\fR(3X)
+wvline/\fBcurs_border\fR(3X)
+.TE
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+Routines that return an integer return \fBERR\fR upon failure and an
+integer value other than \fBERR\fR upon successful completion, unless
+otherwise noted in the routine descriptions.
+
+All macros return the value of the \fBw\fR version, except \fBsetscrreg\fR,
+\fBwsetscrreg\fR, \fBgetyx\fR, \fBgetbegyx\fR, \fBgetmaxyx\fR. The return
+values of \fBsetscrreg\fR, \fBwsetscrreg\fR, \fBgetyx\fR, \fBgetbegyx\fR, and
+\fBgetmaxyx\fR are undefined (\fIi\fR.\fIe\fR., these should not be used as the
+right-hand side of assignment statements).
+
+Routines that return pointers return \fBNULL\fR on error.
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+The following environment symbols are useful for customizing the
+runtime behavior of the \fBncurses\fR library. The most important
+ones have been already discussed in detail.
+.TP 5
+BAUDRATE
+The debugging library checks this environment symbol when the application
+has redirected output to a file.
+The symbol's numeric value is used for the baudrate.
+If no value is found \fBncurses\fR uses 9600.
+This allows testers to construct repeatable test-cases
+that take into account costs that depend on baudrate.
+.TP 5
+CC
+When set, change occurrences of the command_character
+(i.e., the \fBcmdch\fP capability)
+of the loaded terminfo entries to the value of this symbol.
+Very few terminfo entries provide this feature.
+.TP 5
+COLUMNS
+Specify the width of the screen in characters.
+Applications running in a windowing environment usually are able to
+obtain the width of the window in which they are executing.
+If neither the $COLUMNS value nor the terminal's screen size is available,
+\fBncurses\fR uses the size which may be specified in the terminfo database
+(i.e., the \fBcols\fR capability).
+
+It is important that your application use a correct size for the screen.
+However, this is not always possible because your application may be
+running on a host which does not honor NAWS (Negotiations About Window
+Size), or because you are temporarily running as another user.
+
+Either COLUMNS or LINES symbols may be specified independently.
+This is mainly useful to circumvent legacy misfeatures of terminal descriptions,
+e.g., xterm which commonly specifies a 65 line screen.
+For best results, \fBlines\fR and \fBcols\fR should not be specified in
+a terminal description for terminals which are run as emulations.
+
+Use the \fBuse_env\fR function to disable this feature.
+.TP 5
+DISPLAY
+Provides a hint to ncurses that your terminal is an X terminal
+emulator such as \fBxterm\fP.
+If the \fBkmous\fP capability is set to the beginning of the xterm
+mouse response, e.g., "kmous=\E[M", then ncurses will send the terminal
+xterm's mouse initialization strings and allow appropriate replies.
+See the \fBcurs_mouse\fR(3X) manual page for programming information.
+.TP 5
+ESCDELAY
+Specifies the total time, in milliseconds, for which ncurses will
+await a character sequence, e.g., a function key.
+The default value, 1000 milliseconds, is enough for most uses.
+However, it is made a variable to accommodate unusual applications.
+
+The most common instance where you may wish to change this value
+is to work with slow hosts, e.g., running on a network.
+If the host cannot read characters rapidly enough, it will have the same
+effect as if the terminal did not send characters rapidly enough.
+The library will still see a timeout.
+
+Note that xterm mouse events are built up from character sequences
+received from the xterm.
+If your application makes heavy use of multiple-clicking, you may
+wish to lengthen this default value because the timeout applies
+to the composed multi-click event as well as the individual clicks.
+.TP 5
+HOME
+Tells \fBncurses\fR where your home directory is.
+That is where it may read and write auxiliary terminal descriptions:
+
+$HOME/.termcap
+.br
+$HOME/.terminfo
+.TP 5
+LINES
+Like COLUMNS, specify the height of the screen in characters.
+See COLUMNS for a detailed description.
+.TP 5
+MOUSE_BUTTONS_123
+This applies only to the OS/2 EMX port.
+It specifies the order of buttons on the mouse.
+OS/2 numbers a 3-button mouse inconsistently from other
+platforms:
+
+1 = left
+.br
+2 = right
+.br
+3 = middle.
+
+This symbol lets you customize the mouse.
+The symbol must be three numeric digits 1-3 in any order, e.g., 123 or 321.
+If it is not specified, \fBncurses\fR uses 132.
+.TP 5
+NCURSES_NO_PADDING
+Most of the terminal descriptions in the terminfo database are written
+for real "hardware" terminals.
+Many people use terminal emulators
+which run in a windowing environment and use curses-based applications.
+Terminal emulators can duplicate
+all of the important aspects of a hardware terminal, but they do not
+have the same limitations.
+The chief limitation of a hardware terminal from the standpoint
+of your application is the management of dataflow, i.e., timing.
+Unless a hardware terminal is interfaced into a terminal concentrator
+(which does flow control),
+it (or your application) must manage dataflow, preventing overruns.
+The cheapest solution (no hardware cost)
+is for your program to do this by pausing after
+operations that the terminal does slowly, such as clearing the display.
+
+As a result, many terminal descriptions (including the vt100)
+have delay times embedded. You may wish to use these descriptions,
+but not want to pay the performance penalty.
+
+Set the NCURSES_NO_PADDING symbol to disable all but mandatory
+padding. Mandatory padding is used as a part of special control
+sequences such as \fIflash\fR.
+.TP 5
+NCURSES_NO_SETBUF
+Normally \fBncurses\fR enables buffered output during terminal initialization.
+This is done (as in SVr4 curses) for performance reasons.
+For testing purposes, both of \fBncurses\fR and certain applications,
+this feature is made optional. Setting the NCURSES_NO_SETBUF variable
+disables output buffering, leaving the output in the original (usually
+line buffered) mode.
+.TP 5
+NCURSES_TRACE
+During initialization, the \fBncurses\fR debugging library
+checks the NCURSES_TRACE symbol.
+If it is defined, to a numeric value, \fBncurses\fR calls the \fBtrace\fR
+function, using that value as the argument.
+
+The argument values, which are defined in \fBcurses.h\fR, provide several
+types of information.
+When running with traces enabled, your application will write the
+file \fBtrace\fR to the current directory.
+.TP 5
+TERM
+Denotes your terminal type.
+Each terminal type is distinct, though many are similar.
+.TP 5
+TERMCAP
+If the \fBncurses\fR library has been configured with \fItermcap\fR
+support, \fBncurses\fR will check for a terminal's description in
+termcap form if it is not available in the terminfo database.
+
+The TERMCAP symbol contains either a terminal description (with
+newlines stripped out),
+or a file name telling where the information denoted by the TERM symbol exists.
+In either case, setting it directs \fBncurses\fR to ignore
+the usual place for this information, e.g., /etc/termcap.
+.TP 5
+TERMINFO
+Overrides the directory in which \fBncurses\fR searches for your terminal
+description.
+This is the simplest, but not the only way to change the list of directories.
+The complete list of directories in order follows:
+.RS
+.TP 3
+-
+the last directory to which \fBncurses\fR wrote, if any, is searched first.
+.TP 3
+-
+the directory specified by the TERMINFO symbol
+.TP 3
+-
+$HOME/.terminfo
+.TP 3
+-
+directories listed in the TERMINFO_DIRS symbol
+.TP 3
+-
+one or more directories whose names are configured and compiled into the
+ncurses library, e.g.,
+@DATADIR@/terminfo
+.RE
+.TP 5
+TERMINFO_DIRS
+Specifies a list of directories to search for terminal descriptions.
+The list is separated by colons (i.e., ":").
+All of the terminal descriptions are in terminfo form, which makes
+a subdirectory named for the first letter of the terminal names therein.
+.TP 5
+TERMPATH
+If TERMCAP does not hold a file name then \fBncurses\fR checks
+the TERMPATH symbol.
+This is a list of filenames separated by colons (i.e., ":").
+If the TERMPATH symbol is not set, \fBncurses\fR looks in the files
+/etc/termcap, /usr/share/misc/termcap and $HOME/.termcap, in that order.
+.SH FILES
+.TP 5
+@DATADIR@/tabset
+directory containing initialization files for the terminal capability database
+@DATADIR@/terminfo
+terminal capability database
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBterminfo\fR(\*n) and 3X pages whose names begin "curs_" for detailed routine
+descriptions.
+.SH EXTENSIONS
+The \fBncurses\fR library can be compiled with an option (\fB-DUSE_GETCAP\fR)
+that falls back to the old-style /etc/termcap file if the terminal setup code
+cannot find a terminfo entry corresponding to \fBTERM\fR. Use of this feature
+is not recommended, as it essentially includes an entire termcap compiler in
+the \fBncurses\fR startup code, at significant cost in core and startup cycles.
+
+The \fBncurses\fR library includes facilities for capturing mouse events on
+certain terminals (including xterm). See the \fBcurs_mouse\fR(3X)
+manual page for details.
+
+The \fBncurses\fR library includes facilities for responding to window
+resizing events, e.g., when running in an xterm.
+See the \fBresizeterm\fR(3X)
+and \fBwresize\fR(3X) manual pages for details.
+In addition, the library may be configured with a SIGWINCH handler.
+
+The \fBncurses\fR library extends the fixed set of function key capabilities
+of terminals by allowing the application designer to define additional
+key sequences at runtime.
+See the \fBdefine_key\fR(3X)
+and \fBkeyok\fR(3X) manual pages for details.
+
+The \fBncurses\fR library can exploit the capabilities of terminals which
+implement the ISO-6429 SGR 39 and SGR 49 controls, which allow an application
+to reset the terminal to its original foreground and background colors.
+From the users' perspective, the application is able to draw colored
+text on a background whose color is set independently, providing better
+control over color contrasts.
+See the \fBuse_default_colors\fR(3X) manual page for details.
+
+The \fBncurses\fR library includes a function for directing application output
+to a printer attached to the terminal device. See the \fBcurs_print\fR(3X)
+manual page for details.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+The \fBncurses\fR library is intended to be BASE-level conformant with the XSI
+Curses standard. Certain portions of the EXTENDED XSI Curses functionality
+(including color support) are supported. The following EXTENDED XSI Curses
+calls in support of wide (multibyte) characters are not yet implemented:
+\fBadd_wch\fP,
+\fBadd_wchnstr\fP,
+\fBadd_wchstr\fP,
+\fBaddnwstr\fP,
+\fBaddwstr\fP,
+\fBbkgrnd\fP,
+\fBbkgrndset\fP,
+\fBborder_set\fP,
+\fBbox_set\fP,
+\fBecho_wchar\fP,
+\fBerasewchar\fP,
+\fBget_wch\fP,
+\fBget_wstr\fP,
+\fBgetbkgrnd\fP,
+\fBgetcchar\fP,
+\fBgetn_wstr\fP,
+\fBgetwchtype\fP,
+\fBhline_set\fP,
+\fBin_wch\fP,
+\fBin_wchnstr\fP,
+\fBin_wchstr\fP,
+\fBinnwstr\fP,
+\fBins_nwstr\fP,
+\fBins_wch\fP,
+\fBins_wstr\fP,
+\fBinwchnstr\fP,
+\fBinwchstr\fP,
+\fBinwstr\fP,
+\fBkey_name\fP,
+\fBkillwchar\fP,
+\fBmvadd_wch\fP,
+\fBmvadd_wchnstr\fP,
+\fBmvadd_wchstr\fP,
+\fBmvaddnwstr\fP,
+\fBmvaddwstr\fP,
+\fBmvget_wch\fP,
+\fBmvget_wstr\fP,
+\fBmvgetn_wstr\fP,
+\fBmvhline_set\fP,
+\fBmvin_wch\fP,
+\fBmvinnwstr\fP,
+\fBmvins_nwstr\fP,
+\fBmvins_wch\fP,
+\fBmvins_wstr\fP,
+\fBmvinwchnstr\fP,
+\fBmvinwchstr\fP,
+\fBmvinwchstr\fP,
+\fBmvinwstr\fP,
+\fBmvvline_set\fP,
+\fBmvwadd_wch\fP,
+\fBmvwadd_wchnstr\fP,
+\fBmvwadd_wchstr\fP,
+\fBmvwaddnwstr\fP,
+\fBmvwaddwstr\fP,
+\fBmvwget_ch\fP,
+\fBmvwget_wch\fP,
+\fBmvwget_wstr\fP,
+\fBmvwgetn_wstr\fP,
+\fBmvwhline_set\fP,
+\fBmvwin_wch\fP,
+\fBmvwin_wchnstr\fP,
+\fBmvwin_wchstr\fP,
+\fBmvwinnwstr\fP,
+\fBmvwins_nwstr\fP,
+\fBmvwins_wch\fP,
+\fBmvwins_wstr\fP,
+\fBmvwinwchnstr\fP.
+\fBmvwinwstr\fP,
+\fBmvwvline_set\fP,
+\fBpecho_wchar\fP,
+\fBsetcchar\fP,
+\fBslk_wset\fP,
+\fBterm_attrs\fP,
+\fBunget_wch\fP,
+\fBvhline_set\fP,
+\fBvid_attr\fP,
+\fBvid_puts\fP,
+\fBvline_set\fP,
+\fBwadd_wch\fP,
+\fBwadd_wchnstr\fP,
+\fBwadd_wchstr\fP,
+\fBwaddnwstr\fP,
+\fBwaddwstr\fP,
+\fBwaddwstr\fP,
+\fBwbkgrnd\fP,
+\fBwbkgrndset\fP,
+\fBwbkgrndset\fP,
+\fBwborder_set\fP,
+\fBwecho_wchar\fP,
+\fBwecho_wchar\fP,
+\fBwget_wch\fP,
+\fBwget_wstr\fP,
+\fBwgetbkgrnd\fP,
+\fBwgetn_wstr\fP,
+\fBwhline_set\fP,
+\fBwin_wch\fP,
+\fBwin_wchnstr\fP,
+\fBwin_wchstr\fP,
+\fBwinnwstr\fP,
+\fBwins_nwstr\fP,
+\fBwins_wch\fP,
+\fBwins_wstr\fP,
+\fBwinwchnstr\fP,
+\fBwinwchstr\fP,
+\fBwinwstr\fP,
+\fBwunctrl\fP,
+\fBwvline_set\fP,
+.PP
+A small number of local differences (that is, individual differences between
+the XSI Curses and \fBncurses\fR calls) are described in \fBPORTABILITY\fR
+sections of the library man pages.
+.PP
+The routine \fBhas_key\fR is not part of XPG4, nor is it present in SVr4. See
+the \fBcurs_getch\fR(3X) manual page for details.
+.PP
+The routine \fBslk_attr\fR is not part of XPG4, nor is it present in SVr4. See
+the \fBcurs_slk\fR(3X) manual page for details.
+.PP
+The routines \fBgetmouse\fR, \fBmousemask\fR, \fBungetmouse\fR,
+\fBmouseinterval\fR, and \fBwenclose\fR relating to mouse interfacing are not
+part of XPG4, nor are they present in SVr4. See the \fBcurs_mouse\fR(3X)
+manual page for details.
+.PP
+The routine \fBmcprint\fR was not present in any previous curses
+implementation. See the \fBcurs_print\fR(3X) manual page for details.
+.PP
+The routine \fBwresize\fR is not part of XPG4, nor is it present in SVr4. See
+the \fBwresize\fR(3X) manual page for details.
+.PP
+In historic curses versions, delays embedded in the capabilities \fBcr\fR,
+\fBind\fR, \fBcub1\fR, \fBff\fR and \fBtab\fR activated corresponding delay
+bits in the UNIX tty driver. In this implementation, all padding is done by
+NUL sends. This method is slightly more expensive, but narrows the interface
+to the UNIX kernel significantly and increases the package's portability
+correspondingly.
+.PP
+In the XSI standard and SVr4 manual pages, many entry points have prototype
+arguments of the for \fBchar *const\fR (or \fBcchar_t *const\fR, or
+\fBwchar_t *const\fR, or \fBvoid *const\fR). Depending on one's interpretation of the
+ANSI C standard (see section 3.5.4.1), these declarations are either (a)
+meaningless, or (b) meaningless and illegal. The declaration
+\fBconst char *x\fR is a modifiable pointer to unmodifiable data, but
+\fBchar *const x\fR' is
+an unmodifiable pointer to modifiable data. Given that C passes arguments by
+value, \fB<type> *const\fR as a formal type is at best dubious. Some compilers
+choke on the prototypes. Therefore, in this implementation, they have been
+changed to \fBconst <type> *\fR globally.
+.SH NOTES
+The header file \fB<curses.h>\fR automatically includes the header files
+\fB<stdio.h>\fR and \fB<unctrl.h>\fR.
+
+If standard output from a \fBncurses\fR program is re-directed to something
+which is not a tty, screen updates will be directed to standard error. This
+was an undocumented feature of AT&T System V Release 3 curses.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Zeyd M. Ben-Halim, Eric S. Raymond, Thomas E. Dickey.
+Based on pcurses by Pavel Curtis.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/panel.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/panel.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..046778a8cf96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/panel.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: panel.3x,v 1.9 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH panel 3X ""
+.ds n 5
+.ds d @DATADIR@/terminfo
+.SH NAME
+panel - panel stack extension for curses
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <panel.h>\fR
+.P
+\fBcc [flags] sourcefiles -lpanel -lncurses\fR
+.P
+\fBPANEL *new_panel(WINDOW *win)\fR
+.br
+\fBint bottom_panel(PANEL *pan)\fR
+.br
+\fBint top_panel(PANEL *pan)\fR
+.br
+\fBint show_panel(PANEL *pan)\fR
+.br
+\fBvoid update_panels();\fR
+.br
+\fBint hide_panel(PANEL *pan)\fR
+.br
+\fBWINDOW *panel_window(const PANEL *pan)\fR
+.br
+\fBint replace_panel(PANEL *pan, WINDOW *window)\fR
+.br
+\fBint move_panel(PANEL *pan, int starty, int startx)\fR
+.br
+\fBint panel_hidden(const PANEL *pan)\fR
+.br
+\fBPANEL *panel_above(const PANEL *pan)\fR
+.br
+\fBPANEL *panel_below(const PANEL *pan)\fR
+.br
+\fBint set_panel_userptr(PANEL *pan, const void *ptr)\fR
+.br
+\fBconst void *panel_userptr(const PANEL *pan)\fR
+.br
+\fBint del_panel(PANEL *pan)\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Panels are \fBcurses\fR(3X) windows with the added feature of
+depth. Panel functions allow the use of stacked windows and ensure
+the proper portions of each window and the curses \fBstdscr\fR window are
+hidden or displayed when panels are added, moved, modified or removed.
+The set of currently visible panels is the stack of panels. The
+\fBstdscr\fR window is beneath all panels, and is not considered part
+of the stack.
+.P
+A window is associated with every panel. The panel routines enable
+you to create, move, hides, and show panels, as well as position a
+panel at any desired location in the stack.
+.P
+Panel routines are a functional layer added to \fBcurses\fR(3X), make only
+high-level curses calls, and work anywhere terminfo curses does.
+.SH FUNCTIONS
+.TP
+\fBnew_panel(win)\fR
+allocates a \fBPANEL\fR structure, associates it with
+\fBwin\fR, places the panel on the top of the stack (causes it
+to be displayed above any other panel) and returns a
+pointer to the new panel.
+.TP
+\fBvoid update_panels()\fR
+refreshes the virtual screen to reflect the relations between the
+panels in the stack, but does not call doupdate() to refresh the
+physical screen. Use this function and not wrefresh or wnoutrefresh.
+update_panels() may be called more than once before a call to
+doupdate(), but doupdate() is the function responsible for updating
+the physical screen.
+.TP
+\fBdel_panel(pan)\fR
+removes the given panel from the stack and deallocates the
+\fBPANEL\fR structure (but not its associated window).
+.TP
+\fBhide_panel(pan)\fR
+removes the given panel from the panel stack and thus hides it from
+view. The \fBPANEL\fR structure is not lost, merely removed from the stack.
+.TP
+\fBshow_panel(pan)\fR
+makes a hidden panel visible by placing it on top of the panels in the
+panel stack. See COMPATIBILITY below.
+.TP
+\fBtop_panel(pan)\fR
+puts the given visible panel on top of all panels in the stack. See
+COMPATIBILITY below.
+.TP
+\fBbottom_panel(pan)\fR
+puts panel at the bottom of all panels.
+.TP
+\fBmove_panel(pan,starty,startx)\fR
+moves the given panel window so that its upper-left corner is at
+\fBstarty\fR, \fBstartx\fR. It does not change the position of the
+panel in the stack. Be sure to use this function, not \fBmvwin()\fR,
+to move a panel window.
+.TP
+\fBreplace_panel(pan,window)\fR
+replaces the current window of panel with \fBwindow\fR (useful, for
+example if you want to resize a panel; if you're using \fBncurses\fR,
+you can call \fBreplace_panel\fR on the output of \fBwresize\fR(3X)).
+It does not change the position of the panel in the stack.
+.TP
+\fBpanel_above(pan)\fR
+returns a pointer to the panel above pan. If the panel argument is
+\fB(PANEL *)0\fR, it returns a pointer to the bottom panel in the stack.
+.TP
+\fBpanel_below(pan)\fR
+returns a pointer to the panel just below pan. If the panel argument
+is \fB(PANEL *)0\fR, it returns a pointer to the top panel in the stack.
+.TP
+\fBset_panel_userptr(pan,ptr)\fR
+sets the panel's user pointer.
+.TP
+\fBpanel_userptr(pan)\fR
+returns the user pointer for a given panel.
+.TP
+\fBpanel_window(pan)\fR
+returns a pointer to the window of the given panel.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+Each routine that returns a pointer returns \fBNULL\fR if an error
+occurs. Each routine that returns an int value returns \fBOK\fR if it
+executes successfully and \fBERR\fR if not.
+.SH COMPATIBILITY
+Reasonable care has been taken to ensure compatibility
+with the native panel facility introduced in SVr3.2 (inspection of
+the SVr4 manual pages suggests the programming interface is unchanged).
+The \fBPANEL\fR data structures are merely similar. The programmer
+is cautioned not to directly use \fBPANEL\fR fields.
+.P
+The functions \fBshow_panel()\fR and \fBtop_panel()\fR are identical
+in this implementation, and work equally well with displayed or hidden
+panels. In the native System V implementation, \fBshow_panel()\fR is
+intended for making a hidden panel visible (at the top of the stack)
+and \fBtop_panel()\fR is intended for making an already-visible panel
+move to the top of the stack. You are cautioned to use the correct
+function to ensure compatibility with native panel libraries.
+.SH NOTE
+In your library list, libpanel.a should be before libncurses.a; that is,
+you want to say `-lpanel -lncurses', not the other way around (which would
+give you a link error using GNU \fBld\fR(1) and some other linkers).
+.SH FILES
+.P
+panel.h
+interface for the panels library
+.P
+libpanel.a
+the panels library itself
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBcurses\fR(3X)
+.SH AUTHOR
+Originally written by Warren Tucker <wht@n4hgf.mt-park.ga.us>,
+primarily to assist in porting u386mon to systems without a native
+panels library. Repackaged for ncurses by Zeyd ben-Halim.
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/resizeterm.3x b/contrib/ncurses/man/resizeterm.3x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9c7cc8fd3873
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/resizeterm.3x
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" Author: Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@clark.net> 1996,1997
+.\"
+.\" $Id: resizeterm.3x,v 1.7 1998/03/14 23:42:52 tom Exp $
+.TH resizeterm 3X ""
+.SH NAME
+\fBresizeterm\fR - change the curses terminal size
+..
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fB#include <curses.h>\fR
+
+\fBint resizeterm(int lines, int columns);\fR
+..
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This is an extension to the curses library.
+It provides callers with a hook into the \fBncurses\fR data to resize windows,
+primarily for use by programs running in an X Window terminal (e.g., xterm).
+The function \fBresizeterm\fR resizes the standard and current windows
+to the specified dimensions, and adjusts other bookkeeping data used by
+the \fBncurses\fR library that record the window dimensions.
+
+When resizing the windows, the function blank-fills the areas that are
+extended. The calling application should fill in these areas with
+appropriate data.
+
+The function attempts to resize all windows.
+However, due to the calling convention of pads,
+it is not possible to resize these
+without additional interaction with the application.
+..
+.SH RETURN VALUE
+The function returns the integer \fBERR\fR upon failure and \fBOK\fR on success.
+It will fail if either of the dimensions less than or equal to zero,
+or if an error occurs while (re)allocating memory for the windows.
+..
+.SH NOTES
+While this function is intended to be used to support a signal handler
+(i.e., for SIGWINCH), care should be taken to avoid invoking it in a
+context where \fBmalloc\fR or \fBrealloc\fR may have been interrupted,
+since it uses those functions.
+..
+.PP
+If ncurses is configured to supply its own SIGWINCH handler,
+the \fBresizeterm\fR function ungetch's a \fBKEY_RESIZE\fR which
+will be read on the next call to \fBgetch\fR.
+This is used to alert an application that the screen size has changed,
+and that it should repaint special features such as pads that cannot
+be done automatically.
+..
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBwresize\fR(3X).
+..
+.SH AUTHOR
+Thomas Dickey (from an equivalent function written in 1988 for BSD curses).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/term.5 b/contrib/ncurses/man/term.5
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f79679db608d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/term.5
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: term.5,v 1.9 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH TERM 5
+.ds n 5
+.ds d @DATADIR@/terminfo
+.SH NAME
+term \- format of compiled term file.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B term
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+Compiled terminfo descriptions are placed under the directory \fB\*d\fP.
+In order to avoid a linear search of a huge \s-1UNIX\s+1 system directory, a
+two-level scheme is used: \fB\*b/c/name\fP
+where
+.I name
+is the name of the terminal, and
+.I c
+is the first character of
+.IR name .
+Thus,
+.I act4
+can be found in the file \fB\*d/a/act4\fP.
+Synonyms for the same terminal are implemented by multiple
+links to the same compiled file.
+.PP
+The format has been chosen so that it will be the same on all hardware.
+An 8 or more bit byte is assumed, but no assumptions about byte ordering
+or sign extension are made.
+.PP
+The compiled file is created with the
+.I tic
+program, and read by the routine
+.IR setupterm .
+The file is divided into six parts:
+the header,
+terminal names,
+boolean flags,
+numbers,
+strings,
+and
+string table.
+.PP
+The header section begins the file.
+This section contains six short integers in the format
+described below.
+These integers are
+(1) the magic number (octal 0432);
+(2) the size, in bytes, of the names section;
+(3) the number of bytes in the boolean section;
+(4) the number of short integers in the numbers section;
+(5) the number of offsets (short integers) in the strings section;
+(6) the size, in bytes, of the string table.
+.PP
+Short integers are stored in two 8-bit bytes.
+The first byte contains the least significant 8 bits of the value,
+and the second byte contains the most significant 8 bits.
+(Thus, the value represented is 256*second+first.)
+The value \-1 is represented by the two bytes 0377, 0377; other negative
+values are illegal. This value generally
+means that the corresponding capability is missing from this terminal.
+Note that this format corresponds to the hardware of the \s-1VAX\s+1
+and \s-1PDP\s+1-11 (that is, little-endian machines).
+Machines where this does not correspond to the hardware must read the
+integers as two bytes and compute the little-endian value.
+.PP
+The terminal names section comes next.
+It contains the first line of the terminfo description,
+listing the various names for the terminal,
+separated by the `|' character.
+The section is terminated with an \s-1ASCII NUL\s+1 character.
+.PP
+The boolean flags have one byte for each flag.
+This byte is either 0 or 1 as the flag is present or absent.
+The capabilities are in the same order as the file <term.h>.
+.PP
+Between the boolean section and the number section,
+a null byte will be inserted, if necessary,
+to ensure that the number section begins on an even byte (this is a
+relic of the PDP-11's word-addressed architecture, originally
+designed in to avoid IOT traps induced by addressing a word on an
+odd byte boundary).
+All short integers are aligned on a short word boundary.
+.PP
+The numbers section is similar to the flags section.
+Each capability takes up two bytes,
+and is stored as a little-endian short integer.
+If the value represented is \-1, the capability is taken to be missing.
+.PP
+The strings section is also similar.
+Each capability is stored as a short integer, in the format above.
+A value of \-1 means the capability is missing.
+Otherwise, the value is taken as an offset from the beginning
+of the string table.
+Special characters in ^X or \ec notation are stored in their
+interpreted form, not the printing representation.
+Padding information $<nn> and parameter information %x are
+stored intact in uninterpreted form.
+.PP
+The final section is the string table.
+It contains all the values of string capabilities referenced in
+the string section.
+Each string is null terminated.
+.PP
+Note that it is possible for
+.I setupterm
+to expect a different set of capabilities
+than are actually present in the file.
+Either the database may have been updated since
+.I setupterm
+has been recompiled
+(resulting in extra unrecognized entries in the file)
+or the program may have been recompiled more recently
+than the database was updated
+(resulting in missing entries).
+The routine
+.I setupterm
+must be prepared for both possibilities \-
+this is why the numbers and sizes are included.
+Also, new capabilities must always be added at the end of the lists
+of boolean, number, and string capabilities.
+.PP
+Despite the consistent use of little-endian for numbers and the otherwise
+self-describing format, it is not wise to count on portability of binary
+terminfo entries between commercial UNIX versions. The problem is that there
+are at least three versions of terminfo (under HP-UX, AIX, and OSF/1) which
+diverged from System V terminfo after SVr1, and have added extension
+capabilities to the string table that (in the binary format) collide with
+System V and XSI Curses extensions. See \fBterminfo\fR(\*n) for detailed
+discussion of terminfo source compatibility issues.
+.PP
+As an example, here is a hex dump of the description for the Lear-Siegler
+ADM-3, a popular though rather stupid early terminal:
+.nf
+.sp
+adm3a|lsi adm3a,
+ am,
+ cols#80, lines#24,
+ bel=^G, clear=\032$<1>, cr=^M, cub1=^H, cud1=^J,
+ cuf1=^L, cup=\E=%p1%{32}%+%c%p2%{32}%+%c, cuu1=^K,
+ home=^^, ind=^J,
+.sp
+.ft CW
+\s-20000 1a 01 10 00 02 00 03 00 82 00 31 00 61 64 6d 33 ........ ..1.adm3
+0010 61 7c 6c 73 69 20 61 64 6d 33 61 00 00 01 50 00 a|lsi ad m3a...P.
+0020 ff ff 18 00 ff ff 00 00 02 00 ff ff ff ff 04 00 ........ ........
+0030 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff 0a 00 25 00 27 00 ff ff ........ ..%.'...
+0040 29 00 ff ff ff ff 2b 00 ff ff 2d 00 ff ff ff ff ).....+. ..-.....
+0050 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+0060 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+0070 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+0080 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+0090 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+00a0 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+00b0 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+00c0 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+00d0 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+00e0 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+00f0 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+0100 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+0110 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ........ ........
+0120 ff ff ff ff ff ff 2f 00 07 00 0d 00 1a 24 3c 31 ....../. .....$<1
+0130 3e 00 1b 3d 25 70 31 25 7b 33 32 7d 25 2b 25 63 >..=%p1% {32}%+%c
+0140 25 70 32 25 7b 33 32 7d 25 2b 25 63 00 0a 00 1e %p2%{32} %+%c....
+0150 00 08 00 0c 00 0b 00 0a 00 ........ .\s+2
+.ft R
+.fi
+.sp
+.PP
+Some limitations: total compiled entries cannot exceed 4096 bytes.
+The name field cannot exceed 128 bytes.
+.SH FILES
+\*d/*/* compiled terminal capability data base
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBterminfo\fR(\*n).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/term.7 b/contrib/ncurses/man/term.7
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e8f81bb6f0d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/term.7
@@ -0,0 +1,204 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: term.7,v 1.11 1999/01/24 02:35:14 Todd.Miller Exp $
+.TH TERM 7
+.ds n 5
+.ds d @DATADIR@/terminfo
+.SH NAME
+term \- conventions for naming terminal types
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+The environment variable \fBTERM\fR should normally contain the type name of
+the terminal, console or display-device type you are using. This information
+is critical for all screen-oriented programs, including your editor and mailer.
+.PP
+A default \fBTERM\fR value will be set on a per-line basis by either
+\fB/etc/inittab\fR (Linux and System-V-like UNIXes) or \fB/etc/ttys\fR (BSD
+UNIXes). This will nearly always suffice for workstation and microcomputer
+consoles.
+.PP
+If you use a dialup line, the type of device attached to it may vary. Older
+UNIX systems pre-set a very dumb terminal type like `dumb' or `dialup' on
+dialup lines. Newer ones may pre-set `vt100', reflecting the prevalence of DEC
+VT100-compatible terminals and personal-computer emulators.
+.PP
+Modern telnets pass your \fBTERM\fR environment variable from the local side to
+the remote one. There can be problems if the remote terminfo or termcap entry
+for your type is not compatible with yours, but this situation is rare and
+can almost always be avoided by explicitly exporting `vt100' (assuming you
+are in fact using a VT100-superset console, terminal, or terminal emulator.)
+.PP
+In any case, you are free to override the system \fBTERM\fR setting to your
+taste in your shell profile. The \fBtset\fP(1) utility may be of assistance;
+you can give it a set of rules for deducing or requesting a terminal type based
+on the tty device and baud rate.
+.PP
+Setting your own \fBTERM\fR value may also be useful if you have created a
+custom entry incorporating options (such as visual bell or reverse-video)
+which you wish to override the system default type for your line.
+.PP
+Terminal type descriptions are stored as files of capability data underneath
+\*d. To browse a list of all terminal names recognized by the system, do
+
+ toe | more
+
+from your shell. These capability files are in a binary format optimized for
+retrieval speed (unlike the old text-based \fBtermcap\fR format they replace);
+to examine an entry, you must use the \fBinfocmp\fR(1) command. Invoke it as
+follows:
+
+ infocmp \fIentry-name\fR
+
+where \fIentry-name\fR is the name of the type you wish to examine (and the
+name of its capability file the subdirectory of \*d named for its first
+letter). This command dumps a capability file in the text format described by
+\fBterminfo\fR(\*n).
+.PP
+The first line of a \fBterminfo\fR(\*n) description gives the names by which
+terminfo knows a terminal, separated by `|' (pipe-bar) characters with the last
+name field terminated by a comma. The first name field is the type's
+\fIprimary name\fR, and is the one to use when setting \fBTERM\fR. The last
+name field (if distinct from the first) is actually a description of the
+terminal type (it may contain blanks; the others must be single words). Name
+fields between the first and last (if present) are aliases for the terminal,
+usually historical names retained for compatibility.
+.PP
+There are some conventions for how to choose terminal primary names that help
+keep them informative and unique. Here is a step-by-step guide to naming
+terminals that also explains how to parse them:
+.PP
+First, choose a root name. The root will consist of a lower-case letter
+followed by up to seven lower-case letters or digits. You need to avoid using
+punctuation characters in root names, because they are used and interpreted as
+filenames and shell meta-characters (such as !, $, *, ? etc.) embedded in them
+may cause odd and unhelpful behavior. The slash (/), or any other character
+that may be interpreted by anyone's file system (\e, $, [, ]), is especially
+dangerous (terminfo is platform-independent, and choosing names with special
+characters could someday make life difficult for users of a future port). The
+dot (.) character is relatively safe as long as there is at most one per root
+name; some historical terminfo names use it.
+.PP
+The root name for a terminal or workstation console type should almost always
+begin with a vendor prefix (such as \fBhp\fR for Hewlett-Packard, \fBwy\fR for
+Wyse, or \fBatt\fR for AT&T terminals), or a common name of the terminal line
+(\fBvt\fR for the VT series of terminals from DEC, or \fBsun\fR for Sun
+Microsystems workstation consoles, or \fBregent\fR for the ADDS Regent series.
+You can list the terminfo tree to see what prefixes are already in common use.
+The root name prefix should be followed when appropriate by a model number;
+thus \fBvt100\fR, \fBhp2621\fR, \fBwy50\fR.
+.PP
+The root name for a PC-Unix console type should be the OS name,
+i.e. \fBlinux\fR, \fBbsdos\fR, \fBfreebsd\fR, \fBnetbsd\fR. It should
+\fInot\fR be \fBconsole\fR or any other generic that might cause confusion in a
+multi-platform environment! If a model number follows, it should indicate
+either the OS release level or the console driver release level.
+.PP
+The root name for a terminal emulator (assuming it doesn't fit one of the
+standard ANSI or vt100 types) should be the program name or a readily
+recognizable abbreviation of it (i.e. \fBversaterm\fR, \fBctrm\fR).
+.PP
+Following the root name, you may add any reasonable number of hyphen-separated
+feature suffixes.
+.TP 5
+2p
+Has two pages of memory. Likewise 4p, 8p, etc.
+.TP 5
+mc
+Magic-cookie. Some terminals (notably older Wyses) can only support one
+attribute without magic-cookie lossage. Their base entry is usually paired
+with another that has this suffix and uses magic cookies to support multiple
+attributes.
+.TP 5
+-am
+Enable auto-margin (right-margin wraparound)
+.TP 5
+-m
+Mono mode - suppress color support
+.TP 5
+-na
+No arrow keys - termcap ignores arrow keys which are actually there on the
+terminal, so the user can use the arrow keys locally.
+.TP 5
+-nam
+No auto-margin - suppress am capability
+.TP 5
+-nl
+No labels - suppress soft labels
+.TP 5
+-nsl
+No status line - suppress status line
+.TP 5
+-pp
+Has a printer port which is used.
+.TP 5
+-rv
+Terminal in reverse video mode (black on white)
+.TP 5
+-s
+Enable status line.
+.TP 5
+-vb
+Use visible bell (flash) rather than beep.
+.TP 5
+-w
+Wide; terminal is in 132 column mode.
+.PP
+Conventionally, if your terminal type is a variant intended to specify a
+line height, that suffix should go first. So, for a hypothetical FuBarCo
+model 2317 terminal in 30-line mode with reverse video, best form would be
+\fBfubar-30-rv\fR (rather than, say, `fubar-rv-30').
+.PP
+Terminal types that are written not as standalone entries, but rather as
+components to be plugged into other entries via \fBuse\fP capabilities,
+are distinguished by using embedded plus signs rather than dashes.
+.PP
+Commands which use a terminal type to control display often accept a -T
+option that accepts a terminal name argument. Such programs should fall back
+on the \fBTERM\fR environment variable when no -T option is specified.
+.SH PORTABILITY
+For maximum compatibility with older System V UNIXes, names and aliases
+should be unique within the first 14 characters.
+.SH FILES
+.TP 5
+\*d/?/*
+compiled terminal capability data base
+.TP 5
+/etc/inittab
+tty line initialization (AT&T-like UNIXes).
+.TP 5
+/etc/ttys
+tty line initialization (BSD-like UNIXes).
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBterminfo\fR(\*n), \fBterm\fR(\*n).
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/terminfo.head b/contrib/ncurses/man/terminfo.head
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3118c1577fcf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/terminfo.head
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: terminfo.head,v 1.8 1998/03/11 21:12:53 juergen Exp $
+.TH TERMINFO 5 "" "" "File Formats"
+.ds n 5
+.ds d @DATADIR@/terminfo
+.SH NAME
+terminfo \- terminal capability data base
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\*d/*/*
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Terminfo
+is a data base describing terminals, used by screen-oriented programs such as
+\fBnvi\fR(1),
+\fBrogue\fR(1)
+and libraries such as
+\fBcurses\fR(3X).
+.I Terminfo
+describes terminals by giving a set of capabilities which they
+have, by specifying how to perform screen operations, and by
+specifying padding requirements and initialization sequences.
+.PP
+Entries in
+.I terminfo
+consist of a sequence of `,' separated fields (embedded commas may be
+escaped with a backslash or notated as \e072).
+White space after the `,' separator is ignored.
+The first entry for each terminal gives the names which are known for the
+terminal, separated by `|' characters.
+The first name given is the most common abbreviation for the terminal,
+the last name given should be a long name fully identifying the terminal,
+and all others are understood as synonyms for the terminal name.
+All names but the last should be in lower case and contain no blanks;
+the last name may well contain upper case and blanks for readability.
+.PP
+Terminal names (except for the last, verbose entry) should
+be chosen using the following conventions.
+The particular piece of hardware making up the terminal should
+have a root name, thus ``hp2621''.
+This name should not contain hyphens.
+Modes that the hardware can be in, or user preferences, should
+be indicated by appending a hyphen and a mode suffix.
+Thus, a vt100 in 132 column mode would be vt100-w.
+The following suffixes should be used where possible:
+.PP
+.TS
+center ;
+l c l
+l l l.
+\fBSuffix Meaning Example\fP
+-\fInn\fP Number of lines on the screen aaa-60
+-\fIn\fPp Number of pages of memory c100-4p
+-am With automargins (usually the default) vt100-am
+-m Mono mode; suppress color ansi-m
+-mc Magic cookie; spaces when highlighting wy30-mc
+-na No arrow keys (leave them in local) c100-na
+-nam Without automatic margins vt100-nam
+-nl No status line att4415-nl
+-ns No status line hp2626-ns
+-rv Reverse video c100-rv
+-s Enable status line vt100-s
+-vb Use visible bell instead of beep wy370-vb
+-w Wide mode (> 80 columns, usually 132) vt100-w
+.TE
+.PP
+For more on terminal naming conventions, see the \fBterm(7)\fR manual page.
+.SS Capabilities
+.\" Head of terminfo man page ends here
+.ps -1
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/terminfo.tail b/contrib/ncurses/man/terminfo.tail
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7b019db34856
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/terminfo.tail
@@ -0,0 +1,1497 @@
+.\" $Id: terminfo.tail,v 1.29 1999/03/07 02:09:07 tom Exp $
+.\" Beginning of terminfo.tail file
+.ps +1
+.PP
+.SS A Sample Entry
+.PP
+The following entry, describing an ANSI-standard terminal, is representative
+of what a \fBterminfo\fR entry for a modern terminal typically looks like.
+.PP
+.nf
+.in -2
+.ta .3i
+.ft CW
+\s-2ansi|ansi/pc-term compatible with color,
+ mc5i,
+ colors#8, ncv#3, pairs#64,
+ cub=\\E[%p1%dD, cud=\\E[%p1%dB, cuf=\\E[%p1%dC,
+ cuu=\\E[%p1%dA, dch=\\E[%p1%dP, dl=\\E[%p1%dM,
+ ech=\\E[%p1%dX, el1=\\E[1K, hpa=\\E[%p1%dG, ht=\\E[I,
+ ich=\\E[%p1%d@, il=\\E[%p1%dL, indn=\\E[%p1%dS, .indn=\\E[%p1%dT,
+ kbs=^H, kcbt=\\E[Z, kcub1=\\E[D, kcud1=\\E[B,
+ kcuf1=\\E[C, kcuu1=\\E[A, kf1=\\E[M, kf10=\\E[V,
+ kf11=\\E[W, kf12=\\E[X, kf2=\\E[N, kf3=\\E[O, kf4=\\E[P,
+ kf5=\\E[Q, kf6=\\E[R, kf7=\\E[S, kf8=\\E[T, kf9=\\E[U,
+ kich1=\\E[L, mc4=\\E[4i, mc5=\\E[5i, nel=\\r\\E[S,
+ op=\\E[37;40m, rep=%p1%c\\E[%p2%{1}%-%db,
+ rin=\\E[%p1%dT, s0ds=\\E(B, s1ds=\\E)B, s2ds=\\E*B,
+ s3ds=\\E+B, setab=\\E[4%p1%dm, setaf=\\E[3%p1%dm,
+ setb=\\E[4%?%p1%{1}%=%t4%e%p1%{3}%=%t6%e%p1%{4}%=%t1%e%p1%{6}%=%t3%e%p1%d%;m,
+ setf=\\E[3%?%p1%{1}%=%t4%e%p1%{3}%=%t6%e%p1%{4}%=%t1%e%p1%{6}%=%t3%e%p1%d%;m,
+ sgr=\\E[0;10%?%p1%t;7%;%?%p2%t;4%;%?%p3%t;7%;%?%p4%t;5%;%?%p6%t;1%;%?%p7%t;8%;%?%p8%t;11%;%?%p9%t;12%;m,
+ sgr0=\\E[0;10m, tbc=\\E[2g, u6=\\E[%d;%dR, u7=\\E[6n,
+ u8=\\E[?%[;0123456789]c, u9=\\E[c, vpa=\\E[%p1%dd,\s+2
+.in +2
+.fi
+.ft R
+.PP
+Entries may continue onto multiple lines by placing white space at
+the beginning of each line except the first.
+Comments may be included on lines beginning with ``#''.
+Capabilities in
+.I terminfo
+are of three types:
+Boolean capabilities which indicate that the terminal has
+some particular feature, numeric capabilities giving the size of the terminal
+or the size of particular delays, and string
+capabilities, which give a sequence which can be used to perform particular
+terminal operations.
+.PP
+.SS Types of Capabilities
+.PP
+All capabilities have names. For instance, the fact that
+ANSI-standard terminals have
+.I "automatic margins"
+(i.e., an automatic return and line-feed
+when the end of a line is reached) is indicated by the capability \fBam\fR.
+Hence the description of ansi includes \fBam\fR.
+Numeric capabilities are followed by the character `#' and then a positive value.
+Thus \fBcols\fR, which indicates the number of columns the terminal has,
+gives the value `80' for ansi.
+Values for numeric capabilities may be specified in decimal, octal or hexadecimal,
+using the C programming language conventions (e.g., 255, 0377 and 0xff or 0xFF).
+.PP
+Finally, string valued capabilities, such as \fBel\fR (clear to end of line
+sequence) are given by the two-character code, an `=', and then a string
+ending at the next following `,'.
+.PP
+A number of escape sequences are provided in the string valued capabilities
+for easy encoding of characters there. Both \fB\eE\fR and \fB\ee\fR
+map to an \s-1ESCAPE\s0 character,
+\fB^x\fR maps to a control-x for any appropriate x, and the sequences
+\fB\en \el \er \et \eb \ef \es\fR give
+a newline, line-feed, return, tab, backspace, form-feed, and space.
+Other escapes include \fB\e^\fR for \fB^\fR,
+\fB\e\e\fR for \fB\e\fR,
+\fB\e\fR, for comma,
+\fB\e:\fR for \fB:\fR,
+and \fB\e0\fR for null.
+(\fB\e0\fR will produce \e200, which does not terminate a string but behaves
+as a null character on most terminals, providing CS7 is specified. See stty(1).)
+Finally, characters may be given as three octal digits after a \fB\e\fR.
+.PP
+A delay in milliseconds may appear anywhere in a string capability, enclosed in
+$<..> brackets, as in \fBel\fP=\eEK$<5>, and padding characters are supplied by
+.I tputs
+to provide this delay. The delay must be a number with at most one decimal
+place of precision; it may be followed by suffixes `*' or '/' or both. A `*'
+indicates that the padding required is proportional to the number of lines
+affected by the operation, and the amount given is the per-affected-unit
+padding required. (In the case of insert character, the factor is still the
+number of
+.IR lines
+affected.) Normally, padding is advisory if the device has the \fBxon\fR
+capability; it is used for cost computation but does not trigger delays. A `/'
+suffix indicates that the padding is mandatory and forces a delay of the given
+number of milliseconds even on devices for which \fBxon\fR is present to
+indicate flow control.
+.PP
+Sometimes individual capabilities must be commented out.
+To do this, put a period before the capability name.
+For example, see the second
+.B ind
+in the example above.
+.br
+.ne 5
+.PP
+.SS Fetching Compiled Descriptions
+.PP
+If the environment variable TERMINFO is set, it is interpreted as the pathname
+of a directory containing the compiled description you are working on. Only
+that directory is searched.
+.PP
+If TERMINFO is not set, the \fBncurses\fR version of the terminfo reader code
+will instead look in the directory \fB$HOME/.terminfo\fR
+for a compiled description.
+If it fails to find one there, and the environment variable TERMINFO_DIRS is
+set, it will interpret the contents of that variable as a list of colon-
+separated directories to be searched (an empty entry is interpreted as a
+command to search \fI\*d\fR). If no description is found in any of the
+TERMINFO_DIRS directories, the fetch fails.
+.PP
+If neither TERMINFO nor TERMINFO_DIRS is set, the last place tried will be the
+system terminfo directory, \fI\*d\fR.
+.PP
+(Neither the \fB$HOME/.terminfo\fR lookups nor TERMINFO_DIRS extensions are
+supported under stock System V terminfo/curses.)
+.PP
+.SS Preparing Descriptions
+.PP
+We now outline how to prepare descriptions of terminals.
+The most effective way to prepare a terminal description is by imitating
+the description of a similar terminal in
+.I terminfo
+and to build up a description gradually, using partial descriptions
+with
+.I vi
+or some other screen-oriented program to check that they are correct.
+Be aware that a very unusual terminal may expose deficiencies in
+the ability of the
+.I terminfo
+file to describe it
+or bugs in the screen-handling code of the test program.
+.PP
+To get the padding for insert line right (if the terminal manufacturer
+did not document it) a severe test is to edit a large file at 9600 baud,
+delete 16 or so lines from the middle of the screen, then hit the `u'
+key several times quickly.
+If the terminal messes up, more padding is usually needed.
+A similar test can be used for insert character.
+.PP
+.SS Basic Capabilities
+.PP
+The number of columns on each line for the terminal is given by the
+\fBcols\fR numeric capability. If the terminal is a \s-1CRT\s0, then the
+number of lines on the screen is given by the \fBlines\fR capability.
+If the terminal wraps around to the beginning of the next line when
+it reaches the right margin, then it should have the \fBam\fR capability.
+If the terminal can clear its screen, leaving the cursor in the home
+position, then this is given by the \fBclear\fR string capability.
+If the terminal overstrikes
+(rather than clearing a position when a character is struck over)
+then it should have the \fBos\fR capability.
+If the terminal is a printing terminal, with no soft copy unit,
+give it both
+.B hc
+and
+.BR os .
+.RB ( os
+applies to storage scope terminals, such as \s-1TEKTRONIX\s+1 4010
+series, as well as hard copy and APL terminals.)
+If there is a code to move the cursor to the left edge of the current
+row, give this as
+.BR cr .
+(Normally this will be carriage return, control M.)
+If there is a code to produce an audible signal (bell, beep, etc)
+give this as
+.BR bel .
+.PP
+If there is a code to move the cursor one position to the left
+(such as backspace) that capability should be given as
+.BR cub1 .
+Similarly, codes to move to the right, up, and down should be
+given as
+.BR cuf1 ,
+.BR cuu1 ,
+and
+.BR cud1 .
+These local cursor motions should not alter the text they pass over,
+for example, you would not normally use `\fBcuf1\fP=\ ' because the
+space would erase the character moved over.
+.PP
+A very important point here is that the local cursor motions encoded
+in
+.I terminfo
+are undefined at the left and top edges of a \s-1CRT\s0 terminal.
+Programs should never attempt to backspace around the left edge,
+unless
+.B bw
+is given,
+and never attempt to go up locally off the top.
+In order to scroll text up, a program will go to the bottom left corner
+of the screen and send the
+.B ind
+(index) string.
+.PP
+To scroll text down, a program goes to the top left corner
+of the screen and sends the
+.B ri
+(reverse index) string.
+The strings
+.B ind
+and
+.B ri
+are undefined when not on their respective corners of the screen.
+.PP
+Parameterized versions of the scrolling sequences are
+.B indn
+and
+.B rin
+which have the same semantics as
+.B ind
+and
+.B ri
+except that they take one parameter, and scroll that many lines.
+They are also undefined except at the appropriate edge of the screen.
+.PP
+The \fBam\fR capability tells whether the cursor sticks at the right
+edge of the screen when text is output, but this does not necessarily
+apply to a
+.B cuf1
+from the last column.
+The only local motion which is defined from the left edge is if
+.B bw
+is given, then a
+.B cub1
+from the left edge will move to the right edge of the previous row.
+If
+.B bw
+is not given, the effect is undefined.
+This is useful for drawing a box around the edge of the screen, for example.
+If the terminal has switch selectable automatic margins,
+the
+.I terminfo
+file usually assumes that this is on; i.e., \fBam\fR.
+If the terminal has a command which moves to the first column of the next
+line, that command can be given as
+.B nel
+(newline).
+It does not matter if the command clears the remainder of the current line,
+so if the terminal has no
+.B cr
+and
+.B lf
+it may still be possible to craft a working
+.B nel
+out of one or both of them.
+.PP
+These capabilities suffice to describe hard-copy and \*(lqglass-tty\*(rq terminals.
+Thus the model 33 teletype is described as
+.PP
+.DT
+.nf
+.ft CW
+.in -7
+ \s-133\||\|tty33\||\|tty\||\|model 33 teletype,
+ bel=^G, cols#72, cr=^M, cud1=^J, hc, ind=^J, os,\s+1
+.in +7
+.ft R
+.PP
+while the Lear Siegler \s-1ADM\-3\s0 is described as
+.PP
+.DT
+.nf
+.ft CW
+.in -7
+ \s-1adm3\||\|3\||\|lsi adm3,
+ am, bel=^G, clear=^Z, cols#80, cr=^M, cub1=^H, cud1=^J,
+ ind=^J, lines#24,\s+1
+.in +7
+.ft R
+.fi
+.PP
+.SS Parameterized Strings
+.PP
+Cursor addressing and other strings requiring parameters
+in the terminal are described by a
+parameterized string capability, with
+.IR printf (3S)
+like escapes \fB%x\fR in it.
+For example, to address the cursor, the
+.B cup
+capability is given, using two parameters:
+the row and column to address to.
+(Rows and columns are numbered from zero and refer to the
+physical screen visible to the user, not to any unseen memory.)
+If the terminal has memory relative cursor addressing,
+that can be indicated by
+.BR mrcup .
+.PP
+The parameter mechanism uses a stack and special \fB%\fP codes
+to manipulate it. Typically a sequence will push one of the
+parameters onto the stack and then print it in some format.
+Often more complex operations are necessary.
+.PP
+The \fB%\fR encodings have the following meanings:
+.PP
+.DT
+.nf
+.ta .5i 1.5i
+ \s-1%% outputs `%'
+ %\fI[[\fP:\fI]flags][width[.precision]][\fPdoxXs\fI]\fP
+ as in \fBprintf\fP, flags are [-+#] and space
+ %c print pop() gives %c
+
+ %p[1-9] push \fIi\fP'th parm
+ %P[a-z] set dynamic variable [a-z] to pop()
+ %g[a-z] get dynamic variable [a-z] and push it
+ %P[A-Z] set static variable [a-z] to pop()
+ %g[A-Z] get static variable [a-z] and push it
+ %'\fIc\fP' char constant \fIc\fP
+ %{\fInn\fP} integer constant \fInn\fP
+ %l push strlen(pop)
+
+ %+ %- %* %/ %m
+ arithmetic (%m is mod): push(pop() op pop())
+ %& %| %^ bit operations: push(pop() op pop())
+ %= %> %< logical operations: push(pop() op pop())
+ %A, %O logical and & or operations (for conditionals)
+ %! %~ unary operations push(op pop())
+ %i add 1 to first two parms (for ANSI terminals)
+
+ %? expr %t thenpart %e elsepart %;
+ if-then-else, %e elsepart is optional.
+ else-if's are possible a la Algol 68:
+ %? c\d1\u %t b\d1\u %e c\d2\u %t b\d2\u %e c\d3\u %t b\d3\u %e c\d4\u %t b\d4\u %e %;
+\s+1 c\di\u are conditions, b\di\u are bodies.
+.fi
+.PP
+Binary operations are in postfix form with the operands in the usual order.
+That is, to get x-5 one would use "%gx%{5}%-". %P and %g variables are
+persistent across escape-string evaluations.
+.PP
+Consider the HP2645, which, to get to row 3 and column 12, needs
+to be sent \eE&a12c03Y padded for 6 milliseconds. Note that the order
+of the rows and columns is inverted here, and that the row and column
+are printed as two digits.
+Thus its \fBcup\fR capability is \*(lqcup=6\eE&%p2%2dc%p1%2dY\*(rq.
+.PP
+The Microterm \s-1ACT-IV\s0 needs the current row and column sent
+preceded by a \fB^T\fR, with the row and column simply encoded in binary,
+\*(lqcup=^T%p1%c%p2%c\*(rq.
+Terminals which use \*(lq%c\*(rq need to be able to
+backspace the cursor (\fBcub1\fR),
+and to move the cursor up one line on the screen (\fBcuu1\fR).
+This is necessary because it is not always safe to transmit \fB\en\fR
+\fB^D\fR and \fB\er\fR, as the system may change or discard them.
+(The library routines dealing with terminfo set tty modes so that
+tabs are never expanded, so \et is safe to send.
+This turns out to be essential for the Ann Arbor 4080.)
+.PP
+A final example is the \s-1LSI ADM\s0-3a, which uses row and column
+offset by a blank character, thus \*(lqcup=\eE=%p1%' '%+%c%p2%' '%+%c\*(rq.
+After sending `\eE=', this pushes the first parameter, pushes the
+ASCII value for a space (32), adds them (pushing the sum on the stack
+in place of the two previous values) and outputs that value as a character.
+Then the same is done for the second parameter.
+More complex arithmetic is possible using the stack.
+.PP
+.SS Cursor Motions
+.PP
+If the terminal has a fast way to home the cursor
+(to very upper left corner of screen) then this can be given as
+\fBhome\fR; similarly a fast way of getting to the lower left-hand corner
+can be given as \fBll\fR; this may involve going up with \fBcuu1\fR
+from the home position,
+but a program should never do this itself (unless \fBll\fR does) because it
+can make no assumption about the effect of moving up from the home position.
+Note that the home position is the same as addressing to (0,0):
+to the top left corner of the screen, not of memory.
+(Thus, the \eEH sequence on HP terminals cannot be used for
+.BR home .)
+.PP
+If the terminal has row or column absolute cursor addressing,
+these can be given as single parameter capabilities
+.B hpa
+(horizontal position absolute)
+and
+.B vpa
+(vertical position absolute).
+Sometimes these are shorter than the more general two parameter
+sequence (as with the hp2645) and can be used in preference to
+.BR cup .
+If there are parameterized local motions (e.g., move
+.I n
+spaces to the right) these can be given as
+.BR cud ,
+.BR cub ,
+.BR cuf ,
+and
+.BR cuu
+with a single parameter indicating how many spaces to move.
+These are primarily useful if the terminal does not have
+.BR cup ,
+such as the \s-1TEKTRONIX\s+1 4025.
+.PP
+If the terminal needs to be in a special mode when running
+a program that uses these capabilities,
+the codes to enter and exit this mode can be given as \fBsmcup\fR and \fBrmcup\fR.
+This arises, for example, from terminals like the Concept with more than
+one page of memory.
+If the terminal has only memory relative cursor addressing and not screen
+relative cursor addressing, a one screen-sized window must be fixed into
+the terminal for cursor addressing to work properly.
+This is also used for the \s-1TEKTRONIX\s+1 4025,
+where
+.B smcup
+sets the command character to be the one used by terminfo.
+If the \fBsmcup\fP sequence will not restore the screen after an
+\fBrmcup\fP sequence is output (to the state prior to outputting
+\fBrmcup\fP), specify \fBnrrmc\fP.
+.PP
+.SS Area Clears
+.PP
+If the terminal can clear from the current position to the end of the
+line, leaving the cursor where it is, this should be given as \fBel\fR.
+If the terminal can clear from the beginning of the line to the current
+position inclusive, leaving
+the cursor where it is, this should be given as \fBel1\fP.
+If the terminal can clear from the current position to the end of the
+display, then this should be given as \fBed\fR.
+\fBEd\fR is only defined from the first column of a line.
+(Thus, it can be simulated by a request to delete a large number of lines,
+if a true
+.B ed
+is not available.)
+.PP
+.SS Insert/delete line and vertical motions
+.PP
+If the terminal can open a new blank line before the line where the cursor
+is, this should be given as \fBil1\fR; this is done only from the first
+position of a line. The cursor must then appear on the newly blank line.
+If the terminal can delete the line which the cursor is on, then this
+should be given as \fBdl1\fR; this is done only from the first position on
+the line to be deleted.
+Versions of
+.B il1
+and
+.B dl1
+which take a single parameter and insert or delete that many lines can
+be given as
+.B il
+and
+.BR dl .
+.PP
+If the terminal has a settable scrolling region (like the vt100)
+the command to set this can be described with the
+.B csr
+capability, which takes two parameters:
+the top and bottom lines of the scrolling region.
+The cursor position is, alas, undefined after using this command.
+.PP
+It is possible to get the effect of insert or delete line using
+.B csr
+on a properly chosen region; the
+.B sc
+and
+.B rc
+(save and restore cursor) commands may be useful for ensuring that
+your synthesized insert/delete string does not move the cursor.
+(Note that the \fBncurses\fR(3X) library does this synthesis
+automatically, so you need not compose insert/delete strings for
+an entry with \fBcsr\fR).
+.PP
+Yet another way to construct insert and delete might be to use a combination of
+index with the memory-lock feature found on some terminals (like the HP-700/90
+series, which however also has insert/delete).
+.PP
+Inserting lines at the top or bottom of the screen can also be
+done using
+.B ri
+or
+.B ind
+on many terminals without a true insert/delete line,
+and is often faster even on terminals with those features.
+.PP
+The boolean \fBnon_dest_scroll_region\fR should be set if each scrolling
+window is effectively a view port on a screen-sized canvas. To test for
+this capability, create a scrolling region in the middle of the screen,
+write something to the bottom line, move the cursor to the top of the region,
+and do \fBri\fR followed by \fBdl1\fR or \fBind\fR. If the data scrolled
+off the bottom of the region by the \fBri\fR re-appears, then scrolling
+is non-destructive. System V and XSI Curses expect that \fBind\fR, \fBri\fR,
+\fBindn\fR, and \fBrin\fR will simulate destructive scrolling; their
+documentation cautions you not to define \fBcsr\fR unless this is true.
+This \fBcurses\fR implementation is more liberal and will do explicit erases
+after scrolling if \fBndstr\fR is defined.
+.PP
+If the terminal has the ability to define a window as part of
+memory, which all commands affect,
+it should be given as the parameterized string
+.BR wind .
+The four parameters are the starting and ending lines in memory
+and the starting and ending columns in memory, in that order.
+.PP
+If the terminal can retain display memory above, then the
+\fBda\fR capability should be given; if display memory can be retained
+below, then \fBdb\fR should be given. These indicate
+that deleting a line or scrolling may bring non-blank lines up from below
+or that scrolling back with \fBri\fR may bring down non-blank lines.
+.PP
+.SS Insert/Delete Character
+.PP
+There are two basic kinds of intelligent terminals with respect to
+insert/delete character which can be described using
+.I terminfo.
+The most common insert/delete character operations affect only the characters
+on the current line and shift characters off the end of the line rigidly.
+Other terminals, such as the Concept 100 and the Perkin Elmer Owl, make
+a distinction between typed and untyped blanks on the screen, shifting
+upon an insert or delete only to an untyped blank on the screen which is
+either eliminated, or expanded to two untyped blanks. You can determine the
+kind of terminal you have by clearing the screen and then typing
+text separated by cursor motions. Type \*(lqabc\ \ \ \ def\*(rq using local
+cursor motions (not spaces) between the \*(lqabc\*(rq and the \*(lqdef\*(rq.
+Then position the cursor before the \*(lqabc\*(rq and put the terminal in insert
+mode. If typing characters causes the rest of the line to shift
+rigidly and characters to fall off the end, then your terminal does
+not distinguish between blanks and untyped positions. If the \*(lqabc\*(rq
+shifts over to the \*(lqdef\*(rq which then move together around the end of the
+current line and onto the next as you insert, you have the second type of
+terminal, and should give the capability \fBin\fR, which stands for
+\*(lqinsert null\*(rq.
+While these are two logically separate attributes (one line vs. multi-line
+insert mode, and special treatment of untyped spaces) we have seen no
+terminals whose insert mode cannot be described with the single attribute.
+.PP
+Terminfo can describe both terminals which have an insert mode, and terminals
+which send a simple sequence to open a blank position on the current line.
+Give as \fBsmir\fR the sequence to get into insert mode.
+Give as \fBrmir\fR the sequence to leave insert mode.
+Now give as \fBich1\fR any sequence needed to be sent just before sending
+the character to be inserted. Most terminals with a true insert mode
+will not give \fBich1\fR; terminals which send a sequence to open a screen
+position should give it here.
+.PP
+If your terminal has both, insert mode is usually preferable to \fBich1\fR.
+Technically, you should not give both unless the terminal actually requires
+both to be used in combination. Accordingly, some non-curses applications get
+confused if both are present; the symptom is doubled characters in an update
+using insert. This requirement is now rare; most \fBich\fR sequences do not
+require previous smir, and most smir insert modes do not require \fBich1\fR
+before each character. Therefore, the new \fBcurses\fR actually assumes this
+is the case and uses either \fBrmir\fR/\fBsmir\fR or \fBich\fR/\fBich1\fR as
+appropriate (but not both). If you have to write an entry to be used under
+new curses for a terminal old enough to need both, include the
+\fBrmir\fR/\fBsmir\fR sequences in \fBich1\fR.
+.PP
+If post insert padding is needed, give this as a number of milliseconds
+in \fBip\fR (a string option). Any other sequence which may need to be
+sent after an insert of a single character may also be given in \fBip\fR.
+If your terminal needs both to be placed into an `insert mode' and
+a special code to precede each inserted character, then both
+.BR smir / rmir
+and
+.B ich1
+can be given, and both will be used.
+The
+.B ich
+capability, with one parameter,
+.IR n ,
+will repeat the effects of
+.B ich1
+.I n
+times.
+.PP
+If padding is necessary between characters typed while not
+in insert mode, give this as a number of milliseconds padding in \fBrmp\fP.
+.PP
+It is occasionally necessary to move around while in insert mode
+to delete characters on the same line (e.g., if there is a tab after
+the insertion position). If your terminal allows motion while in
+insert mode you can give the capability \fBmir\fR to speed up inserting
+in this case. Omitting \fBmir\fR will affect only speed. Some terminals
+(notably Datamedia's) must not have \fBmir\fR because of the way their
+insert mode works.
+.PP
+Finally, you can specify
+.B dch1
+to delete a single character,
+.B dch
+with one parameter,
+.IR n ,
+to delete
+.I n characters,
+and delete mode by giving \fBsmdc\fR and \fBrmdc\fR
+to enter and exit delete mode (any mode the terminal needs to be placed
+in for
+.B dch1
+to work).
+.PP
+A command to erase
+.I n
+characters (equivalent to outputting
+.I n
+blanks without moving the cursor)
+can be given as
+.B ech
+with one parameter.
+.PP
+.SS "Highlighting, Underlining, and Visible Bells"
+.PP
+If your terminal has one or more kinds of display attributes,
+these can be represented in a number of different ways.
+You should choose one display form as
+\f2standout mode\fR,
+representing a good, high contrast, easy-on-the-eyes,
+format for highlighting error messages and other attention getters.
+(If you have a choice, reverse video plus half-bright is good,
+or reverse video alone.)
+The sequences to enter and exit standout mode
+are given as \fBsmso\fR and \fBrmso\fR, respectively.
+If the code to change into or out of standout
+mode leaves one or even two blank spaces on the screen,
+as the TVI 912 and Teleray 1061 do,
+then \fBxmc\fR should be given to tell how many spaces are left.
+.PP
+Codes to begin underlining and end underlining can be given as \fBsmul\fR
+and \fBrmul\fR respectively.
+If the terminal has a code to underline the current character and move
+the cursor one space to the right,
+such as the Microterm Mime,
+this can be given as \fBuc\fR.
+.PP
+Other capabilities to enter various highlighting modes include
+.B blink
+(blinking)
+.B bold
+(bold or extra bright)
+.B dim
+(dim or half-bright)
+.B invis
+(blanking or invisible text)
+.B prot
+(protected)
+.B rev
+(reverse video)
+.B sgr0
+(turn off
+.I all
+attribute modes)
+.B smacs
+(enter alternate character set mode)
+and
+.B rmacs
+(exit alternate character set mode).
+Turning on any of these modes singly may or may not turn off other modes.
+.PP
+If there is a sequence to set arbitrary combinations of modes,
+this should be given as
+.B sgr
+(set attributes),
+taking 9 parameters.
+Each parameter is either 0 or nonzero, as the corresponding attribute is on or off.
+The 9 parameters are, in order:
+standout, underline, reverse, blink, dim, bold, blank, protect, alternate
+character set.
+Not all modes need be supported by
+.BR sgr ,
+only those for which corresponding separate attribute commands exist.
+.PP
+For example, the DEC vt220 supports most of the modes:
+.PP
+.TS
+center;
+l c c
+l c c
+lw28 lw6 lw2 lw20.
+\fBtparm parameter attribute escape sequence\fP
+
+none none \\E[0m
+p1 standout \\E[0;1;7m
+p2 underline \\E[0;4m
+p3 reverse \\E[0;7m
+p4 blink \\E[0;5m
+p5 dim not available
+p6 bold \\E[0;1m
+p7 invis \\E[0;8m
+p8 protect not used
+p9 altcharset ^O (off) ^N (on)
+.TE
+.PP
+We begin each escape sequence by turning off any existing modes, since
+there is no quick way to determine whether they are active.
+Standout is set up to be the combination of reverse and bold.
+The vt220 terminal has a protect mode,
+though it is not commonly used in sgr
+because it protects characters on the screen from the host's erasures.
+The altcharset mode also is different in that it is either ^O or ^N,
+depending on whether it is off or on.
+If all modes are turned on, the resulting sequence is \\E[0;1;4;5;7;8m^N.
+.PP
+Some sequences are common to different modes.
+For example, ;7 is output when either p1 or p3 is true, that is, if
+either standout or reverse modes are turned on.
+.PP
+Writing out the above sequences, along with their dependencies yields
+.PP
+.TS
+center;
+l c c
+l c c
+lw28 lw6 lw2 lw20.
+\fBsequence when to output terminfo translation\fP
+
+\\E[0 always \\E[0
+;1 if p1 or p6 %?%p1%p6%|%t;1%;
+;4 if p2 %?%p2%|%t;4%;
+;5 if p4 %?%p4%|%t;5%;
+;7 if p1 or p3 %?%p1%p3%|%t;7%;
+;8 if p7 %?%p7%|%t;8%;
+m always m
+^N or ^O if p9 ^N, else ^O %?%p9%t^N%e^O%;
+.TE
+.PP
+Putting this all together into the sgr sequence gives:
+.PP
+.nf
+ sgr=\\E[0%?%p1%p6%|%t;1%;%?%p2%t;4%;%?%p1%p3%|%t;7%;
+ %?%p4%t;5%;%?%p7%t;8%;m%?%p9%t\\016%e\\017%;,
+.fi
+.PP
+Remember that if you specify sgr, you must also specify sgr0.
+.PP
+Terminals with the ``magic cookie'' glitch
+.RB ( xmc )
+deposit special ``cookies'' when they receive mode-setting sequences,
+which affect the display algorithm rather than having extra bits for
+each character.
+Some terminals, such as the HP 2621, automatically leave standout
+mode when they move to a new line or the cursor is addressed.
+Programs using standout mode should exit standout mode before
+moving the cursor or sending a newline,
+unless the
+.B msgr
+capability, asserting that it is safe to move in standout mode, is present.
+.PP
+If the terminal has
+a way of flashing the screen to indicate an error quietly (a bell replacement)
+then this can be given as \fBflash\fR; it must not move the cursor.
+.PP
+If the cursor needs to be made more visible than normal when it is
+not on the bottom line (to make, for example, a non-blinking underline into an
+easier to find block or blinking underline)
+give this sequence as
+.BR cvvis .
+If there is a way to make the cursor completely invisible, give that as
+.BR civis .
+The capability
+.BR cnorm
+should be given which undoes the effects of both of these modes.
+.PP
+If your terminal correctly generates underlined characters
+(with no special codes needed)
+even though it does not overstrike,
+then you should give the capability \fBul\fR.
+If a character overstriking another leaves both characters on the screen,
+specify the capability \fBos\fP.
+If overstrikes are erasable with a blank,
+then this should be indicated by giving \fBeo\fR.
+.PP
+.SS Keypad and Function Keys
+.PP
+If the terminal has a keypad that transmits codes when the keys are pressed,
+this information can be given. Note that it is not possible to handle
+terminals where the keypad only works in local (this applies, for example,
+to the unshifted HP 2621 keys).
+If the keypad can be set to transmit or not transmit,
+give these codes as \fBsmkx\fR and \fBrmkx\fR.
+Otherwise the keypad is assumed to always transmit.
+The codes sent by the left arrow, right arrow, up arrow, down arrow,
+and home keys can be given as
+\fBkcub1, kcuf1, kcuu1, kcud1, \fRand\fB khome\fR respectively.
+If there are function keys such as f0, f1, ..., f10, the codes they send
+can be given as \fBkf0, kf1, ..., kf10\fR.
+If these keys have labels other than the default f0 through f10, the labels
+can be given as \fBlf0, lf1, ..., lf10\fR.
+The codes transmitted by certain other special keys can be given:
+.B kll
+(home down),
+.B kbs
+(backspace),
+.B ktbc
+(clear all tabs),
+.B kctab
+(clear the tab stop in this column),
+.B kclr
+(clear screen or erase key),
+.B kdch1
+(delete character),
+.B kdl1
+(delete line),
+.B krmir
+(exit insert mode),
+.B kel
+(clear to end of line),
+.B ked
+(clear to end of screen),
+.B kich1
+(insert character or enter insert mode),
+.B kil1
+(insert line),
+.B knp
+(next page),
+.B kpp
+(previous page),
+.B kind
+(scroll forward/down),
+.B kri
+(scroll backward/up),
+.B khts
+(set a tab stop in this column).
+In addition, if the keypad has a 3 by 3 array of keys including the four
+arrow keys, the other five keys can be given as
+.BR ka1 ,
+.BR ka3 ,
+.BR kb2 ,
+.BR kc1 ,
+and
+.BR kc3 .
+These keys are useful when the effects of a 3 by 3 directional pad are needed.
+.PP
+Strings to program function keys can be given as
+.BR pfkey ,
+.BR pfloc ,
+and
+.BR pfx .
+A string to program screen labels should be specified as \fBpln\fP.
+Each of these strings takes two parameters: the function key number to
+program (from 0 to 10) and the string to program it with.
+Function key numbers out of this range may program undefined keys in
+a terminal dependent manner.
+The difference between the capabilities is that
+.B pfkey
+causes pressing the given key to be the same as the user typing the
+given string;
+.B pfloc
+causes the string to be executed by the terminal in local; and
+.B pfx
+causes the string to be transmitted to the computer.
+.PP
+The capabilities \fBnlab\fP, \fBlw\fP and \fBlh\fP
+define the number of programmable
+screen labels and their width and height.
+If there are commands to turn the labels on and off,
+give them in \fBsmln\fP and \fBrmln\fP.
+\fBsmln\fP is normally output after one or more pln
+sequences to make sure that the change becomes visible.
+.PP
+.SS Tabs and Initialization
+.PP
+If the terminal has hardware tabs, the command to advance to the next
+tab stop can be given as
+.B ht
+(usually control I).
+A ``back-tab'' command which moves leftward to the preceding tab stop can
+be given as
+.BR cbt .
+By convention, if the teletype modes indicate that tabs are being
+expanded by the computer rather than being sent to the terminal,
+programs should not use
+.B ht
+or
+.B cbt
+even if they are present, since the user may not have the tab stops
+properly set.
+If the terminal has hardware tabs which are initially set every
+.I n
+spaces when the terminal is powered up,
+the numeric parameter
+.B it
+is given, showing the number of spaces the tabs are set to.
+This is normally used by the
+.IR tset
+command to determine whether to set the mode for hardware tab expansion,
+and whether to set the tab stops.
+If the terminal has tab stops that can be saved in non-volatile memory,
+the terminfo description can assume that they are properly set.
+.PP
+Other capabilities
+include
+.BR is1 ,
+.BR is2 ,
+and
+.BR is3 ,
+initialization strings for the terminal,
+.BR iprog ,
+the path name of a program to be run to initialize the terminal,
+and \fBif\fR, the name of a file containing long initialization strings.
+These strings are expected to set the terminal into modes consistent
+with the rest of the terminfo description.
+They are normally sent to the terminal, by the
+.I init
+option of the
+.IR tput
+program, each time the user logs in.
+They will be printed in the following order:
+run the program
+.BR iprog ;
+output
+.BR is1 ;
+.BR is2 ;
+set the margins using
+.BR mgc ,
+.BR smgl and
+.BR smgr ;
+set tabs using
+.B tbc
+and
+.BR hts ;
+print the file
+.BR if ;
+and finally
+output
+.BR is3 .
+.PP
+Most initialization is done with
+.BR is2 .
+Special terminal modes can be set up without duplicating strings
+by putting the common sequences in
+.B is2
+and special cases in
+.B is1
+and
+.BR is3 .
+A pair of sequences that does a harder reset from a totally unknown state
+can be analogously given as
+.BR rs1 ,
+.BR rs2 ,
+.BR rf ,
+and
+.BR rs3 ,
+analogous to
+.B is2
+and
+.BR if .
+These strings are output by the
+.IR reset
+program, which is used when the terminal gets into a wedged state.
+Commands are normally placed in
+.BR rs1 ,
+.BR rs2
+.B rs3
+and
+.B rf
+only if they produce annoying effects on the screen and are not
+necessary when logging in.
+For example, the command to set the vt100 into 80-column mode would
+normally be part of
+.BR is2 ,
+but it causes an annoying glitch of the screen and is not normally
+needed since the terminal is usually already in 80 column mode.
+.PP
+If there are commands to set and clear tab stops, they can be given as
+.B tbc
+(clear all tab stops)
+and
+.B hts
+(set a tab stop in the current column of every row).
+If a more complex sequence is needed to set the tabs than can be
+described by this, the sequence can be placed in
+.B is2
+or
+.BR if .
+.SS Delays and Padding
+.PP
+Many older and slower terminals don't support either XON/XOFF or DTR
+handshaking, including hard copy terminals and some very archaic CRTs
+(including, for example, DEC VT100s). These may require padding characters
+after certain cursor motions and screen changes.
+.PP
+If the terminal uses xon/xoff handshaking for flow control (that is,
+it automatically emits ^S back to the host when its input buffers are
+close to full), set
+.BR xon .
+This capability suppresses the emission of padding. You can also set it
+for memory-mapped console devices effectively that don't have a speed limit.
+Padding information should still be included so that routines can
+make better decisions about relative costs, but actual pad characters will
+not be transmitted.
+.PP
+If \fBpb\fR (padding baud rate) is given, padding is suppressed at baud rates
+below the value of \fBpb\fR. If the entry has no padding baud rate, then
+whether padding is emitted or not is completely controlled by \fBxon\fR.
+.PP
+If the terminal requires other than a null (zero) character as a pad,
+then this can be given as \fBpad\fR.
+Only the first character of the
+.B pad
+string is used.
+.PP
+.SS Status Lines
+Some terminals have an extra `status line' which is not normally used by
+software (and thus not counted in the terminal's \fBlines\fR capability).
+.PP
+The simplest case is a status line which is cursor-addressable but not
+part of the main scrolling region on the screen; the Heathkit H19 has
+a status line of this kind, as would a 24-line VT100 with a 23-line
+scrolling region set up on initialization. This situation is indicated
+by the \fBhs\fR capability.
+.PP
+Some terminals with status lines need special sequences to access the
+status line. These may be expressed as a string with single parameter
+\fBtsl\fR which takes the cursor to a given zero-origin column on the
+status line. The capability \fBfsl\fR must return to the main-screen
+cursor positions before the last \fBtsl\fR. You may need to embed the
+string values of \fBsc\fR (save cursor) and \fBrc\fR (restore cursor)
+in \fBtsl\fR and \fBfsl\fR to accomplish this.
+.PP
+The status line is normally assumed to be the same width as the width
+of the terminal. If this is untrue, you can specify it with the numeric
+capability \fBwsl\fR.
+.PP
+A command to erase or blank the status line may be specified as \fBdsl\fR.
+.PP
+The boolean capability \fBeslok\fR specifies that escape sequences, tabs,
+etc. work ordinarily in the status line.
+.PP
+The \fBncurses\fR implementation does not yet use any of these capabilities.
+They are documented here in case they ever become important.
+.PP
+.SS Line Graphics
+.PP
+Many terminals have alternate character sets useful for forms-drawing.
+Terminfo and \fBcurses\fR build in support for the drawing characters
+supported by the VT100, with some characters from the AT&T 4410v1 added.
+This alternate character set may be specified by the \fBacsc\fR capability.
+.PP
+.TS H
+center expand;
+c l l c
+c l l c
+lw28 lw6 lw2 lw20.
+.\".TH
+\fBGlyph ACS Ascii VT100\fR
+\fBName Name Default Name\fR
+UK pound sign ACS_STERLING f }
+arrow pointing down ACS_DARROW v .
+arrow pointing left ACS_LARROW < ,
+arrow pointing right ACS_RARROW > +
+arrow pointing up ACS_UARROW ^ -
+board of squares ACS_BOARD # h
+bullet ACS_BULLET o ~
+checker board (stipple) ACS_CKBOARD : a
+degree symbol ACS_DEGREE \e f
+diamond ACS_DIAMOND + `
+greater-than-or-equal-to ACS_GEQUAL > z
+greek pi ACS_PI * {
+horizontal line ACS_HLINE - q
+lantern symbol ACS_LANTERN # i
+large plus or crossover ACS_PLUS + n
+less-than-or-equal-to ACS_LEQUAL < y
+lower left corner ACS_LLCORNER + m
+lower right corner ACS_LRCORNER + j
+not-equal ACS_NEQUAL ! |
+plus/minus ACS_PLMINUS # g
+scan line 1 ACS_S1 ~ o
+scan line 3 ACS_S3 - p
+scan line 7 ACS_S7 - r
+scan line 9 ACS_S9 \&_ s
+solid square block ACS_BLOCK # 0
+tee pointing down ACS_TTEE + w
+tee pointing left ACS_RTEE + u
+tee pointing right ACS_LTEE + t
+tee pointing up ACS_BTEE + v
+upper left corner ACS_ULCORNER + l
+upper right corner ACS_URCORNER + k
+vertical line ACS_VLINE | x
+.TE
+.PP
+The best way to define a new device's graphics set is to add a column
+to a copy of this table for your terminal, giving the character which
+(when emitted between \fBsmacs\fR/\fBrmacs\fR switches) will be rendered
+as the corresponding graphic. Then read off the VT100/your terminal
+character pairs right to left in sequence; these become the ACSC string.
+.PP
+.SS Color Handling
+.PP
+Most color terminals are either `Tektronix-like' or `HP-like'. Tektronix-like
+terminals have a predefined set of N colors (where N usually 8), and can set
+character-cell foreground and background characters independently, mixing them
+into N * N color-pairs. On HP-like terminals, the use must set each color
+pair up separately (foreground and background are not independently settable).
+Up to M color-pairs may be set up from 2*M different colors. ANSI-compatible
+terminals are Tektronix-like.
+.PP
+Some basic color capabilities are independent of the color method. The numeric
+capabilities \fBcolors\fR and \fBpairs\fR specify the maximum numbers of colors
+and color-pairs that can be displayed simultaneously. The \fBop\fR (original
+pair) string resets foreground and background colors to their default values
+for the terminal. The \fBoc\fR string resets all colors or color-pairs to
+their default values for the terminal. Some terminals (including many PC
+terminal emulators) erase screen areas with the current background color rather
+than the power-up default background; these should have the boolean capability
+\fBbce\fR.
+.PP
+To change the current foreground or background color on a Tektronix-type
+terminal, use \fBsetaf\fR (set ANSI foreground) and \fBsetab\fR (set ANSI
+background) or \fBsetf\fR (set foreground) and \fBsetb\fR (set background).
+These take one parameter, the color number. The SVr4 documentation describes
+only \fBsetaf\fR/\fBsetab\fR; the XPG4 draft says that "If the terminal
+supports ANSI escape sequences to set background and foreground, they should
+be coded as \fBsetaf\fR and \fBsetab\fR, respectively. If the terminal
+supports other escape sequences to set background and foreground, they should
+be coded as \fBsetf\fR and \fBsetb\fR, respectively. The \fIvidputs()\fR
+function and the refresh functions use \fBsetaf\fR and \fBsetab\fR if they are
+defined."
+.PP
+The \fBsetaf\fR/\fBsetab\fR and \fBsetf\fR/\fBsetb\fR capabilities take a
+single numeric argument each. Argument values 0-7 are portably defined as
+follows (the middle column is the symbolic #define available in the header for
+the \fBcurses\fR or \fBncurses\fR libraries). The terminal hardware is free to
+map these as it likes, but the RGB values indicate normal locations in color
+space.
+.PP
+.TS H
+center;
+l c c c
+l l n l.
+\fBColor #define Value RGB\fR
+black \fBCOLOR_BLACK\fR 0 0, 0, 0
+red \fBCOLOR_RED\ \fR 1 max,0,0
+green \fBCOLOR_GREEN\fR 2 0,max,0
+yellow \fBCOLOR_YELLOW\fR 3 max,max,0
+blue \fBCOLOR_BLUE\fR 4 0,0,max
+magenta \fBCOLOR_MAGENTA\fR 5 max,0,max
+cyan \fBCOLOR_CYAN\fR 6 0,max,max
+white \fBCOLOR_WHITE\fR 7 max,max,max
+.TE
+.PP
+On an HP-like terminal, use \fBscp\fR with a color-pair number parameter to set
+which color pair is current.
+.PP
+On a Tektronix-like terminal, the capability \fBccc\fR may be present to
+indicate that colors can be modified. If so, the \fBinitc\fR capability will
+take a color number (0 to \fBcolors\fR - 1)and three more parameters which
+describe the color. These three parameters default to being interpreted as RGB
+(Red, Green, Blue) values. If the boolean capability \fBhls\fR is present,
+they are instead as HLS (Hue, Lightness, Saturation) indices. The ranges are
+terminal-dependent.
+.PP
+On an HP-like terminal, \fBinitp\fR may give a capability for changing a
+color-pair value. It will take seven parameters; a color-pair number (0 to
+\fBmax_pairs\fR - 1), and two triples describing first background and then
+foreground colors. These parameters must be (Red, Green, Blue) or
+(Hue, Lightness, Saturation) depending on \fBhls\fR.
+.PP
+On some color terminals, colors collide with highlights. You can register
+these collisions with the \fBncv\fR capability. This is a bit-mask of
+attributes not to be used when colors are enabled. The correspondence with the
+attributes understood by \fBcurses\fR is as follows:
+.PP
+.TS
+center;
+l c c
+lw25 lw2 lw10.
+\fBAttribute Bit Decimal\fR
+A_STANDOUT 0 1
+A_UNDERLINE 1 2
+A_REVERSE 2 4
+A_BLINK 3 8
+A_DIM 4 16
+A_BOLD 5 32
+A_INVIS 6 64
+A_PROTECT 7 128
+A_ALTCHARSET 8 256
+.TE
+.PP
+For example, on many IBM PC consoles, the underline attribute collides with the
+foreground color blue and is not available in color mode. These should have
+an \fBncv\fR capability of 2.
+.PP
+SVr4 curses does nothing with \fBncv\fR, ncurses recognizes it and optimizes
+the output in favor of colors.
+.PP
+.SS Miscellaneous
+If the terminal requires other than a null (zero) character as a pad, then this
+can be given as pad.
+Only the first character of the pad string is used.
+If the terminal does not have a pad character, specify npc.
+Note that ncurses implements the termcap-compatible \fBPC\fR variable;
+though the application may set this value to something other than
+a null, ncurses will test \fBnpc\fR first and use napms if the terminal
+has no pad character.
+.PP
+If the terminal can move up or down half a line,
+this can be indicated with
+.B hu
+(half-line up)
+and
+.B hd
+(half-line down).
+This is primarily useful for superscripts and subscripts on hard-copy terminals.
+If a hard-copy terminal can eject to the next page (form feed), give this as
+.B ff
+(usually control L).
+.PP
+If there is a command to repeat a given character a given number of
+times (to save time transmitting a large number of identical characters)
+this can be indicated with the parameterized string
+.BR rep .
+The first parameter is the character to be repeated and the second
+is the number of times to repeat it.
+Thus, tparm(repeat_char, 'x', 10) is the same as `xxxxxxxxxx'.
+.PP
+If the terminal has a settable command character, such as the \s-1TEKTRONIX\s+1 4025,
+this can be indicated with
+.BR cmdch .
+A prototype command character is chosen which is used in all capabilities.
+This character is given in the
+.B cmdch
+capability to identify it.
+The following convention is supported on some UNIX systems:
+The environment is to be searched for a
+.B CC
+variable, and if found, all
+occurrences of the prototype character are replaced with the character
+in the environment variable.
+.PP
+Terminal descriptions that do not represent a specific kind of known
+terminal, such as
+.IR switch ,
+.IR dialup ,
+.IR patch ,
+and
+.IR network ,
+should include the
+.B gn
+(generic) capability so that programs can complain that they do not know
+how to talk to the terminal.
+(This capability does not apply to
+.I virtual
+terminal descriptions for which the escape sequences are known.)
+.PP
+If the terminal has a ``meta key'' which acts as a shift key,
+setting the 8th bit of any character transmitted, this fact can
+be indicated with
+.BR km .
+Otherwise, software will assume that the 8th bit is parity and it
+will usually be cleared.
+If strings exist to turn this ``meta mode'' on and off, they
+can be given as
+.B smm
+and
+.BR rmm .
+.PP
+If the terminal has more lines of memory than will fit on the screen
+at once, the number of lines of memory can be indicated with
+.BR lm .
+A value of
+.BR lm #0
+indicates that the number of lines is not fixed,
+but that there is still more memory than fits on the screen.
+.PP
+If the terminal is one of those supported by the \s-1UNIX\s+1 virtual
+terminal protocol, the terminal number can be given as
+.BR vt .
+.PP
+Media copy
+strings which control an auxiliary printer connected to the terminal
+can be given as
+.BR mc0 :
+print the contents of the screen,
+.BR mc4 :
+turn off the printer, and
+.BR mc5 :
+turn on the printer.
+When the printer is on, all text sent to the terminal will be sent
+to the printer.
+It is undefined whether the text is also displayed on the terminal screen
+when the printer is on.
+A variation
+.B mc5p
+takes one parameter, and leaves the printer on for as many characters
+as the value of the parameter, then turns the printer off.
+The parameter should not exceed 255.
+All text, including
+.BR mc4 ,
+is transparently passed to the printer while an
+.B mc5p
+is in effect.
+.PP
+.SS Glitches and Braindamage
+.PP
+Hazeltine terminals, which do not allow `~' characters to be displayed should
+indicate \fBhz\fR.
+.PP
+Terminals which ignore a line-feed immediately after an \fBam\fR wrap,
+such as the Concept and vt100,
+should indicate \fBxenl\fR.
+.PP
+If
+.B el
+is required to get rid of standout
+(instead of merely writing normal text on top of it),
+\fBxhp\fP should be given.
+.PP
+Teleray terminals, where tabs turn all characters moved over to blanks,
+should indicate \fBxt\fR (destructive tabs).
+Note: the variable indicating this is now `dest_tabs_magic_smso'; in
+older versions, it was teleray_glitch.
+This glitch is also taken to mean that it is not possible to position
+the cursor on top of a ``magic cookie'',
+that to erase standout mode it is instead necessary to use
+delete and insert line. The ncurses implementation ignores this glitch.
+.PP
+The Beehive Superbee, which is unable to correctly transmit the escape
+or control C characters, has
+.BR xsb ,
+indicating that the f1 key is used for escape and f2 for control C.
+(Only certain Superbees have this problem, depending on the ROM.)
+Note that in older terminfo versions, this capability was called
+`beehive_glitch'; it is now `no_esc_ctl_c'.
+.PP
+Other specific terminal problems may be corrected by adding more
+capabilities of the form \fBx\fR\fIx\fR.
+.PP
+.SS Similar Terminals
+.PP
+If there are two very similar terminals,
+one can be defined as being just like the other with certain exceptions.
+The string capability \fBuse\fR can be given
+with the name of the similar terminal.
+The capabilities given before
+.B use
+override those in the terminal type invoked by
+.BR use .
+A capability can be canceled by placing \fBxx@\fR to the left of the
+capability definition, where xx is the capability.
+For example, the entry
+.PP
+ 2621-nl, smkx@, rmkx@, use=2621,
+.PP
+defines a 2621-nl that does not have the \fBsmkx\fR or \fBrmkx\fR capabilities,
+and hence does not turn on the function key labels when in visual mode.
+This is useful for different modes for a terminal, or for different
+user preferences.
+.PP
+.SS Pitfalls of Long Entries
+.PP
+Long terminfo entries are unlikely to be a problem; to date, no entry has even
+approached terminfo's 4K string-table maximum. Unfortunately, the termcap
+translations are much more strictly limited (to 1K), thus termcap translations
+of long terminfo entries can cause problems.
+.PP
+The man pages for 4.3BSD and older versions of tgetent() instruct the user to
+allocate a 1K buffer for the termcap entry. The entry gets null-terminated by
+the termcap library, so that makes the maximum safe length for a termcap entry
+1k-1 (1023) bytes. Depending on what the application and the termcap library
+being used does, and where in the termcap file the terminal type that tgetent()
+is searching for is, several bad things can happen.
+.PP
+Some termcap libraries print a warning message or exit if they find an
+entry that's longer than 1023 bytes; others don't; others truncate the
+entries to 1023 bytes. Some application programs allocate more than
+the recommended 1K for the termcap entry; others don't.
+.PP
+Each termcap entry has two important sizes associated with it: before
+"tc" expansion, and after "tc" expansion. "tc" is the capability that
+tacks on another termcap entry to the end of the current one, to add
+on its capabilities. If a termcap entry doesn't use the "tc"
+capability, then of course the two lengths are the same.
+.PP
+The "before tc expansion" length is the most important one, because it
+affects more than just users of that particular terminal. This is the
+length of the entry as it exists in /etc/termcap, minus the
+backslash-newline pairs, which tgetent() strips out while reading it.
+Some termcap libraries strip off the final newline, too (GNU termcap does not).
+Now suppose:
+.TP 5
+*
+a termcap entry before expansion is more than 1023 bytes long,
+.TP 5
+*
+and the application has only allocated a 1k buffer,
+.TP 5
+*
+and the termcap library (like the one in BSD/OS 1.1 and GNU) reads
+the whole entry into the buffer, no matter what its length, to see
+if it's the entry it wants,
+.TP 5
+*
+and tgetent() is searching for a terminal type that either is the
+long entry, appears in the termcap file after the long entry, or
+doesn't appear in the file at all (so that tgetent() has to search
+the whole termcap file).
+.PP
+Then tgetent() will overwrite memory, perhaps its stack, and probably core dump
+the program. Programs like telnet are particularly vulnerable; modern telnets
+pass along values like the terminal type automatically. The results are almost
+as undesirable with a termcap library, like SunOS 4.1.3 and Ultrix 4.4, that
+prints warning messages when it reads an overly long termcap entry. If a
+termcap library truncates long entries, like OSF/1 3.0, it is immune to dying
+here but will return incorrect data for the terminal.
+.PP
+The "after tc expansion" length will have a similar effect to the
+above, but only for people who actually set TERM to that terminal
+type, since tgetent() only does "tc" expansion once it's found the
+terminal type it was looking for, not while searching.
+.PP
+In summary, a termcap entry that is longer than 1023 bytes can cause,
+on various combinations of termcap libraries and applications, a core
+dump, warnings, or incorrect operation. If it's too long even before
+"tc" expansion, it will have this effect even for users of some other
+terminal types and users whose TERM variable does not have a termcap
+entry.
+.PP
+When in -C (translate to termcap) mode, the \fBncurses\fR implementation of
+\fBtic\fR(1) issues warning messages when the pre-tc length of a termcap
+translation is too long. The -c (check) option also checks resolved (after tc
+expansion) lengths.
+.SS Binary Compatibility
+It is not wise to count on portability of binary terminfo entries between
+commercial UNIX versions. The problem is that there are at least two versions
+of terminfo (under HP-UX and AIX) which diverged from System V terminfo after
+SVr1, and have added extension capabilities to the string table that (in the
+binary format) collide with System V and XSI Curses extensions.
+.SH EXTENSIONS
+The %x operator in parameterized strings is unique to the ncurses implementation
+of \fBtparm\fR (it is required in order to support an unfortunate choice of
+\fBinitc\fR format on the Linux console).
+.PP
+Some SVr4 \fBcurses\fR implementations, and all previous to SVr4, don't
+interpret the %A and %O operators in parameter strings.
+.PP
+SVr4/XPG4 do not specify whether \fBmsgr\fR licenses movement while in
+an alternate-character-set mode (such modes may, among other things, map
+CR and NL to characters that don't trigger local motions).
+The \fBncurses\fR implementation ignores \fBmsgr\fR in \fBALTCHARSET\fR
+mode. This raises the possibility that an XPG4
+implementation making the opposite interpretation may need terminfo
+entries made for \fBncurses\fR to have \fBmsgr\fR turned off.
+.PP
+The \fBncurses\fR library handles insert-character and insert-character modes
+in a slightly non-standard way in order to get better update efficiency. See
+the \fBInsert/Delete Character\fR subsection above.
+.PP
+The parameter substitutions for \fBset_clock\fR and \fBdisplay_clock\fR are
+not documented in SVr4 or the XSI Curses standard. They are deduced from the
+documentation for the AT&T 505 terminal.
+.PP
+Be careful assigning the \fBkmous\fR capability. The \fBncurses\fR wants to
+interpret it as \fBKEY_MOUSE\fR, for use by terminals and emulators like xterm
+that can return mouse-tracking information in the keyboard-input stream.
+.PP
+Different commercial ports of terminfo and curses support different subsets of
+the XSI Curses standard and (in some cases) different extension sets. Here
+is a summary, accurate as of October 1995:
+.PP
+\fBSVR4, Solaris, ncurses\fR --
+These support all SVr4 capabilities.
+.PP
+\fBSGI\fR --
+Supports the SVr4 set, adds one undocumented extended string
+capability (\fBset_pglen\fR).
+.PP
+\fBSVr1, Ultrix\fR --
+These support a restricted subset of terminfo capabilities. The booleans
+end with \fBxon_xoff\fR; the numerics with \fBwidth_status_line\fR; and the
+strings with \fBprtr_non\fR.
+.PP
+\fBHP/UX\fR --
+Supports the SVr1 subset, plus the SVr[234] numerics \fBnum_labels\fR,
+\fBlabel_height\fR, \fBlabel_width\fR, plus function keys 11 through 63, plus
+\fBplab_norm\fR, \fBlabel_on\fR, and \fBlabel_off\fR, plus some incompatible
+extensions in the string table.
+.PP
+\fBAIX\fR --
+Supports the SVr1 subset, plus function keys 11 through 63, plus a number
+of incompatible string table extensions.
+.PP
+\fBOSF\fR --
+Supports both the SVr4 set and the AIX extensions.
+.SH FILES
+.TP 25
+\*d/?/*
+files containing terminal descriptions
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+\fBtic\fR(1M), \fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBprintf\fR(3S), \fBterm\fR(\*n).
+.SH AUTHORS
+Zeyd M. Ben-Halim, Eric S. Raymond, Thomas E. Dickey.
+Based on pcurses by Pavel Curtis.
+.\"#
+.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
+.\"# Local Variables:
+.\"# mode:nroff
+.\"# fill-column:79
+.\"# End:
diff --git a/contrib/ncurses/man/tic.1m b/contrib/ncurses/man/tic.1m
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7f8fe496593f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/ncurses/man/tic.1m
@@ -0,0 +1,285 @@
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998,1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" *
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
+.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
+.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
+.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
+.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
+.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
+.\" *
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
+.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
+.\" *
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
+.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
+.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
+.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
+.\" *
+.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
+.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
+.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
+.\" authorization. *
+.\"***************************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" $Id: tic.1m,v 1.25 1999/03/07 02:07:06 tom Exp $
+.TH tic 1M ""
+.ds n 5
+.ds d @DATADIR@/terminfo
+.SH NAME
+\fBtic\fR - the \fIterminfo\fR entry-description compiler
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBtic\fR
+[\fB\-\
+1\
+C\
+I\
+N\
+R\
+T\
+c\
+f\
+r\
+s\
+x\
+\fR]
+[\fB-e\fR \fInames\fR]
+[\fB-o\fR \fIdir\fR]
+[\fB-v\fR[\fIn\fR]]
+[\fB-w\fR[\fIn\fR]]
+\fIfile\fR
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The command \fBtic\fR translates a \fBterminfo\fR file from source
+format into compiled format. The compiled format is necessary for use with
+the library routines in \fBncurses\fR(3X).
+.PP
+The results are normally placed in the system terminfo
+directory \fB\*d\fR. There are two ways to change this behavior.
+.PP
+First, you may override the system default by setting the variable
+\fBTERMINFO\fR in your shell environment to a valid (existing) directory name.
+.PP
+Secondly, if \fBtic\fR cannot get access to \fI\*d\fR or your TERMINFO
+directory, it looks for the directory \fI$HOME/.terminfo\fR; if that directory
+exists, the entry is placed there.
+.PP
+Libraries that read terminfo entries are expected to check for a TERMINFO
+directory first, look at \fI$HOME/.terminfo\fR if TERMINFO is not set, and
+finally look in \fI\*d\fR.
+.TP
+\fB-c\fR
+specifies to only check \fIfile\fR for errors, including syntax problems and
+bad use links. If you specify \fB-C\fR (\fB-I\fR) with this option, the code
+will print warnings about entries which, after use resolution, are more than
+1023 (4096) bytes long. Due to a fixed buffer length in older termcap
+libraries (and a documented limit in terminfo), these entries may cause core
+dumps.
+.TP
+\fB-v\fR\fIn\fR
+specifies that (verbose) output be written to standard error trace
+information showing \fBtic\fR's progress. The optional integer
+\fIn\fR is a number from 1 to 10, inclusive, indicating the desired
+level of detail of information. If \fIn\fR is omitted, the default
+level is 1. If \fIn\fR is specified and greater than 1, the level of
+detail is increased.
+.TP
+\fB-o\fR\fIdir\fR
+Write compiled entries to given directory. Overrides the TERMINFO environment
+variable.
+.TP
+\fB-w\fR\fIn\fR
+specifies the width of the output.
+.TP
+\fB-1\fR
+restricts the output to a single column
+.TP
+\fB-C\fR
+Force source translation to termcap format. Note: this differs from the -C
+option of \fIinfocmp\fR(1M) in that it does not merely translate capability
+names, but also translates terminfo strings to termcap format. Capabilities
+that are not translatable are left in the entry under their terminfo names
+but commented out with two preceding dots.
+.TP
+\fB-G\fR
+Display constant literals in decimal form
+rather than their character equivalents.
+.TP
+\fB-I\fR
+Force source translation to terminfo format.
+.TP
+\fB-L\fR
+Force source translation to terminfo format
+using the long C variable names listed in <\fBterm.h\fR>
+.TP
+\fB-N\fR
+Disable smart defaults.
+Normally, when translating from termcap to terminfo, the compiler makes
+a number of assumptions about the defaults of string capabilities
+\fBreset1_string\fR, \fBcarriage_return\fR, \fBcursor_left\fR,
+\fBcursor_down\fR, \fBscroll_forward\fR, \fBtab\fR, \fBnewline\fR,
+\fBkey_backspace\fR, \fBkey_left\fR, and \fBkey_down\fR, then attempts
+to use obsolete termcap capabilities to deduce correct values. It also
+normally suppresses output of obsolete termcap capabilities such as \fBbs\fR.
+This option forces a more literal translation that also preserves the
+obsolete capabilities.
+.TP
+\fB-R\fR\fIsubset\fR
+Restrict output to a given subset. This option is for use with archaic
+versions of terminfo like those on SVr1, Ultrix, or HP/UX that don't support
+the full set of SVR4/XSI Curses terminfo; and outright broken ports like AIX 3.x
+that have their own extensions incompatible with SVr4/XSI. Available subsets
+are "SVr1", "Ultrix", "HP", "BSD" and "AIX"; see \fBterminfo\fR(\*n) for details.
+.TP
+\fB-T\fR
+eliminates size-restrictions on the generated text.
+This is mainly useful for testing and analysis, since the compiled
+descriptions are limited (e.g., 1023 for termcap, 4096 for terminfo).
+.TP
+\fB-r\fR
+Force entry resolution (so there are no remaining tc capabilities) even
+when doing translation to termcap format. This may be needed if you are
+preparing a termcap file for a termcap library (such as GNU termcap up
+to version 1.3 or BSD termcap up to 4.3BSD) that doesn't handle multiple
+tc capabilities per entry.
+.TP
+\fB-e\fR
+Limit writes and translations to the following comma-separated list of
+terminals.
+If any name or alias of a terminal matches one of the names in
+the list, the entry will be written or translated as normal.
+Otherwise no output will be generated for it.
+The option value is interpreted as a file containing the list if it
+contains a '/'.
+(Note: depending on how tic was compiled, this option may require -I or -C.)
+.TP
+\fB-f\fR
+Display complex terminfo strings which contain if/then/else/endif expressions
+indented for readability.
+.TP
+\fB-g\fR
+Display constant character literals in quoted form
+rather than their decimal equivalents.
+.TP
+\fB-s\fR
+Summarize the compile by showing the directory into which entries
+are written, and the number of entries which are compiled.
+.TP
+\fB-x\fR
+Treat unknown capabilities as user-defined.
+.TP
+\fIfile\fR
+contains one or more \fBterminfo\fR terminal descriptions in source
+format [see \fBterminfo\fR(\*n)]. Each description in the file
+describes the capabilities of a particular terminal.
+.PP
+The debug flag levels are as follows:
+.TP
+1
+Names of files created and linked
+.TP
+2
+Information related to the ``use'' facility
+.TP
+3
+Statistics from the hashing algorithm
+.TP
+5
+String-table memory allocations
+.TP
+7
+Entries into the string-table
+.TP
+8
+List of tokens encountered by scanner
+.TP
+9
+All values computed in construction of the hash table
+.LP
+If n is not given, it is taken to be one.
+.PP
+All but one of the capabilities recognized by \fBtic\fR are documented
+in \fBterminfo\fR(\*n). The exception is the \fBuse\fR capability.
+
+When a \fBuse\fR=\fIentry\fR-\fIname\fR field is discovered in a
+terminal entry currently being compiled, \fBtic\fR reads in the binary
+from \fB\*d\fR to complete the entry. (Entries created from
+\fIfile\fR will be used first. If the environment variable
+\fBTERMINFO\fR is set, that directory is searched instead of
+\fB\*d\fR.) \fBtic\fR duplicates the capabilities in
+\fIentry\fR-\fIname\fR for the current entry, with the exception of
+those capabilities that explicitly are defined in the current entry.
+
+When an entry, e.g., \fBentry_name_1\fR, contains a
+\fBuse=\fR\fIentry\fR_\fIname\fR_\fI2\fR field, any canceled
+capabilities in \fIentry\fR_\fIname\fR_\fI2\fR must also appear in
+\fBentry_name_1\fR before \fBuse=\fR for these capabilities to be
+canceled in \fBentry_name_1\fR.
+
+If the environment variable \fBTERMINFO\fR is set, the compiled
+results are placed there instead of \fB\*d\fR.
+
+Total compiled entries cannot exceed 4096 bytes. The name field cannot
+exceed 512 bytes. Terminal names exceeding the maximum alias length
+(32 characters on systems with long filenames, 14 characters otherwise)
+will be truncated to the maximum alias length and a warning message will be printed.
+.SH COMPATIBILITY
+There is some evidence that historic \fBtic\fR implementations treated
+description fields with no whitespace in them as additional aliases or
+short names. This \fBtic\fR does not do that, but it does warn when
+description fields may be treated that way and check them for dangerous
+characters.
+.SH EXTENSIONS
+Unlike the stock SVr4 \fBtic\fR command, this implementation can actually
+compile termcap sources. In fact, entries in terminfo and termcap syntax can
+be mixed in a single source file. See \fBterminfo\fR(\*n) for the list of
+termcap names taken to be equivalent to terminfo names.
+
+The SVr4 manual pages are not